The URL can be used to link to this page

Project Manual i f PROJECT MANUAL r r b Budget Inn Expansion for : r i Shaki Bhatti 931 NYS Route 9 Queensbury, New York 12804 r 6 r r r r r r r r r D EU 1 1 1 r r ' Architect: r SD ATELIER - Architecture, L. L.C. r 510 Broadway, Suite 33 r Saratoga Springs , New York 12866 www.sdatelier.com sdateHerO-gs.com r r Date: November 16, 2005 r r r r w • Project Number #2003-66 S INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS Client: Shaki Bhatti—Owner Cell-796-7939 Office-792-6524 Budget Inn Motel 931 NYS Route 9 Queensbury, New York 12804 Architect: SD Atelier Architecture 510 Broadway, Suite 33 Saratoga Springs, New York 12866 518-587-3385 ph/fax sdatelier@cs.com T1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS O }* s j z 1 t DIVISIONS n Booklet 1 1 General Requirements Pages- 9-15 2 Site Work Pages-16 17 �" 3 Concrete Pages-18-34 4 Masonry Not Applicable 5 Metals Pages-35 6 Carpentry Pages-36-45 7 Moisture Protection Pages-46-48 • 8 Doors,Windows,and Glass Pages-49-62 9 Finishes Pages-63-68 . 10 Specialties Pages-69 11 Equipment Pages-69 12 Furnishings Not Applicable . 13 Special Construction Not Applicable 14 Conveying Systems Not Applicable • LIST OF DRAWINGS ARCHITECTURAL TITLE SHEET A-S ARCHITECTURAL SITE LOCATION PLAN . A-LS LIFE SAFETY PLANS-FIRST FLOOR PLAN, SECOND FLOOR PLAN, DETAILS&NOTES A-0 BASEMENT/FOUNDATION/FOOTING PLAN/DETAILS&NOTES A-1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN, SECOND FLOOR PLAN&NOTES AAA ENLARGED PLAN DETAILS&NOTES A-2 NORTH&EAST ELEVATIONS&NOTES A-3 SOUTH&WEST ELEVATIONS&NOTES A-4 FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLAN,SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN&NOTES A-5 ROOF FRAMING PLAN, ROOF PLAN&NOTES A-6 BUILDING SECTIONS&NOTES A-7 WALL SECTIONS,DETAILS&NOTES A-8 WALL SECTIONS, DETAILS&NOTES A-9 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, DETAILS&NOTES MECHANICAL PLUMBING &ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS: M-1 FIRST&SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL/HVAC PLANS, DETAILS&NOTES P-0 PLUMBING LEGEND/DETAILS P-B BASEMENT PLUMBING PLAN P-1 FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P-2 SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN E-1 FIRST&SECOND FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLANS, DETAILS&NOTES EXISTING CONDITIONS DRAWINGS: EX-1 EXISTING FIRST FLOOR PLAN&NOTES ' EX-2 EXISTING ELEVATION&NOTES Budget-inn%CDlPhase llSpecs.&ScheduleslBudget lnn-Specification-Phase l.doc 2 The Contract shall be American Institute of Architects Document A 101-1997, "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor"where the Basis of Payment is a Stipulated Sum, including the General Conditions. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS The term Owner throughout these specifications shall mean: Shaki Bhatti—Owner Cell-796-7939 Office-792-6524 Budget Inn Motel 931 NYS Route 9 Queensbury,New York 12804 1.INTENT OF DOCUMENTS AND SCOPE OF WORK: In all decisions that involve a change in scope to the project,the Contractor shall obtain approval of the architect before initiation of a decision. The specifications and drawings are intended to cover all materials,labor, incidentals,services,etc.for the satisfactory completion of the work. All work must be done in accordance with accepted standards and local practices for quality workmanship and materials. All manufactured items shall be installed or applied as directed by the manuf. instructions. The Owner shall have the privilege of supplying certain items of material after award of Contract. The Contractor shall install this material and give the Owner an equitable credit for such items if already included within. The documents are complimentary,and what is called for on any one shall be binding as if called for by all documents;(drawings and specifications). 2.PERMITS AND SURVEYS : The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and licenses required including the Building Permit. The Owner shall provide all surveys as required for the Zoning and/or Building Permit applications. Measurements,Grade Lines and levels;shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor.Verify all existing lines and levels and dimensions as shown on the site plan and elevations. Before placement of order for materials or doing work,which is dependent upon coordination with building conditions the General Contractor shall verify all dimensions by surveys and taking measurements.No consideration will be given to any claim based on differences between the actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings unless written notice is received before the start of construction.Any discrepancies between the drawings and/or the specifications and the existing conditions shall be referred to the Architect for additional . instructions before any work affected thereby is begun. 3.CLEAN-UP: • The job site shall be kept reasonably clean at all times during construction. Trash shall be trucked away weekly. Wash all windows and clean thoroughly(labels removed and broom clean) rbefore final payment. 4.DISCREPANCIES: The Contractor shall notify the Architect immediately of any discrepancies,in the Contract Documents,and not proceed with the work in those areas, until the discrepancies are resolved. 5.CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST: If the contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, he shall give the Owner written notice thereof within(7)days after the occurrence of the event-giving rise to each claim.This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the work except in emergency conditions affecting life or property. No claims shall be valid unless so made.Communication with the owner may be made by telephone or fax as well. The adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be accompanied by change order. 'p Budget-lnnIMPhase ASpecs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Spec ficaffon-Phase 1.doc 3 • S.CONCEALED CONDITIONS: The General Contractor and all Sub-Contractors;whose responsibility is the excavation work shall obtain a"shake out"which locates all underground facilities according to New York State Law,Code Rule 53.The General Contractor and all Sub-Contractors;shall contact the Underground facilities >� Protective Organization(UFPO)for such information at least two(2)work days prior to the commencement of such excavation.The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any and all damages,which might be accompanied by his failure to preserve underground facilities.For most upstate counties the telephone number is 1-800-962-7962. Should concealed conditions be encountered below the existing ground surface (i.e.unexpected ground water),the Contract Sum shall be adjusted by Change Order, if approved by the Owner. 7. DOCUMENT SEPERATION AND RESPONSIBILITY: Separation of the Specification into divisions and sections is for convenience only 40 and is not intended to establish limits of work,define or limit specific work of a Subcontractor,or delegate responsibilities for the General Contractor. It is the General Contractor's responsibility to direct whom is to price and perform each segment of the work. 8.FINAL PAYMENT: The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a complete release of all liens arising out of this Contract prior to final payment.In addition,the Contractor shall furnish proof of Payment to Subcontractors after scope of subcontractor's work is complete.This shall be done in order to avoid any potential for claims or liens against the Owner. Final Payment by the Owner shall be made upon completion of all Punch List items. 9.GUARANTEE/ WARRANTY: Two years from the date of issuance of the Final Payment,the plumbing, electrical,heating,cooling and ventilation systems of the residence shall be free from defects due to a failure from faulty workmanship or materials. . Six years from the date of issuance of the Final Payment,the home shall be free from material defects. This General Contractor shall keep same in repair and replace any defective parts without cost to the Owner for a period of one year after completion of the . job. Provide all guarantees as called for within,including the five-year guarantee as r per Division 7. 10. INSURANCE: The insurance as required shall be written for the following limits as listed below, or greater if required by the Town of Queensbury or New York State. Compensation Insurance: The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the life of this Contract, Workmen's Compensation for all of his employees to be engaged in the work on the project under this Contract,and in case of any such work sublet,the Contractor shall require his Subcontractor similarly to provide Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all the latter employees to be engaged in such work unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by the Contractors Compensation Insurance by the protection afforded by the Contractor's Compensation Insurance.These coverage's shall meet the Statutory Limits of New York State. Comprehensive Commercial General Liability including Contractual: The Contractor shall procure and maintain insurance in the following amounts: a. $ 1,000,000—each occurrence bodily injury and property damage. b. $2,000,000—general aggregate c. $2,000,000—products/completed operations aggregate—to be maintained for 1 year after final payment. d. Include Architect/Engineers as additional insureds. Budget-triM PPhase 10pecs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 4 r Builder's Risk Insurance: Before commencement of the work,the contractor shall submit written evidence that he has obtained,for the period of the contract,builders risk'all risk" completed value insurance coverage upon the entire project which is the subject of this contract,including completed work and work in progress.Such insurance shall include as Additional insureds:Owner,Architect/Engineers and their consultants,and each of their officers,employees and agents,and any other persons with an insurable interest. Umbrella Liability: a. $2,000,000—over primary insurance. b. Include Architect/Engineers as additional Insureds. Business Auto Liability: c. $ 1,000,000—bodily injury and property damage combined limit. d. $ 1,000,000—hired and non-owned auto liability. Owners Protective: Before commencement of the work,the contractor shall submit written evidence that he has obtained,for the period of the contract,an"OCP"policy in the name of the Owner. Limits of not less than$1,000,000 each occurrence;$1,000,000 aggregate shall be provided.Policy shall be in the name of Shaki Bhatti. Certificates: Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the work.The certificates and insurance policies required by this contract shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. All companies shall be licensed to business in the State of New York. Indemnity: The Contractor shall hold harmless, indemnity,and defend the Owner, Architect /Engineers and their consultants,and each of their officers and employees and agents from any and all liability claims,losses or damages arising or alleged to . arise from the performance of the work described herein,but not including the sole negligence of the Owner or the Architect/Engineer. Arivrovals: The Contractor shall not commence work until the required insurance and coverage's have been submitted and approved by he owner's insurance agent. The General Contractor shall warrant these requirements—upon his bid . submission. 11. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTOR'S: The Genera(Contractor shall submit a list of his Subcontractors to the Owner and Architect,for their review. 12. STARTING AND COMPLETION DATES: iAll bidders shall fumish starting and completion dates as called for on the required Bid Form. ' 13. APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT: rContractor shall make preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Submit schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest feasible date,but in no case later that 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment. Payment Application Times:-Each progress payment date is as indicated in the Agreement.The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. Payment Application Forms-Use AIA Document G 702 and Continuation Sheets G 703 as the Form for Application for Payment. 1 1 Budget-1nn1CDlPhase 1tSpecs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 5 r r Transmittal-Submit 3 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by means of ensuring receipt within 24 hours;one copy shall be complete,including waivers of lien and similar attachments,when required. Initial Application of Payment:Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: List of Subcontractors List of Principal suppliers and Fabricators Schedule of Values Contractor's Constructions Schedule(preliminary,if not final) Schedule of Unit prices Copies of respective subcontracting permits. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of work Initial progress report. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion:Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,submit an Application for Payment;this application shall reflect any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the work. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include: Occupancy permits and similar approvals Warranties(guarantees)and maintenance agreements. Test/adjust/balance records. Final cleaning. Application for reduction of retainage,and consent of surety. Advise on shifting insurance coverage. List of incomplete work,recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. Final Payment Application:Administrative actions and submittals,which must precede or coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment, include the following: Completion of Project closeout requirements. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. Assurance that works not complete and accepted will be completed without undue delay. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. Proof that taxes,fees and similar obligations have been paid. Removal of surplus materials,rubbish and similar elements. 14.PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS: Substitutions: requests for changes in products,materials,equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Sub-Contractors after the award of the sub-contracts are considered requests for "substitutions". The following are not considered substitutions: Substitutions requested by Bidders during the Bidding period,and accepted prior to award of the Sub-Contracts,are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for Substitutions. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Construction Documents. The Sub-Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing Rregulations and orders issued by governing authorities. Substitution requests shall be considered only if received within 45 days after commencement of the Work.Requests after this period may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. Budget-InnIMPhase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doC 6 w Submit three copies of each request for substitutions for consideration. Identify the product or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related information(Specification number and drawing numbers as relevant). Provide product data,samples,detailed comparisons(such as size,weight,affect on work schedule-coordination concerns,durability,performance and visual effect- 4) those issues as to allow for a obvious decision. Sub-Contractor submitting change shall be responsible for listing changes and/or modifications to other parts of the work as required due to their substitution. Architect and Owner shall within one week of receipt for substitution-request further information/documentation.Within 2 weeks of receipt of substitution(or 1 week after request for further information)whichever is later,the Architect shall make a determination on the Substitution request. If a decision is not reached within this time frame the original specified item, material shall be as per Contract Documents.All accepted Substitutions shall be processed as a Change Order. Substitutions shall be directly related to"or equal"clause;they shall meet the design intent and performance as originally specified in the Contract Documents. The final determination as made by the Architect shall allow no further substitutions for this material,item or scope of work. • The Sub-Contractor's substitution requests shall be received and considered by • the Architect only when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied,as determined by the Architect. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract • Documents. The request is timely,fully documented,and submitted properly. The request is a fair,acceptable equal-as determined by the Architect. The specified item or scope of work cannot be provided within the Contract Period or scheduling will not accommodate substitution. (this also includes any impact of a governing board's required action). 46 A substantial advantage is offered the Owner,in terms of cost,time,energy conversation or other considerations of merit,after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear.Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services,increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Sub-Contractor's,and similar considerations. The specified substitution cannot be coordinated with other materials,or involves more than one Sub-Contractor,and each Sub-Contractor is not able to cooperate with the others,to provide a uniform and consistent compatibility and quality of product. M i i i i Budget4nn1CDlPhase ASpecs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 7 REQUIRED BID FORM (Please detach and submit.) Deliver to: Shaki Bhatti—Owner Cell-796-7939 Office-792-6524 Budget Inn Motel 931 NYS Route 9 Queensbury, New York 12804 Copy to: SD Atelier-Architecture 510 Broadway, Suite 33 Saratoga Springs, New York 12866 518-587-3385 e-mailSDATELIER@cs.com Bid Date=to be determined by Owner Detach the Bid Form from the back of the specifications,on which to submit the bid. Submit two completed bid forms.No bids will be accepted over the telephone or after the above date. Bids faxed or e- mail are acceptable as long as two duplicate"hard-copy"forms are received at our office within three business days;thereafter. Please return the Contract Documents to the Architect in good condition within 10 days after submitting a bid.Before submitting a bid,each bidder shall carefully examine all Contract Documents,and visit the site to inform himself of all existing conditions and limitations under which the work is to be performed. The phrase`or equal"shall mean substitutions will be accepted,however,do not assume material, or methods will be accepted as equivalent unless the item has been specifically approved by the Architect. Substitutions will only be considered when accompanied by full and complete technical data,and all other information required by the Architect to evaluate the proposed substitutions. The decision of the Architect shall be final. Verify,prior to submitting a bid,that all specified items will be available in time for installation during the work. In the event items will not be available,notify the Architect.Verify also any conflicts,discrepancies and if not time to clarify before submission of bid—assume the more expensive option. All bidders shall note on the Bid Form the date of the Documents from which they are bidding and they shall list all Addendum they have received. All Bid Prices as submitted shall be held for a minimum period of thirty days to allow for the selection of a Contractor. Having carefully examined the Project Manual,Proposed Econo-Lodge Expansion for:Aftab (Sam) Bhatti—Owner. and,having visited the site and premises,examined all conditions affecting the work;the undersigned proposes to furnish all materials,labor and services,transportation and equipment required for the satisfactory completion of the work for the stipulated sum of: Sub-Total Base Bid Price $ Dollars Contigency $ 20,000 Dollars Allowance Prices: Door Hardware $ 5,000 Toilet accessories $ 2,500 Granite Countertops $ 3,500 Reception Built-ins, Breakfast Area Built-ins,&Bathroom Cabinets $ 8,000 Total Base Bid Price $ Dollars Add Alternates: A. Gutters&Downspouts— =$ Dollars Receipt of following Addendum Starting Date Finish Date COMPANY NAME ADDRESS 1 r SIGNATURE DATE rBudget-1nnIM Phase 1tSpecs.&ScheduleslBudget lnn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 8 r DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - SECTION 1A-SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1A.01 DAMAGES : The Contractor shall repair,at his expense,any damages done to the property of the Owner caused by his work,his manners or methods of construction,and/or exposure to the weather. 1A.02 TEMPORARY SERVICES : Contractor shall provide all services as necessary for completion of the project, I with all connection costs the responsibility of the Contractor.Services included, but are not limited to include: Telephone Electricity Heating(as needed for site conditions) Water 1A.03 TEMPORARY PARTITIONS AND ENCLOSURES: Provide temporary bracing,shoring,forms,ties,etc.as required by the construction. Provide temporary enclosures as required to protect against the weather,dust/dirt of construction and floating particles. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of building. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operation. Protect floors with suitable covering when necessary. Provide temporary weather protection during internal between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. Remove protections at completions of work. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no cost to Owner. Environmental Controls:Use water sprinkling,temporary enclosures,and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level.Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, ` flooding,and pollution. 1A.04 STORAGE AND OVERLOADING : In storing materials,the Contractor shall consult with the Owner and shall restrict his storage to spaces or areas of the site approved for such storage. 1A.05 OWNER-SUPPLIED ITEMS: The following items shall be furnished by the owner to be installed by the Contractor: (General Contractor shall verify these items with building owner before bid) Specific Decorative Lighting Fixtures TV/Cable Antenna, Phones Appliances, Furniture,curtains(window treatments),or Specialty Equipment. 1A.06 ITEMS NOT INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT: The following items are not to be included as part of the Contract: . (materials and labor) Finegrading,fertilizing and seeding.(Refer to Engineer site drawings— by Jarrett—Martin Engineers). Budget-Inn1CDVPhase ASpecs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 9 1A.07 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA and SAMPLES: RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement, including General and Supplementary Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications, apply to work of this Section. B. Progress Schedules C. Product Options and Substitutions • D. Contract Close-Out. • SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Present in a Gear and thorough manner. Title each Drawing with Project name and number;identify each element of Shop Drawings by reference to sheet number and detail,schedule,or other appropriate identification of Contract Documents. B. Identify field dimensions:show relation to adjacent products or elements of the Work and show critical features. C. Contractors shall make Submittals of any materials regardless of if they are specified items in this Specification. PRODUCT DATA: A. Submit only pages that are pertinent;mark each copy of standard printed data to specifically identify only pertinent products and reference each to Specification Section and Article number. Show standards,performance characteristics and capacities;wiring and piping diagrams;controls;component parts;finishes;dimensions and required clearances. B. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic Drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically . applicable to the Work. Delete information not applicable. SAMPLES: A. Submit full range of manufacturer's standard finishes of the actual product,except when more restrictive requirements are specified. Indicate colors,textures and patterns for Architect selection. B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of products, including parts and attachments. C. Label each sample with identification indicating project name and . number and all other data necessary to connect the sample with the specific element of or location with the Work. D. Field Sample Location:Acceptable finishes may be retained in the completed Work. E. Provide field samples of finishes at Project,at location acceptable to Architect or as required by individual Specifications Section. Install each sample complete and finished. MANUFACTURER'S PUBLISHED INSTRUCTIONS: A. Fumish manufacturer's published instructions for storage,preparation, assembly, installation,startup,adjusting,balancing and finishing. CONTRACTOR'S EXAMINATION: A. Review Submittals prior to delivery to Architect. Verify quantities,field measurements,field construction criteria,assembly and installation requirements,manufacturer's catalog numbers and conformance of Submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Sign or initial each sheet of Shop Drawings,product data and each sample label to certify coordination and compliance with requirements rof Contract Documents. Notify Architect,in writing,at time if submittal of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. C. Do not fabricate products or begin Work that requires submittals until return of submittal with Architect Notice. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Transmit Submittal pursuant to approved Progress Schedule. B. Provide 6"x 8"blank space on each Submittal for Contract and Architect stamps. C. Apply Contractor's stamp,signed or initialed,certifying to review verification of products,field dimensions,quantities,filed construction Budget-lnnIMPhase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 10 criteria,and coordination of information with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. D. Coordinate Submittal into logical groupings to facilitate inter-relation of . several items. Finishes which involve Architect selection of colors,textures or patterns. Associated items that require correlation for efficient function or for installation. SUBMITTAL QUANTITIES: A. Submit number of opaque reproductions of Shop Drawings Contractor requires plus five(5)that will be retained by Architect. B. Submit number of copies of product data and manufacturer's published instructions Contractor requires plus(5)copies that will be retained by the Architect. C. Submit number of samples specified in individual Specifications Sections. D. Submit under Architect-accepted Transmittal Letter. Identify Project by title and number. Identify Work and product by Specifications Section and Article Number. RESUBMITTALS: A. Make Resubmittals under procedures specified for initial Submittals. Identify changes since previous Submittal. B. If the resubmittal process involves three or more submissions due to Contractor's fault,the Architect,at his discretion,may charge the Contractor for the Architect's time. - The Architect will submit a bill for his time to the Owner,who shall deduct the amount from the Contractor's application for payment. ARCHITECT'S REVIEW: . A. Allow fourteen(14)day for Architect's review of each Submittal. Daily allowance is time in possession of Architect and exclusive of delivery from and to Contractor exclusive of resubmission. B. Architect's review is limited to aesthetics,architectural design and information contained in Contract Documents. Similarly,Consultant's review is limited to design relating to it specific filed of expertise and its information contained in Contract Documents. Architect's or Consultant's review is neither a verification of Contractor's examination nor a substitution of Contractor's responsibilities. Architect or SConsultant may inform Contractor of any conspicuous errors on a Submittal without prejudice to being harmless to Contractor's examinations and responsibilities. DISTRIBUTION: A. Duplicate and distribute,as necessary,reproductions of Shop Drawings,product data,manufacturer's instructions,and samples bearing Architect stamp of approval to Project Site,Subcontractors, Suppliers,and other entities requiring information. SUBMITTAL LOG: A. Complete a(Submittal Log)as required and submit them no later than 15 days after approval of the Contract. - Submittal Log: Indicate in the spaces following each item,the date the item will be submitted,the date approval is required (allow at least 3 weeks),and the date delivery of the material or equipment is necessary for timely completion of the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule. The date entered for submittal of each item is the last day a substitution will be considered. r Budget-InnIMPhase 1t3pecs.&ScheduleslBudgetInn-Speclticehon-Phase 1.doc 11 1A.08 CASH ALLOWANCES: The following cash allowance amounts shall be included as part of the work,for materials only.The cost of installation shall be included in the work with the Contractor responsible for all required co-ordination. Upon submission of Final Payment the General Contractor shall verify total amounts as expended for • allowance items.Credits or Additional Costs shall be accommodated by Change Order Forms. Include the following allowance amounts: . Door Hardware $ 5,000 Toilet accessories $ 2,500 Granite Countertops $ 3,500 Reception Built-ins, Breakfast Area Built-ins,&Bathroom Cabinets $ 8,000 1A.09 CONTINGENCY: Include in the Contract a contingency to cover the cost of unforeseen conditions; site conditions,etc.-$50,000.00. All items as stated by the General Contractor to be a"Contingency Item"—shall be verified by the Architect and Owner and agreed to as such. Upon this agreement the Architect shall create a Change Order for the amount as agreed to by the General Contractor,Architect and Owner. Not until this Change Order has been signed shall this become part of the"Work Scope°. If there is no Change Order issue for this Contingency amount—it will be reimbursed to the Owner at final payment and processed as a Change Order. 1A.10 ADD ALTERNATES : Provide the following alternate prices including the cost of all labor and materials unless noted otherwise. Alternate price is therefore not included in base bid. A. Roof Gutters and Downspouts(See Division 7A.11)- 1A.11 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: ` General Contractor shall be responsible for the demolition and removal of all elements as required by the new work.All items(unless otherwise directed shall be removed of the site)or salvaged and located as directed by Owner. . This scope of work shall include the following: Portions of the building components indicated on the drawings and as required to accommodate new construction. Removal of existing equipment and fixtures as directed. Related work specified elsewhere: Remodeling/alterations—construction work as required by this scope of work would include the"reuse,retrofitting or adoption of existing building construction,components and or utilities. The re-locating of pipes conduits and/or equipment shall also be covered under this contract as required by New York. ' General Contractor and the trades shall co-ordinate and schedule with Owner on shut off, capping and continuation of utility service as required.This shall be done in unison with Owner to insure uninterrupted operations. Owner will maintain conditions existing at time of commencement of contract insofar as practical. However,variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. Traffic:Conduct selective demolitions operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure minimum interference with roads,streets,walks,and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Utility Services:Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain. Keep in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities,except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities,as acceptable to governing authorities. Budget-InnWDIPhase ASpecs.8 SchedulestSudget Inn-Specirrcabon-Phase 1.doc 12 r 1A.12 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES : General:Existing toilet rooms to be used by the workers will be assigned by Designated Representative. General Contractor shall maintain assigned toilet rooms in a sanitary condition and restore eto original condition upon completion of project. 1A.13 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES : General Contractor shall,provide at the site and make available to all workers medical . supplies and equipment necessary to render first aid. Post at Contractors'job site telephone the emergency telephone numbers for doctor, hospital,ambulance service,police and firefighting service. 1A.14 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION: General Contractor shall: Take all precautions necessary to prevent fires. Fuel for cutting and heating torches shall be contained in Underwriter Laboratory >� approved containers. Furnish and maintain a 20-pound capacity,dry chemical type fire extinguisher in the immediate vicinity where welding tools or torches of any type are in use. Flammable liquids other then those specified shall not be used within a building without the written approval of the Designated Representative. sTarpaulins shall be flameproof and shall be securely anchored when attached to scaffolding or when used to enclose any portion of a building. 1A.15 MATERIAL HOISTS LADDERS RAMPS: General Contractor shall: Provide material hoists as required for performance of own work and shall employ skilled operators. Provide all necessary guards,signals,safety devices,etc.,required for safe operation,and suitable runways from hoists on each floor level and roof.Construction and operation of material hoists shall conform to all applicable requirements of the"American Standards Safety Code for Building Construction"published by the American Standard Association and the"Manual Accident Prevention in Construction of the Association . General Contractors.Of America OSHA Standards for the Construction Industry,and to all state and municipal codes.The Contractor shall prohibit the use of hoists for transporting personnel. Provide temporary ladders,ramps and runways as required for performance of own work. All of above facilities shall be constructed and maintained in accordance with applicable requirements of all codes as set forth above. "Material Hoists"and shall be removed after they have served their purpose or when directed by Designated Representative. 1AJ6 PROTECTION OF EXISTING PROPERTY: General Contractor shall; Protect existing construction and finishes during performance of Work. Maintain the building in a watertight condition during performance of the Work. General Contractor shall protect existing trees and plants during performance of the Work. Box trees and plants within the grading limit lines. Do not deposit excavates materials or store building materials around trees or plants or attach guy wires to trees. 1A.17 SECURITY: General Contractor shall: Remove all tools and materials from patient occupied work areas when the work areas are not attended by workers and at the end of each days work.Store tools in a locked tool box or cabinet.Store materials where directed by the Designated Representative in a location secure access by the patients. Pay required$25.00 deposit for each key issued by Facility. Deposit will be refunded rupon return of the keys. R Perform Work between 8:00 a.m.and 4:30 a.m.Monday thru Friday except as otherwise approved in writing by the Designated Representative. Be responsible to secure stored and installed materials to prevent theft and vandalism. Budget-lnniWIPhese 11Specs.&SchedulesWudgetInn-Speoftetion-Phase 1.doc 13 1A.18 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS: General Contractor: Routes of ingress on the grounds and within the building to the location of the Work shall be as directed by the Designated Representative. Parking areas shall be where designated by the Designated Representative. Store materials and perform the Work so that pedestrian and vehicular traffic is not obstructed. Keep designated access routes and parking areas clear of dirt and debris • resulting from its Work.General Contractor shall remove snow from parking areas assigned to all contractors and shall remove from all parking areas all dirt and debris not attributable to another contractor when to do so by the Designated Representative. 1A.19 RUBBISH REMOVAL: General Contractor shall: Clean up the rubbish(refuse,debris and removed materials and equipment)resulting from its Work at the last once a day and more often if the rubbish interferes with the work of others or presents a hazard.Leave work area broom dean at the end of each day. General Contractor shall placed rubbish containers at locations indicated by the Designated Representative.Remove rubbish from State property at least once a week and more often if the rubbish presents a hazard.Burning of rubbish will not be permitted. Contractor's shall not use institution's refuse disposal facilities. 1A.20 POLLUTION CONTROL: General Contractor shall dispose of all waste materials in strict accordance with all applicable ordinances. 1A.21 FIELD SHEDS: General Contractor shall: Provide temporary structures for field storage facilities for own use,including telephone for own use. Existing facility telephones are not available for use by contractor. Locate field . storage facilities where directed by Designated Representative. Maintain in a presentable condition and remove upon completion of the work directed by Owner. 1A.22 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN: . Suggested sign company familiar with this standard and logo: Attn:Adam Wakulenko Adirondack Sign Company 1174 Peagabia Street Ballston Spa, New York, i 518-469-0484/518-882-6360 General Contractor shall: A. Prepare project identification sign as indicated on drawing attached at the end of this section,in conformance with all local codes,and as follows: 1. Materials:4' x 8' by V4"thick sheet of A/C plywood,with A side receiving painted information,inserted into wood channel frame. rExterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer.Support panel with posts and perimeter frame fabricated from preservative treated . wood;design framing to properly withstand effects of wind/weather. 2. Sign Content: a. Logo Module:Scaled representation of Architect's corporate logo i and color ships logo module graphics and lettering will be supplied by the Architect. Provide Helvetica type style. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics;hand paint sign. Fabricate only after shop drawing has been approved. Install signs where directed by Architect.Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. b. Content for Information Module: Title of project,name of Owner, M names and titles of Professional Consultants,names of Prime Contractors,local project sponsor,any other required information to be included on project sign shall be supplied by Architect prior to 2 preparation of shop drawings. r 1. Erect sign within three(3)weeks of signing of Contract and keep in ' place until final acceptance of Work.Maintain sign in as new Budget-1nnICM-hase>ISpecs.&SchedulesWudget Inn-Specftahon-Phase 1.doe 14 I condition until removal. Include relocating each project identification sign once. B. Temporary Site safety and Directional Signs: 1. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional Signs: Prepare signs in sizes . required for legibility or as indicated. Install signs where required or indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. 2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 3. Construct signs of exterior-type grade B-B plywood in sizes and thick nesses indicated or required.Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel,or attach to fencing;do not attach signs to buildings or permanent construction. 4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. Engage an experienced sign painter or fabricator to apply graphics;hand paint sign. 5. Include relocating temporary site safety and directional signs as many times i as required or directed. • j I BLACK BACKGROUND WHITE BACKGROUND WIT14 BLACK LETTERS LARGE MODULE INFORMATION MODULE 1 1, W \\ J �v\ o 0 LU LU 0 Cv J Z ! 0 \\ CV LL o y�y rBudget-InnIMPhase 11Specs.&SchedulesiBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 15 DIVISION 2A- SITE AND UTILITIES - SECTION 2A-SITE WORK 2A.01 ACCESS TO SITE: Access to site shall recognize traffic safety standards. • All existing properties shall be respected in the same manner. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner to protect and limit unauthorized access to the new residence in addition to existing properties on site. • (Co-ordinate with site drawing-by Jarrett-Martin Engineers) 2A.02 SITE CLEARING and EXCAVATION: S Site Clearing-No construction debris is to be buried on site.(No biodegradable • items are to be removed off site.) Excavation-To allow 3'minimum Gear work area around foundation. No excavation shall extend deeper than bottom of footing elevations. Footings to rest on undisturbed earth. Ditching for utilities and drainage to be promptly refilled. All topsoil to be stockpiled on site. • Notify the Architect immediately of any unsuitable soil conditions or if water is • encountered. (Co-ordinate with site drawing-by Jarrett-Martin Engineers) . 2A.03 LANDSCAPING: General Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordination with the Owner for the protection of specific trees/stone walls on site that must remain and not be . disturbed. (Co-ordinate with site drawing-by Jarrett-Martin Engineers) 2A.04 SEEDING AND SODDING: All fertilizing,seeding,and sodding shall be performed under a separate contract . by the owner and is therefore not in this Contract; However, If the work is covered by the site engineers drawings/notes,then the General Contractor shall refer to these documents. (Co-ordinate with site drawing-by Jarrett-Martin . Engineers) . 2A.05 FILL BACKFILLING AND ROUGH AND FINISH GRADING : Provide all required fill,backfilling of excavation,and rough grading to bring grades to the levels shown on the drawings. All final grading/fill shall be free of organic material and all rough graded surfaces shall contain no rocks over 4"in the greatest dimension. Provide source and samples of any off-site fill to Architect before installation. Place fill of gravel or traprock under paving,drives,slabs,and elsewhere as called for,and compact to maximum density.Place fill on reasonably dry soil. Do not place when either material or underlying lift on which it is placed is frozen, iced,frosted,or muddy.Place least desirable material on bottom,best on top. Provide provisions for drainage during progress of work. Slabs on grade:place on compacted,cut,or 3/4"diameter traprock filled voids except that,if rock is encountered,excavate so as to provide a minimum of 6"of compacted traprock fill between slabs on grade and rock.At footings,clean rock of earth and all loose material. Pin footings to rock as required. Bring backfill up evenly on both sides of foundation walls. Rear of Garage side to ' have additional fill for"berming"effect. Backfill around and over piping with suitable materials free from large or frozen lumps,wood or other extraneous material. Place backfill in layers of not more than 6"in depth after compaction. Deposit backfill on both sides of piping equally at same time. Do not place rockfiril or boulders closer than 2'from top and sides of piping. Thoroughly compact backfill by mean of mechanical yammers, vibrators or pneumatic tampers. Back filling shall not take place until first floor framing is completed and in place. 1 Note: As required by code-all finish grades shall slope away from the new building/construction at a minimum of 6 inches over 10 feet. Co-ordinate as required with site drawings by Jarrett-Martin. (Coordinate with site drawing- by Jarrett-Martin Engineers) 1 Budget-Inn1CWhase IISpecs.&Schedutest$udget Inn-Spedikation-Phase 1.doC 16 I 1 1W 2A.06 TOPSOIL: • Topsoil shall be taken from site stockpiles. Topsoil selected shall be reasonably free of subsoil's,stones,earth,clods,sticks,roots or other objectionable • extraneous matter or debris. No topsoil shall be moved or placed in a frozen or muddy condition. • The Contractor,from approved off-site sources,shall supply all additional topsoil needed to complete job. When construction work is finished,after rough grading has settled and been • approved,and prior to finished grading,remove sticks,stones and foreign material 2 in.or greater from the sub grade. Harrow or otherwise looses surface to a depth of 3 in. Spread topsoil from on site stockpiles over areas to be seeded,6 in.deep after natural settlement,conforming smoothly to lines,grades and elevations shown. After spreading topsoil,rake up large large stiff clods, hard lumps,roots,litter and other foreign matter and stones larger than 2". Remove from premises or waste where directed in satisfactory manner. Rake topsoil areas to a smooth, uniform surface. Compact with an approved roller weighing approximately 500 pounds. • Re-grade and reroll until satisfactory grades as shown are obtained with required depths of topsoil. (Co-ordinate with site drawing-by Jarrett Martin • Engineers) • 2A.07 ELECTRIC SERVICE: • Provide all required site work for the new electric service(See Jarrett-Martin drawings for site electrical/utility work. General Contractor shall provide their . own power until permanent electrical service is complete. . 2A.08 SWALES Provide swales on either side of driveway in order to accommodate drainage. Re-grade in order to accommodate swales to divert water from driveway to . garage.See Site/Utility drawing-by Jarrett-Martin Engineers. 2A.09 SOILS INFORMATION: . For soils information,contact: Jarrett-Martin Engineers, PLLC . Professional Engineers 12 East Washington Street Glens Falls, N.Y. 12801 . 518-792-2907 Fax 518-798-1864 Reference also Site drawings/plans as created by the same. All further questions/ issues shall be directed to Tom Jarrett or Kenneth Martin. Test pits to be performed before construction to confirm subsurface conditions. Engineer noted above shall witness test pits. 1 r 1 r r r ' Budget-Inn1CDIPhase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 17 1 t 1 r r r r r r r r • r r r • r r • • • • • • • • • • i i i i • r _DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE - SECTION 3A-CONCRETE AND REINFORCING .3A.01 CONCRETE FORMS JOINTS EMBEDS AND FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement, including General and Supplementary Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications,apply to work of this Section. B. 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete C. 03200-Concrete Reinforcements • 1.02 SCOPE A. Furnish labor and materials necessary to install a complete system. . 1.03 STANDARDS A. All work of this section shall conform to industry standards and/or manufacturer's recommendations. • B. ACI 301-84(88)"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" C. ACI 318-83(86)'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provide formwork and shoring design by a professional Structural Engineer registered in the same state as the Work and submit to public authority for approval. 2. Provide inspection of formwork and shoring, and of reshoring, by a professional Structural Engineer registered in the same state as the Work and submit report of inspections as required by public authority. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit pursuant to 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. . B. Submit pursuant to 01630 Product Options and Substitutions. . C. Design formwork for structural stability, safety, requirements of public authority, and . compliance of the resulting concrete work with the Contract Documents. D. Formwork joint and shoring design. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work of this section shall be performed by experienced workmen familiar with the work and according to manufacturers recommendations and/or industry standards. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions. B. Protect against moisture exposure and damage. r PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK MATERIALS A. Description: r1. In addition to ACI 301 requirements, provide forms that retain their shape and rstrength after exposure to severe weather conditions. r 2.02 PLYWOOD FORMS rA. Description: r1. For natural concrete finish,smooth or rough form:APA B-B Plyform or better. rBudget-Inn=%Phase?1Specs. &ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 18 r w • 2.03 FORM ACCESSORIES A. Bevel (Chamfer) and Reveal (Rustication) Strips: Clear softwood, planed, and not rough . sawn. PVC or rubber may be used if held rigid and straight. 1. Bevel size:3/4 in.x 3/4 in. unless otherwise shown. 2. Reveal size:3/4 in.deep x 1-1/4 in.wide trapezoid at surface of concrete, unless otherwise shown. B. Stiffeners, Clamps, Frames, Walers, Strongbacks, Braces, Scaffolds, Ties, Bolts and Other Components of Formwork Assemblies: Provide as needed to produce formwork specified in ACI 301. C. Form Release Agent: Compound that will release forms without discoloring concrete, will not impart roughness of concrete and will not interfere with adhesion, color of coatings or other construction which is to be applied over concrete. Do not use oil. 2.04 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Sleeves: Galvanized steel or plastic with wall thickness not less than 1/8 in. B. Blockouts: Wood or rigid foam plastic; removable without damage to concrete. 2.05 SIDE FORMS . A. Description: 1. Use clean steel or wood forms with stakes or other supports which will withstand . fluid,placing and finishing pressures without bowing, inclining or leaking. 2. Top Edges: Smooth and straight, suitable for use as screeds in guiding strikeoffs without bumps or chatter. 2.06 JOINT FILLER AND SEALANT A. Nonextruding, Resilient, Preformed Fiber Joint Filler:Asphalt saturated cellulose fibers or . cork particles encased between two(2)asphalt-saturated glass felt liners. . 1. Cap: Provide plastic cap at top edge of joint filler strip to protect filler from dirt intrusion and as a bond breaker when sealant is applied. 2. Sealant:Self-leveling urethane. 3. Referenced standard:ASTM D1751. B. Bond Breaker. 15 lb./sq. asphalt coated glass fiber base sheet cut in strips equal to full depth of joint. 1. Referenced standard for base sheet:ASTM D4601,Type I. C. Self-Leveling Urethane Sealant:Two(2)Part: 1. Color;Approximately same as concrete. . 2. Hardness when cured;40 to 60,Shore A Durometer. . 3. Referenced Standard;ASTM C920,Type M,Class 25,Grade P. . 2.07 DRAINAGE FILL . A. Description: 1. 3/4 in. washed crushed stone or gravel, or as otherwise specified in 02200 Earthwork or soils report;unless noted otherwise. 2.08 CONSTRUCTION JOINT(vertical(wail)applications) rA. Key-Loc Joint System by Form-A-Key Products, Division of Cardinal Mfg. Co., Inc., Louisville,NY 40214,502-361-1396;fax 502-363-5905 or approved equivalent. B. Metal keyway shall be 24 gauge-galvanized steel with dowel knockouts at 6"centers. rC. Wood forms for control joint may be used in lieu of prefabricated metal keyways. D. Accessories include splice pieces,stakes and dips and stay-in-place cap Model#2137. r r rBudget-InnICMPhase 11Specs.&Schedules%Budget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 19 r r w 0 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MODIFICATIONS TO ACI 301 A. The following provisions modify(change,delete from or add to)ACI 301. Where any part of ACI 301 is modified by these provisions,the unaltered parts of ACI 301 shall remain in effect. Where "acceptable" is used or "subject to acceptance" is required in ACI 301, acceptance shall mean approval by Architect or Structural Engineer of record. B. Chapter 4, Formwork: w1. ADD to Par. 4.1.3. Form sides of footings except in rock that has been cut to precise footing profile. 2. ADD to Par. 4.2.1. Provide formwork and shoring design by a professional Structural Engineer registered in the same state as the Work and submit to public authority for approval. 3. ADD to Par.4.2.1. Provide inspection of formwork and shoring, and of reshoring, • by a professional Structural Engineer registered in the same state as the Work and submit report of inspections as required by public authority. 4. ADD to Par. 4.2.7. Seal joints at temporary openings and between form pieces with compressible tape that will not leak grout or water; flush with exposed . surface. 5. ADD to Table Par. 4.3.1: 7.C. Slope toward nosing in step treads: 1/16 in. +/- 1/32 in.Treads shall not pond water at any point. 6. Par.4.4.2.1.DELETE"acceptable". No approval of form coating is required if the Specification for form release agent is met. 7. ADD to Par. 4.5.5. Minimum strength of concrete in beams and slabs at time of form removal: 75% of specified fc as determined by cylinder compression tests. • Reshore until fc equals 100%of design strength. C. Chapter 6,Joints and Embedded Items. 1. Par. 6.1.4. DELETE "When required or permitted, bond shall be obtained by ? REPLACE with"Obtain bond by?". 2. ADD to Par. 6.2.2. When the Work is nearly complete, clean top of joint filler, install bond breaker and seal with self-leveling urethane sealant. Plastic cap at • top of joint filler material may be used as bond breaker. If depth of urethane will be equal to approximately half of joint width. 3. ADD to Par. 6.3.2. Set water stops in place with centerline of water stop at centerline of joint. Secure water stops in straight lines without twisting. Wire extreme outer edge of water stop to reinforcing on each side, or, in the case of . split flanges, nail fully spread against joint form. Carry water stops around comers,without splicing. . 4. ADD to Par. 6.3.3. Use prefabricated Ts, Ls, and crosses so that all splices are butt joints. 5. ADD Par. 6.3.4. Clean dust, dirt, and hardened concrete from water stops, then . vibrate fresh concrete around water stops so that full bond with concrete is ensured,free of voids. D. Chapter 9,Repair of Surface Defects. 1. ADD Par.9.1.1.Grind fins and projections as needed to allow smooth application of waterproofing and finishes. 2. ADD Par. 9.1.2. Fill honeycomb, bugholes, and other voids or depressions as needed to allow smooth application of waterproofing and finishes. . E. Chapter 10,Finishing of Formed Surfaces. 1. ADD to Par. 10.2.1. At surfaces to which waterproofing will be applied, provide rough form finish and prepare surface by grinding fins and projections, removing nails, and by filling honeycomb, bugholes, and other voids or depressions with firmly adhered grout. S 2. ADD to Par. 10.2.2. Provide smooth form finish at exposed surfaces,whether or not shown to receive architectural finish. 3. ADD to Par. 10.4.2. In addition to walls, columns, ceilings, and soffits generally, surfaces exposed to public view include, but are not limited to, surfaces such as walls of interior and exterior stairways, elevator hoistways, walls and ceilings in spaces or tunnels with 6 ft or greater headroom, and backs of parapet walls. Surfaces,which will receive,furring,contact plaster,or suspended ceiling are not exposed surfaces. r r Budget-InnICOWhase ASpecs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 20 r r F. Chapter 11,Slabs. 1. ADD to Par. 11.2.1. Place interior slabs on ground over a granular base course of drainage fill that has been compacted to a thickness of at least 4 in., or as indicated in drawings,whichever is greater. 2. ADD the following to Par. 11.2: a) 11.2.4 Place and seal vapor retarder under base course or other substrate. b) 11.2.5 Lap vapor retarder sheet sides and ends 6 in. Turn sheets up 4 in.above top of subslab fill at walls and columns. c) 11.2.6 Protect vapor retarder from puncture before and during sub slab w fill placement. 3. ADD the following paragraphs to Par. 11.5: a) 11.5.1. Wall Isolation Joints. Isolate edges of interior slabs on ground from concrete wall surfaces with 1 layer of bond breaker felt or joint filler strip except as shown in drawings. b) 11.5.2. Column Isolation Joints. Form diamond-shaped area around each column,each side equal to 2'-6". After slabs have been cast, strip forms, install bond breaker at slab edges, then place concrete around columns. c) 11.5.3. Contraction joints (control joints, sawed joints). (Saw cut joints are not allowed in any slab with in floor radiant heat.) Cut alternate wires or bars in reinforcement passing through joint. Saw joints to a depth of 1/3 slab thickness as soon as concrete will not ravel. Vacuum • or blow groove dean immediately after sawing and insert backer rod to keep joint clean during construction.At least 90 days later,or just before time of Substantial Completion, remove rod, clean groove of debris, replace rod and fill with dead level urethane sealant. 4. ADD the following paragraphs to Par. 11.9: a) 11.9.1.1.Provide Class A tolerances at floor areas as shown. b) 11.9.2.1. Finish all floor areas to Class B tolerance except as otherwise shown. c) 11.9.3.1. Class C flatness tolerances may be provided at floor areas, which will receive,mortar beds for finish materials. 5. ADD paragraph 11.10 Exterior Traffic Surfaces: • a) 11.10.1. Provide broom finish at exterior walks and ramps. r r r rBudget-InnIMPhase flSpecs.&SchedulesWudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 21 r r w 0 3A.02 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement, including General and Supplementary Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications,apply to work of this Section. B. 03100 Concrete Forms,Joints,Embeds,and Finishes 0 C. 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.02 SCOPE A. Furnish labor and materials necessary to install a complete system. 1.03 STANDARDS • A. All work of this section shall conform to industry standards and/or manufacturer's recommendations. B. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". C. ACI 318"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". D. ASTM A82"Standard Specification for Steel Wire,Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement". E. ASTM A185"Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement". F. ASTM A615"Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement with Supplementary Requirements". G. ASTM A617"Standard Specification for Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete . Reinforcement". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit pursuant to 01340 Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples. 1. Design reinforcing for structural adequacy and compliance with Contract Documents.Obtaining approval required by public authorities shall be responsibility of Contractor.Architect's review and approval will be for compliance with Contract Documents only. B. Submit pursuant to 01630 Product Options and Substitutions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit 1. Cutting and bending diagrams. 2. Placing drawings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work of this section shall be performed by experienced workmen familiar with the work and according to manufacturers recommendations andlor industry standards. iB. Standards:The following standards establish the over all level of quality for products and execution:ACI 301-84(88)"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings",ACI 318-83(86)"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete",CRSI MSP-1-86 "Manual of Practice",and CRSI RAS-2-84"Reinforcement Anchorages and Splices". 1. Articles or paragraphs starting with a chapter(Chapter),table(Table),or a paragraph(Par.)number refer to ACI 301,and incorporate that part of the referenced standard into this Specification.Text following each reference to ACI 301 modifies the referenced standard. 2. The words"approved"and"accepted"in this Section and in ACI 301 shall mean approved and accepted by the Architect or the Structural Engineer of record. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provide reinforcing shop drawings and submit to the Architect and Structural r Engineer of record for approval. Budget-Inn1WIPhase 114pecs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Specification-Phase i.doc 22 r r 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions. B. Protect against moisture exposure and damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MODIFICATIONS TO ACI 301 A. The following provisions replace or repeat parts of ACI 301.Unaltered provisions of Chapter 5 in ACI 301 remain in effect. 2.02 REINFORCING BARS A. Description:Billet steel deformed bars. Provide plain bars only where shown. 1. Yield strength:60,000 Ib./sq.in.minimum;Test 8. 2. Elongation in#4 to#6 bars,8 in. long:At least 9%•,Test 8. Ability to withstand 180 degree bend around pin without cracking; BAR SIZE BENDING PIN SIZE #345 3.5 bar diameters or less. 3. Phosphorus content:0.06%maximum;Test 5. B. Referenced Standards: 1. Par. 5.2.1,5.2.2.of ACI • 2. ASTM A615,Grade 60. 2.03 WELDED WIRE FABRIC A. Description: Plain welded steel wire grid,galvanized and deformed welded steel wire grid. Provide in flat sheets. Welded intersections shall not be spaced farther apart than 6"in . each direction B. Referenced Standards: 1. Par.5.2.4,5.2.5.of ACI 2. Plain wire:ASTM A82. 3. Plain welded wire fabric:ASTM A185. 4. Deformed welded wire fabric:ASTM A497. . 5. Welded wire fabric galvanized coating:ASTM A123 2.04 TIE WIRE A. Description:Annealed steel wire of sufficient gage to hold reinforcing steel in place under construction loads.Coating of wire shall be the same as the coating,if any,on reinforcing . steel. 2.05 SUPPORTS FROM GROUND OR MUD MAT A. Description: Steel,galvanized steel,or molded plastic bolsters, chairs,and spacers,or precast concrete blocks,sufficient to withstand construction loads. B. Referenced Standards:Par.5.7.3,5.7.3.1.of ACI. A. FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Description: Fiber mesh reinforcing for slabs. 1. Qualities: Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs, batch plant mixed at a minimum rate of 1.5 lbs. per cubic yard and fibers not less than 1/2"long. 2. Standard: ASTM C 1116,Type Ill. 3. Sources(or approved equal): a) Durafiber, Durafiber Corp. b) Fibesmesh,Fibermesh Co., Div. Synthetic Industries, Inc. c) Grace Fibers,W.R.Grace&Co. ' 2.07 EXPANSION BOLTS(attaching steel members to concrete or masonry elements) Budget-lnnIM Phase llSpecs.&SchedulesWudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 23 A. Description: Stud type with a single piece three section wedge and zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633. Anchors shall be installed in drilled holes and per manufacturer's recommendations. . B. Product: Hilti Kwik Bolts,diameter as specified, by Hilti Corp. or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REINFORCING LAP SPLICES&CORNER BARS C. Reinforcing shall be spliced with laps equal to 40 bar diameters(i.e.#6 bar=30 inch lap). D. Provide comer bars in walls of the same size and frequency as the horizontal bars in the wall adjacent walls.When size or frequency varies between walls,use the size of the ® larger bar and its frequency for the comer bars. 3.02 MODIFICATIONS TO ACI 301 A. The following provisions modify(change,delete from or add to)ACI 301.Where any part of Chapter 5 in ACI 301 is repeated or modified by these provisions,unaltered parts of ACI 301 iremain in effect. . 3.03 CHAPTER 5,REINFORCING A. ADD:5.2.7 Ties and Stirrups:Provide deformed bars of same grade as main reinforcing of beam or column.Where deformed bars or matching grade of steel are not available in • specified tie or stirrup size,provide ties or stirrups that wi0 develop equal withdrawal resistance and tensile load resistance. B. ADD to table in Par.5.7.1:Unformed surfaces in parking structures,vehicular ramps,and bridge decks.Minimum cover 2-1/2 in.unless dimensioned otherwise. C. ADD to 5.7.3:Turn back tie wires at formed surfaces. D. ADD to 5.7.4:Do not extend welded wire fabric through expansion joints and isolation joints.Cut alternate wires where fabric crosses control joints.Unless otherwise dimensioned,place welded wire fabric in 4"slabs on grade 2"down from top of slab and 21/2"down from top of slab in 6"or thicker slabs on grade. E. In 5.7.5(templates for column dowels),DELETE"unless otherwise permitted". F. In 5.7.6(mechanical connections),REPLACE"when accepted"with"as specified". 1 1 1 ' Budget-InnIMPhase 1Opecs.&ScheduleslBudget lnn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 24 1 1 3A.03 CAST4N-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement, including General and Supplementary Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications,apply to work of this Section. B. 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. C. 03345 Concrete Finishing. 1.02 SCOPE A. Furnish labor and materials necessary to install a complete system. 1.03 STANDARDS A. All work of this section shall conform to industry standards manufacturer's recommendations and the ACI manual of concrete practice. B. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". . C. ACI 302"Guide for Concrete Floor Construction". D. ACI 304"Guide for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting and Placing Concrete". E. ACI 305"Hot Weather Concreting". • F. ACI 306"Cold Weather Concreting". G. ACI 308"Standard Practice for Curing Concrete". H. ACI 309"Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete". I. ACI 311 "Guide for Concrete Inspection". J. ACI 318"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". K. ACI 347'Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". L. ASTM C33"Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates". M. ASTM C94"Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete". N. ASTM C150"Standard Specification for Portland Cement". . O. ASTM C309"Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound for Curing . Concrete". P. ASTM D994 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)". Q. ASTM D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction(Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)". R. ASTM C31 "Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field". S. ASTM C39 "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens". T. ASTM C88 "Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate". U. ASTM C138 "Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete". Budget-Inn1CDlPhase ltSpecs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 25 } 4W V. ASTM C143"Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete". W. ASTM C172"Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete". X. ASTM C173 "Standard Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the • Volumetric Method". Y. ASTM C231 "Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method". Z. ASTM C6% "Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and 0 Thawing" 0 AA. ASTM C567"Standard Test Method for Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete". 0 BB. ASTM C618 "Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete". 0 CC. ASTM C109 "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement 0 Mortars(Using 2-in.or 50-mm Cube Specimens)". 0 DD. ASTM D638"Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics". 0 EE. ASTM D2240"Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness". 0 1.04 SUBMITTALS 0 A. Submit pursuant to 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 0 B. Submit pursuant to 01630 Product Options and Substitutions. C. Review proposed design of each concrete mix for approval prior to start of work. 01 D. Submit product data, including manufacturer's published instructions, for admixes, bonding agents,joint fillers,curing covers and compounds. E. Prior to mix design review by Architect, submit certificate of compliance from admixture manufacturer that admixture meets specified requirements, including chloride ion content of admixture. F. Submit reports of cylinder tests. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work of this section shall be performed by experienced workmen familiar with the work and according to manufacturers recommendations and/or industry standards. B. Perform testing and analysis of concrete and related work as speed in Part 3 Field Quality Control and 01410-Testing Agency Services. C. Perform concrete work pursuant to ACI 301. D. Obtain materials from same source throughout the Work. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions. i B. Protect against moisture exposure and damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement:ASTM C150,normal-Type I;standard color;Portland type. 1. Use cement from a single plant of a single manufacturer for all exposed work. 2. Standard color: Color commonly offered by ready-mix plants in locality of the Work. Budget-Inn1CDlPhase ASpecs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 26 q B. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C33, with maximum chloride ion content of 0.1%. Provide aggregates from a single source for all exposed concrete. 1. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. 2. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter. Provide a minimum of 1,900 pounds per cubic yard of coarse aggregate in concrete used for interior slabs on grade. 3. Do not use trailings from mining of minerals such as taconite, pitchblende, coal and phosphate rock in producing aggregates. Use non-ore, non-processed rock, gravel,and sand only. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: Not larger than one-fifth of narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of depth of slabs, or three-fourths of minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars. C. Water:Clean and drinkable.Maximum chloride ion content:0.1 percent. D. Vapor Retarding Film: 10 Mil Polyethylene sheet where called for in the Specifications and Drawings. E. Calcium Chloride: Do not use. 2.02 BONDING AGENTS A. Structural Bonding Agent 1. Qualities: Structural bonding adhesive, suitable for adhering freshly-mixed concrete to hardened concrete,non-filled, non-flexible epoxy type. 2. Standard: ASTM C881 or AASHTO M235, Type It, viscosity grade and temperature-range Gass as selected for use. 3. Source: a) Poly Epoxy Bonding 100, by Anti-Hydro. b) Sikadur 32 or 35,by Sika. c) Sonobond,by Sonnebom/Rexnord. • d) or Architect approved substitution. B. Patch Bonding Agent 1. Qualities: Moisture-resistant polymer resin bonding adhesive, suitable for adhering concrete patches up to 1-1/2 in. deep, with feathered edges, to hardened concrete.Do not use PVA latex emulsion bonding agent. 2. Source: a) Anchor-It,by Anti-Hydro. b) Sonocrete,by Sonnebom/Rexnord. c) or Architect approved substitution. 2.03 JOINT FILLERS A. Fiber/Asphalt: vacuum processed cellular fibers securely bonded together and uniformly saturated with asphalt. 1. Standard:ASTM D1751. • 2.04 CURING COVERS AND CURING COMPOUNDS A. Clear Curing compound. 1. Qualities: 1000/6 resin base,with fugitive dye,free of any oils or waxes. 2. Standard:ASTM C309 Type 1,Class B. 3. Super Kurseal 309 by A.H.Hams or Architect approved Equivalent . 4. Do not use curing compounds on apparatus bay slab or adjacent areas to receive slab sealer. 2.05 CONCRETE MIXES A. Qualities: Ready-mix all concrete at one plant. At least 15 days before any concrete is placed on project, at Contractor's expense, employ a commercial testing laboratory approved by Architect to design concrete mixes, if trial mixes are selected as method of proportioning. Design mixes using samples of materials approved for use.Verify each mix design by strength tests. Design proposed mix to achieve an average strength 1200 lb./sq. in. higher than specified compressive strength, fc. Over-design factor for fc = 5000 and stronger concrete: 1400 lb./sq.in. Budget-InnWiPhase IISpecs.&ScheduleslSudget Inn-SpedficeHon-Phase 1.doc 27 B. Standards: 1. ASTM C94 for ready-mixed concrete. 2. ACI 318,Sections 4.1,4.2,4.3,and 4.5 for proportioning. 3. ASTM C39, C192 for strength tests. SD ATELIER 0 C. Mix Classes: A R C H I T E C T U R E, 0 Use Min. Maximum Min-Max Min.-Max. As Applicable Pc, aggregate slump," °fo Atr psi size,inches inches',". htrainmdrit`` sciateterrz�es.co�t� tco§eliey',c:�a�t Footings 3000 2 2-4 4-6 Foundation Walls/Piers 3000 1 1/2 3-5 4-6 • Pool and Basement Cori r 605t0 L10 G 2-4 0 on Grade Areas Slab DATE # OF. PAGES. PROJECT PHASE REMARKS _ drain l orabort 0 -3 d s l' ldqM pNytbant 1-1 o ACI 301 Ch ttv G 0 13 dr a! , Cv 0146u 3S'fr k,i1'-` ' ,Vi a SCLetw C V CA cftt"�i' ! i DO D . i f r n er items tc x';- u ale acell ly P1aced, rely, and illCW4.vk4wk 4 te. ,Zp R mo all debris from Dn MIA- ei� cis w �3ai t pply bondingac en apf `s pilhfiched in 0 S 1- , .0 A lgWns where ne ete is doweled t existing wo r ef' u _ sing o rA ncr%e, inseff-sfe-e-FUZ VQndpack solid o - 0 0 J S r Cif D. er rete is to feath a to a depth le a 16 p tch ing agent. �( 0 L. I D awin so as not t � str nand ranee of struct rd, . acceptable tli- 14au A chitect Construction ')kkAWa0&&L locate J rLAiess than 5 feet UdQ40tto . tch tlVore parallel. 1. rove e Crc /i 2. Place constru p3erpendi to main reinfor ontinue all Ir 3reinforcement struction joii itt.p Of c t e-C Jt --4I--f - f. details C(4 (`7 f rnnqtn n inintiq tfaAWl reinforcem diffirough iointS. ' 1 C. C)lumn Volation Join P diamond tam isolation jo co ns 1.4 f, extendil=ugh tloor a e. a ire a in +amon rt 4 i iiAf-MMIRAtMAFAMI ZC ap clean tooted joints,and leave r6dy to receive sealant specified in 07900 Joint Sealers. r rBudget-lnn=Phase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Spedfica6on-Phase f.doc 28 r r �I R D. Wall Isolation Joints: Isolate edges of interior slabs on grade from vertical concrete wall surfaces with one 1/2 in. layer of fibrous joint filler to within 1/2 inch of top of slab then place a continuous bead of sealant. E. Contraction Joints (control or sawed,' ' �� _� �tlsF ft�R! L-MOpoa joints by sawing joints to a depth equal 0 1/3 o)fslthicknesss(-1 in.max, o�s 8 m.or thicker). Cut alternate wires in welded wire fabric reinforcement and interrupt alternate rods in bar reinforcement at Contraction joints.Clean groove of loose material immediately after sawing and insert backer rod material to keep joint dean during construction. After concrete has cured and undergone its initial Contraction, and just before time of Substantial Completion,dean groove of loose debris and leave ready for sealant specified in 07900 Joint Sealers. 1. Saw joints as soon as possible without raveling concrete. 2. Seal joints as late as possible in Contract Time 3. Great care should be taken in the placement of in lid?WWARiWeieffw as that these tubes will not be damaged during construction nor when the slab is being saw cut. (T'N pue WN) YN -Jr SIAeo Pleuoa F. Provide joint fillers. Use sealants that are compatible with fillers, as recommended by joint filler manufacturer. e 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE `papwgns AllnppadseN A. Notify Architect and Testing Agency when reinforcing is in place and at least 24 hr prior to start of each concreting operation. B. Ensure that reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. C. Excessive bugholes, honeycomb4a0JgVftJ4g0bris in concrete are defects. Improve placement procedures Zzand correct 6 ft-Z6L-85 3.05 CONCRETE CURING AN� ggPRZ3TE�C 1 M noy 83elS 6tro6 b ewweo�1 A. Protect freshly placed concrete� prema%r drying and excessive cold or hot tern,�er��ttu a usin ppee�ed ri'n��method. Maintain in moist condition t a latively ue ue uolleuuo co le �uH } 1�a �fjlt �adi��r�ho1Q4�t��c�o eapl p ��lt�ilS r bf` � 'r�fr i y 31 yllM do nnopo� asBald B. Start in1A tcren c>IlWUwa*asodatd nay; pue sjoog 6tp ga*1tigisI5ugneip xaaX noA of 6ul:4lwgns we 1 'AepsalsaA uollesianuoo ino jad sy C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture-retaining o%Wr jeea curing,by use of curing compounds,or by combinations thereof. 1. Cure by use of curing and sealing compounds as follows: a) Apply specified curing and sealing compound by power spray, squeegee or roller to all slabs which will receive carpet,resilient flooring, or which will be left exposed, immediately after final finishing operation. Do not use hand sprayers. b) Apply specified dissipating resin-type curing cebQ9ftdW)1ott+iWd%tRd su81!D slabs. Wd leoluyoal s118A su91E)17 c) Apply curing compounds immediately after final fii;fpJAaWS pue ails NhoA nn9 d) Recoat areas, which are subjected to heavy rainfall within :b� uy°r initial application. 2. Do not use curing and sealing compound on surfaces to receive any finishes other than carpet or resilient flooring. 90OZ `V I,jagolop 3. Moist curing-either method(a)or(b)for a period of seven(7)days. a) Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped wo:)•Jaiia{ops W0XSs syaiiaJops at least 12" and weighted down to prevent displacement by wind. x°}/ud 99ML89'9L 9 Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover 998ZL 'Ari'ssu"dS°&°iotpS material and waterproof tape. U sins'AOMP13ols W Cover concrete with burlap. Completely wet burlap and maintain :D*l'i,g N fl l D 311 H D 8 d uniformly wet during curing period. 46 n ed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including sides of slabs on rYade, other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above,as applicable. Budget_1nn%CDWhase ASPecs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 29 E. Curing unformed surfaces(slabs). 1. The Apparatus Bay and all adjacent rooms shall be moist cured to receive sealer. - 2. Exterior concrete aprons, slabs, stoops, sidewalks, etc. shall be moist cured to { 3. Absolutely no chemicals, compound, t ( concrete mentioned in"E" 1 &2 above. 3.06 FINISHING: Provide pursuant to 03345 Concrete Finishing. 3.07 PATCHING:Provide pursuant to 03345 Concrete Finishing. 3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE 1 A. Cut out and patch or replace concrete not conform o required levels and tines, and elevations. I APFA 691 SQ FT. B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed or f specified type. Repair or concrete containing excessive bugholes,honeyco mbedded debris,craiis,and other f defects. Use specified bonding agents. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL f ! A. Review proposed design of each concrete mix for val prior to start of work. fB. Cast erform slump tests. ACI 301 16.3 and 16.7; AST 31, C39, C143, C172, C173, and or C138. �FA C. Cast one additional test cylinder during cold w er and cure on site under same 1 conditions as concrete it represents. --------------------------------- F:1 j D. Test cylinders for compressive str ids of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, n , air te rature, test samples taken, and compressive strengths attained. r: 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work. n. _ 16 R B. Immediately after placement, proteo concrete fro a ng, excessively hot or p cold temperatures,and mechanical ir ury. a Maintain concrete with minimal mois re loss at re y co s temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement ar attent -- _ a'DN i � p k1 s Af ; TN k IP R 43 f 0 f RAMPaa� \ p r-5 ur T ON ��---� RAW oN M Budget-InnWIPhase 1►Specs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 30 1r N—Ullipw3cive ivsaii- message view Page 2 of 2 3A.04 CONCRETE FINISHING ©Cop ng4t-9ANYonipu5erve Interactive Services, Inc. Help ( Sign Off Legal tice Nlo _)14 6&UMENTS 'tt U r06- A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement,including General and Supplementary Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications,apply to work of this Section. B. 03100 Concrete Formwork. C. 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 SCOPE A. Furnish labor and materials necessary to install a complete system. 1.03 STANDARDS A. All work of this section shall conform to industry standards manufacturer's �t recommendations and the ACI manual of concrete practice. !� B. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". C. ACI 303"Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete Practice". 1.042 SUBMITTALS A. Submit pursuant to 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. B. Submit pursuant to 01630 Product Options and Substitutions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work of this section shall be performed by experienced workmen familiar with the work and according to manufacturers recommendations and/or industry standards. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pursuant to manufacturers published instructions. B. Protect against moisture exposure and damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SLAB SEALER A. Salt guard by Prosoco, Inc.or Architect approved equivalent. 1. Apply to spaces with a concrete floor shown in the Room Finish Schedule and or drawings. 2. Apply to all exterior concrete slabs,stoops,aprons,and sidewalks. B. Handle and apply according to manufacturers Specifications C. Apply sealer to slabs that are a minimum of 28 days old, have been thoroughly moist cured and have been allowed to air dry. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES(SLABS) A. Scratched Finish:(Not Used) 1. After placing,consolidating,and striking-off slabs,level surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/8 in. in 2 ft when tested with a 2 ft straight edge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains. 2. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. MBudget-InnWIPhase ilSpecs. &SchedulesOudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 31 http://csmaii.compuserve.cam/msgview.adp?folder=SU5CT l g=&uid=12932326 11/17/2005 3. A 2' x 2' area of concrete shall be prepared and finished as a sample for the Owner and Architect to approve the finish and roughness. B. Floated Finish: 1. After placing,consolidating, and striking-off slabs, level surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/8 in. in 2 ft when tested with a 2 ft straight-edge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains. Do not work surface until ready for floating. 2. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 114 in. in 10 ft when tested with a 10 ft straightedge. Cut down high spots and .fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform,smooth,granular texture. 3. These slabs should be finished with a mild, soft broom finish in the direction of drainage. a. The Contractor will prepare a 24" x 24" test panel or similar sample of the finish for approval by the Owner and Architect. b. Said sample will remain on the job site during finishing operations and will be used as a guide for the slab finish. C. Troweled Finish: (Rooms to receive tile or carpet) 1. After floating, steel-trowel slab surface to a smooth, even, impervious finish free from trowel marks. For exposed to view concrete slabs, give slab surface a second steel toweling to a burnished finish, uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth surface defect, which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Slip Broom Finish: (Exterior Concrete) 1. After placing,consolidating,and striking-off slabs, level surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/8 in. in 2 ft when tested with a 2 ft straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains.Do not work surface until ready for floating. 2. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4 in. in 10 ft when tested with a 10 ft straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform,smooth,granular texture. 3. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom in straight, parallel lines perpendicular to main traffic route.Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application. E. Caution: Do not use jitterbugs at any time. 3.02 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. No finish required. 3.03 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE WORK A. Repair of Unformed Surfaces (Slabs): Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verity that surface planes conform to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects, which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01 in. wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets,and other objectionable conditions. 2. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1- inch diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 in.clearance all around. a) Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply specified bonding compound. Place patching concrete after bonding compound has dried. Mix patching of same materials to provide concrete of same type or Gass as original concrete. Place,compact and Budget lnn%=Phase ASpecs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Specificatfon-Phase 1.doc 32 finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 3. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 in. in diameter by . dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust,dirt,and loose particles. 4. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 5. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of, surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Use specified . bonding or patching compound. A. Make structural repairs with prior approval of Architect as to method and procedures, using structural patching mortar. r r r r �r r r r s r r r r r r r r r rBudget-Inn1CDlPhase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 33 r -- 1W 3A.05 MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement,including General and Supplementary Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications,apply to work of this Section. B. Section 03200—Concrete Reinforcing C. Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal . 1.02 SCOPE A. Furnish labor and materials necessary to install a complete system. B. Metal horizontal joint reinforcement for masonry. 1.03 STANDARDS A. All work of this section shall conform to industry standards and/or manufacturer's recommendations. B. ASTM A82"Standard Specification for Steel Wire,Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement". C. ASTM A153 "Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware". D. ASTM A641 "Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)Carbon Steel Wire'. E. ASTM D2287"Standard Specification for Non-rigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit pursuant to 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. B. Submit pursuant to 01630 Product Options and Substitutions. • C. Manufacturer's Literature: Provide manufacturer's complete data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work of this section shall be performed by experienced workmen familiar with the work and according to manufacturer's recommendations and/or industry standards. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions. B. Protect against moisture exposure and damage. r Budget-lnnIMPhase 11Specs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 34 DIVISION 5- METALS AND STEEL 5.01 GENERAL: 1.01 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement, including General and Supplementary Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications,apply to work of this Section. B. 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 SCOPE • A. Furnish labor and materials necessary to install a complete system. 1.03 STANDARDS A. All work of this section shall conform to industry standards and/or manufacturer's recommendations. B. AISC"Code of Standard Practice"(AISC Code). C. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation(AISC Joint Spec.). D. ASTM A6 "Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling,and Bars for Structural Use". E. AWS"Standard Qualification Procedure". F. SSPC - PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting". G. Touch-up Painting: > 1. Immediately after erection, dean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint has been abraded. Apply paint to exposed areas using same materials as used for shop painting. 2. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils or thickness recommended by paint manufacturer. 5A.02 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING: " New standing seam metal roofing shall be furnished and installed as . manufactured by Englert,Inc.41 Warehouse Point Road,Wallingford,CT 08492. 1-800-729-3759,203-265-6704,(908)862-8614. (fax)203-265-1870. ct@englertinc.com-Aft: Mr. Dan Dionne. Standing Seam metal roofing,and all accessories shall be 24 gauge, Englert roof . System A1000-1 1/2""Snap Lock"panel in 20"widths. Color shall be Mansard Brown—provide Architect and Owner with sample before placement of order. 5A.03 COIL STOCK ALUMINUM: Provide Coil Stock(.032)Aluminum for all flashing,step flashing and counter ! flashing as required and called for in the drawings. Provide all fasteners and accessories as required;they shall be compatible with Coil stock in material to avoid any effects of galvanic reaction. Budget-InnICDlPhase 11Specs.&Schedulesli3udgetlnn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 35 DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY - SECTION 6A-ROUGH AND FINISH CARPENTRY 6A.01 CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL • 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ! A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement, including General and Supplementary Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications,apply to work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE A. Fumish labor and materials necessary to install a complete system. 1.03 STANDARDS A. All work of this section shall conform to industry standards and/or manufacturer's recommendations. B. ALSC"Certified Agencies and Typical Grade Stamps". C. ALSC"Softwood Lumber Standards". D. APA"Construction Guide". E. AWPA"Book of Standards". F. AWPB"Standards for Softwood Lumber,Timber,and Plywood" G. NES"NER108" H. NFPA"Span Tables for Joists and Rafters". 1. NFPA WCD1 "Manual for Wood Frame Construction" J. PS 20"American Softwood Lumber Standards". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following pursuant to 01340 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples. B. Submit pursuant to 01630 Product Options and Substitutions. C. Certification: 1. Grade mark each piece of lumber and plywood with stamp of an ALSC-or APA- certified agency at the source. 2. Apply quality mark of an AWPB-certified agency to each piece of pressure treated lumber or plywood. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Experienced workmen familiar with the work and according to manufacturers' . recommendations and/or industry standards shall perform all work of this section. B. Lumber Inspection and Grading: Rules-writing agencies certified by ALSC Board of . Review. C. Plywood Grading:Agencies certified by APA. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions. B. Protect against moisture exposure and damage. C. Keep lumber and plywood dry by elevating above dampness,so that air can circulate and fwarping will not occur,and by covering with waterproof film that permits circulation of air to all parts of each pile. Budget-InnICDlPhase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 36 D. Do not stack any lumber in direct contact with the ground. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations: 1. PT or PPT:Pressure preservative treated. 2. E-Modulus of elasticity. 3. Fb: Extreme fiber stress in bending. 4. RFS:Rough full sawn. 5. S4S:Surfaced four sides. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER AND BOARDS A. Qualities: Provide following species, product class, and grade for lumber up to 4 in. thick • which is not in contact either with earth or concrete in contact with earth, is not above roof deck, and is not exposed to weather or moist environment. Grade stamp each piece except Appearance grade. 1. Framing:includes 2x6 walls studs,excludes 2x4 studs: a.. Species:Spruce Pine Fir,Southern Pine or Douglas Fir-Larch. b. Product class:Structural Joists,Beams,Rafters,&Headers. c. Grade: No.2 or better. d. Moisture content: 19%maximum.Bring down to 19%after treatment. 2. Framing,:Studs and plates: a. Species:Spruce Pine Fir, Southern Pine or Douglas Fir-Larch. b. Product class:Light Framing and Studs. c. Grade: Stud or Construction. d. Moisture content: 19%maximum. 3. Framing,: Blocking and lumber for supporting and fastening of other work, including such items as frames,nailers,curbs,and bases: a. Species:Spruce Pine Fir,Southern Pine or Western Woods. b. Product class:Light Framing and Studs. • C. Stress grade: Stud or Construction.. d. Moisture content: 19%maximum.Bring down to 19%after treatment. e. Pressure preservative treatment:LP 2. 4. Framing,:Furring,grounds,bracing,and other board lumber. • a. Species:Spruce Pine Fir,Southern Pine or Western Woods. b. Product class:Boards. C. Grade: No.3 or Standard. d. Moisture content: 19%maximum. e. Pressure preservative treatment:LP 2. B. Referenced Standards: 1. Lumber:PS 20. . C. Inspection agencies whose ALSC-certified rules shall be used for lumber in this Work: NELMA, NH&PMA,NLGA-SPIB,WCLIB,or WWPA. . 2.02 PLYWOOD A. Qualities: Veneer-face composite or plywood panels, with 15% maximum moisture content,except 18%allowed after redrying from pressure preservative treatment. . 1. Floor Applications: S a) Thickness:314 in.tongue&groove unless otherwise shown. b) Grade:APA Rated Sturd-l-Floor or Structural I,C-C Plugged or better. c) Exposure durability class:Exposure 1. d) Fasteners: Galvanized #8 x 1 112" self tapping screws and PL400 structural adhesive. e) Fastener spacing: 6 in. o.c. at edges; 12 in. o.c. at intermediate supports. g) Plywood must meet or exceed span and load requirements. 1. 16"o.c.span unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. 100 lb.live load. Budget-InnIWIPhase 1lSpecs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Specification-Phase ].doc 37 r r 2. Vertical and Soffit Applications: a) Thickness: 1/2 in.unless otherwise shown. b) Grade:APA A-B,Group 1. . c) Exposure durability class: Exposure 1. d) Fasteners:8d common or screw shank nails. • e) Fastener spacing: 6 in. o.c. at edges; 12 in. o.c. at intermediate supports. 3. Roof Applications: • a) Thickness: 5/8 in. unless otherwise shown; in addition to the use of"H" clips b) Grade:APA C-D,Group 1. c) Exposure durability class: Exposure 1. d) Fasteners:Galvanized 8d common or screw shank nails. e) Fastener spacing: 4 in. o.c. at edges; 12 in. o.c. at intermediate supports.See drawings for locations or more stringent requirements. f) H-clips: One per span for plywood thickness indicated above. . g) Plywood must meet or exceed span and load requirements. 1. 70 lb.Ground snow load(See framing plans and Design loads). B. Referenced Standards: 1. Veneer plywood:PS 1. 2. Composite panels:NES NER108. 2.03 PLYWOOD EQUIPMENT MOUNTING PANELS A. Qualities: 1/2 in. minimum thick, suitable for mounting electrical and communications equipment. 1. Grade:APA C-D PLUGGED,Group 1 Exposure 1. 2. Fire resistive treatment: UL FR-S, Interior A. 2.04 PRESSURE PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT(PPT or PT) A. Qualities: Pressure treat lumber and plywood using water-bome preservatives by full-cell process to retention levels required by applicable referenced standard. 1. Marks:Stamp each piece with AWPB Quality Mark. 2. Redrying:After treating, kiln-dry lumber to specified moisture content,plywood to 15%. Inspect each treated and redried piece and discard warped or otherwise defective pieces. 3. Cut treating: After cutting or drilling, apply a heavy brushed coat of copper naphthenate, or the treatment preservative if lawful, to cuts, holes, and injured areas. B. Referenced Standards: 1. Lumber treatment:AWPA C2. 2. Plywood treatment:AWPA C9. 3. Preservative treatment for above-ground items:AWPBLP2. 4. Preservative treatment for items in contact with ground or fresh water: AWPB LP22. 5. Cut treatment:AWPA M4. 2.05 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER 1. General: Where shown on Drawings,provide structural composite lumber . manufactured in a continuous process with waterproof adhesive meeting requirements of ASTM D 2559 and accepted for use by the National Evalution Service Committee of the Council of American Building Officials. B. For laminated veneer lumber provide Micro=lam, 1.9E Structural Grade as manufactured by Trus-Joist Corporation or equivalent acceptable to Engineer with allowable design values equal to or greater than: • Fb=2,600 psi. • Fc(perpendicular)=750 psi. • Fc(parallel)=2,310 psi. • Fv=285 psi. • E=1,900,000 psi. 1. For laminated veneer posts provide 2.0E Parallam PSL,as manufactured by Trus-Joist Corporation or equivalent acceptable to Engineer with allowable design values equal to or greater than: Budget-InnICWhase 1lSpecs.&ScheduleslBudgetlnn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 38 r r 2. Fb=2,900 psi 3. Fc(Perpendicular)=650 psi 4. Fc(parallell=2,900 psi • 5. Fv=290 psi . 6. E=2,000,000 psi. . 1. Installation: Install and fasten according to manufacturer's written recommendations. • 2.06 FASTENERS . A. General: Provide galvanized fasteners of size and type that comply with requirements specified in this Section for material. • B. Nails,Wire,Brads,and Staples: FS FF-N-105. • C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272 or FS FF-P-395B. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. . E. Lag Screws: ANSI B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307,Grade A;with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated,flat washers. 2.07 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS rA. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type,size, metal,and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified including the following: 1. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet:: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A 446 Grade A(structural quality):ASTM A 526(commercial quality):or ASTM A 527(lock-forming quality);as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated B. Joist Hangers: 1. Dimensional Lumber:See drawings for schedule of foist hangers made by Simpson Strong-Tie Co.or approved equal. 2. Laminated Veneer Lumber:See drawings for schedule of moist hangers made by Simpson Strong-Tie Co.or approved equal. C. Seismic/Hurricane Anchors: 18 gauge.H2.5 model by Simpson Strong-Tie Co.or approved equal. 2.08 TJI FRAMING MEMBERS 1. Flange members,web members and adhesives shall conform to the provisions of NES Report No. NER-200, ICBO ES Report No. PFC-4354 or CCMC report No. 12832-R. 2. TJI®joists shall be manufactured by Trus Joist in a plant listed in the reports referred to above and under the supervision of an approved third-party inspection agency. 3. Tolerances:Depth: ±1/16",flange width:±1/16" 4. Identification: Each of the joists shall be identified by a stamp indicating the joist series, NES, ICBO ES or CCMC evaluation report number,manufacturers name,plant number and the independent inspection agency's logo. 5. Install and fasten according to manufacturers written recommendations. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framina: Contech PL-400 or accepted 1 equivalent for dry conditions of use. Contech PL-500 or accepted equivalent for treated lumber or wet conditions of use. Budget-lnnlCWhase 11Spem.&ScheduleslBudget fin-Specification-Phase 1.doc 39 r PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING ' A. Frame the Work according to NFPA Manual for Wood Frame Construction. ' B. Cut pieces for full wood-to-wood fit at connections. Do not splice free standing members. 1 / C. Examine each piece of lumber before setting in place. Set the most sound pieces in positions of greatest stress. Select clearest pieces for exposed use. Discard pieces that ' have defects that impair their structural function. D. Set members plumb,level,or to slope shown. E. Do not cope or notch horizontal members more than 1/ 6 their depth in center third of ' span, nor more than 1/5 joist depth at end thirds. Drill joists for passage of lines in end thirds only. Drilled holes shall be no more than 1/3 joist depth,and shall leave a full 2 in.of wood top or bottom. F. Firestop studwalls at top and bottom of each story and at 8 ft vertical intervals in studwalls higher than 8 ft. Firestop concealed spaces such as dropped ceilings, and at openings which can allow passage of smoke or fire such as perimeters of flues, ducts, pipes, and ' electrical lines. ' 3.02 FASTENERS AND FASTENER SPACING ' A. For work above roof or in damp locations, use hot-dip or hot tumbled galvanized steel ' common nails,or hot-dip galvanized bolts,nuts,and washers. B. Drive nails full depth, first drilling hard or brittle woods first to prevent splitting. Leave no hammer marks in exposed work. In beams, headers and trimmers built up from 2x lumber, nail 16 in.o.c.minimum,staggered top and bottom. C. Nail according to UBC Table 25Q or NFPA Manual for Wood Frame Construction Table 11,except as more stringently specified herein. 3.03 CEILING FRAMING A. Provide ceiling framing members of sizes and spacing as shown,with double headers and trimmers.Set on double plates at studwalls. B. Connect and bridge ceiling framing as for floor framing. 3.04 FURRING AND GROUNDS A. Provide PPT furring at exterior walls and in damp locations. B. Terminate vertical furring with horizontal firestop strip at floor, opening, and ceiling lines, positioned to provide fastening for edges of wall finish material and base and cove trim. C. Execute furring at openings to serve as grounds for finish work. Shim furring and grounds to make finish work plane and flush with opening frames. Bevel plaster grounds to form key. D. Space 1 x 3 or 1 x 2 furring 16 in. o.c. for all finishes, except that 1 x 3 furring 24 in. o.c. shall be provided for plywood paneling 3/8 in.or thicker. rE. Do not use furring strips with knots or missing knots where nail or screw fastening of . plywood finish will be employed. 3.05 BLOCKING AND OTHER SUPPORT MEMBERS A. Select sound lumber for blocking, milers, sleepers, cants, deck edges, curbs, frames, bases, and ledgers. Provide bolted PPT cants of straight grained lumber, with recessed bolt holes. Space out or kerf backs of cants to permit out-migration of water vapor under roofing. Budget-Inn=VD hase 11Specs. &SchedulesOudget Inn-Specificatfon-Phase 1.doc 40 B. Provide quality and size of fasteners that will support live and dead loads. Recess bolts and nuts as necessary to avoid conflict with roofing and other adjoining or covering work. Provide washers where bolt heads and nuts bear against wood. 3.06 PLYWOOD BLOCKING AND COMPOSITE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Set full panels with long dimension perpendicular to wood framing, with each panel rsupported by at least 3 framing members. Shorten adjoining panels to avoid single-span panels. Stagger end joints. ' B. In addition to specified supports and fastenings, block edges of panels where concentrated loads will occur. C. Furnish and install plywood or 2x12 blocking and ledgers for support of bathroom r handrails, fixtures, cabinets, sinks, lavatories toilets and urinals, recessed equipment shelving,railings,kitchen cabinets and other wall-hung construction. 3.07 EXTENT AND INSTALLATION OF TREATED WOOD A. Provide PPT lumber at the following locations: 1. Wood in contact with slabs on grade and foundation 2. Walls,such as sills,sleepers,furring,and posts. 3. Wood buried in,or in contact with earth. 4. Wood above structural roof deck, such as roof blocking, frames, sleepers, nailers,roof curbs, 5. equipment supports,and roof cants. 6. Wood in moist locations,such as trenches,tunnels,sumps,and washing areas. B. Install PPT lumber with galvanized steel or stainless steel fasteners and connectors that do not react with the particular treatment salt that has been used. C. Apply a heavily brushed touchup coat to cuts,holes,and abraded or dented areas of each piece of treated lumber using specified chemical. 6A.03 BUILDING PAPER: Building paper shall be Tyvek"Housewrap"air infiltration barrier as manufactured by The Dupont Co.Install over exterior wall sheathing with staples,glue,or roofing nails according to the manufacturer's instructions. 6A.04 SUBFLOORS AND UNDERLAYMENT: rNew 3/4"glued and screwed"C-D-)C'plywood subfloor shall be installed. Install an additional layer of 12"PTS (plugged-touch-sanded)or high-grade Juan plywood where tile and/or marble flooring is to be used. Flooring is to be glued and screwed no less than 6"o.c.prior to installation of file and/or marble.Furring strips shall be installed at slab areas in the areas to receive wood. r 6A.05 WOOD TRUSSES: r PART 1 GENERAL r 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS r A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement, including General and Supplementary r Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications,apply to work of this Section. r 1.02 DESCRIPTION rA. Furnish labor and materials necessary to install a complete system. rB. Plant designed,fabricated and assembled wood trusses with metal plate connectors.. r 1.03 STANDARDS rA. All work of this section shall conform to industry standards and/or manufacturer's r recommendations. r r Budget-InnIMPhase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 41 r r s B. ASTM A446"Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated(Galvanized) by the Hot- Dip Process,Structural(Physical)Quality. C. ASTM A525 "Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated(Galvanized)by the Hot-Dip Process" D. ASTM D245"Standard Methods for Establishing Structural Grades and Related Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber". E. ASTM #84 "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials" F. Grading Rules 1. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau"Grading Rules". 2. National Lumber Grades Authority "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber". 3. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Association, Inc. "Standard Grading Rules ' for Northeastern Lumber" 4. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau "Standard Grading Rule for West Cost Lumber" ' 5. Western Wood Products Association, "Standard Grading rules for Western Lumber" ' G. NF or PA"National Design Specification for Wood Construction". H. NF or PA"Design Value for Wood Construction". I. TPI BWT"Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses". ' J. TPI HET"Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses". ' K. TPI QST"Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses". L. TPI"Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses". 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit pursuant to 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. ' B. Submit pursuant to 01630 Product Options and Substitutions. ' C. Shop Drawings: 1. Signed, dated and sealed by Truss Manufacturer's Professional Engineer registered in state in which Project is located. 2. Show each different truss type, size, shape, or design or typical for a group of 1 equally sized and loaded trusses. Show all design loads. ' 3. Show each different joint. Show material, gage and design load for each connector. 4. Show lumbers size,species,grade and design load for each truss member. 5. Furnish plans showing complete layout and placement. 6. Show all special details and conditions. 7. Provide labeling system for identification and accurate erection. 1 8. Provide signed, dated and sealed by truss fabricator's Professional Engineer registered in state in which project is located. D. Truss Plate manufacturer's literature. r E. Certifications attesting to: ' 1. Lumber species and grades to be used. ' 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Experienced workmen familiar with the work and according to manufacturers' ' recommendations and/or industry standards shall perform all work of this section. ' 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions. Budget-lnn=Phase 11Specs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Sperfcation-Phase 1.doc 42 B. Protect against moisture exposure and damage. 1 C. Deliver,store and handle trusses pursuant to TPI HET. ' D. Handle and store in a manner to avoid deforming and inducing excessive stresses. Lift and bear only at truss fabricator approved panel points. E. Thoroughly protect from moisture. ' F. Store above grade and well ventilated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.01 METAL PLATE CONNECTORS A. Material: Galvanized steel, hot-dip galvanized to G60 minimum, pursuant to ASTM A 446 and ASTM A525. B. Size and Thickness: As required by listed standards and design calculations. 1 ' C. Membership in good standing in Truss Plate Institute is required. Architect reserves right to require proof of membership prior to accepting any items described by or related to this ' Section. ' D. Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, furnish metal plate connectors from ' following manufacturers: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Computrus, Inc. 1 3. Gang-Nail Systems, Inc. 4. Hydro-Air Engineering,Inc. ' 5. Inter-Lock Steel Co., Inc. 6. Robbins Manufacturing Company 7. Tee-Lok Corporation ' 8. Truswal Systems Corporation 2.02 LUMBER GRADES A. Furnish pursuant to applicable grading rules listed under Standards, 2.03 LUMBER SPECIE AND DESIGN VALUES 1 A. Species and grades at discretion of truss fabricator. B. Select and furnish pursuant to NF or PA documents listed under Standards. 2.04 LUMBER SIZES 1 A. Member sizes are subject only to minimums stipulated in applicable documents listed ' under Standards and design calculations unless otherwise noted below. ' 1. Minimum top chord size for trusses with spans greater than or equal to 18 feet: use 2x6's. ' 2. Minimum bottom chord size for trusses with spans greater than or equal to 18 feet:use 24's 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pursuant to approved submittals,TPI BWf and TPE HET. B. Erect square, plumb and level. C. Anchor to resist construction loads and to code and specked live, dead, lateral and uplift loads. Provide 18 gauge material, utility angles as can be supplied by the metal framing ' supplier to connect trusses to metal stud wall framing. Between the utility angle and the trusses use three (3) 1/4"diameter x 1 1/2" long, self-drilling with a zinc finish and a hex head. Installation should be with a 318" drive variable speed drill. Predrilling with a 5/32" diameter bit may be required if wood splitting occurs. Between the utility angle and the Budget-lnn=Phase 1lSpecs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 43 track of the bearing wall - use (3) - No. 12-14 size screws. Where trusses bear on masonry walls with wood blocking: attach wood trusses to wood blocking with H2.5 hurricane anchors by Simpson Strong Tie Co. or approved equal. Use (1) H2.5 hurricane ! clip at each end for 2'-0" o.c. trusses with spans less than 30'-0", use (2) H2.5 hurricane clips at each end for 2'-0"o.c.trusses with spans greater than or equal to 30'-0". • D. Do not attach truss chord directly to interior partitions. Non-bearing partitions shall have 1" minimum clearance from top of partition to truss bottom chord. Provide "STCT" metal framing Gips(by Simpson Strong Tie Co.or equal)atop non-bearing walls to secure them to roof truss bottom chords. 3.02 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT BRACING A. Securely brace during erection pursuant to TPI BWT. • B. Provide permanent bracing and all supplemental framing prior to application of any loads. Provide continuous flat, 2x4 bottom chord bracing at 6-0" o.c. (+/-), located at or near panel points. Horizontal 2x4"X"bracing(6-0"wide)between each row of flat 2x4 bracing, described above, for full width of building at end of truss and at 20,4,o.c. along length of building. Vertical 2x4 "X" bracing nailed to truss webs from top to bottom chords of trusses located near each row of flat 2x4 bottom chord bracing and at 20'-0" o.c. along length of building. When these requirements conflict with notes on the drawings or with TPI recommendations,these requirements described above will govern. 6A.06 EXTERIOR HORIZONTAL SIDING-FIBER CEMENT PRODUCTS: Fiber cement siding shall be furnished and installed as per manufacturer's recommendations.Siding shall consist of autoclaved,non-asbestos,fiber • cement;in compliance with ASTM C 1186 standards.siding shall be 8 mm thick, . with exposures as shown on the drawings,or to match existing.siding shall be smooth texture-facing out.Flame spread rating shall meet ASTM E 84 standards.Acceptable siding manufacture's are James Hardie or Certainteed; striated or checkered;as supplied by maze Nails-100 Church street, Peru, IL. 61345(1-800-435-5949);or an approved equal. 6A.07 EXTERIOR TRIM-FIBER CEMENT PRODUCTS: . Fiber cement trim shall be furnished and installed as per manufacturer's recommendations.Siding shall consist of autoclaved,non-asbestos,fiber . cement;in compliance with ASTM C 1186 standards.siding shall be 8 mm thick, with exposures as shown on the drawings,or to match existing. siding shall be smooth texture-facing out. Flame spread rating shall meet ASTM E 84 standards.Acceptable siding manufacture's are James Hardie or Certainteed; striated or checkered;as supplied by maze Nails-100 Church street,Peru, IL. 61345(1-800-435-5949);or an approved equal r r r r r r r r r r r Budget-InnWIPhase 1%Specs.&SchedufeslBudget Inn-SpecoWcation-Phase 1.doc 44 r r SECTION 613 - CARPENTRY - MILLWORK 6B.01 CABINETWORK: Cabinetry and Built-ins. Verify in the field all cabinetwork dimensions to insure proper clearances and fit prior to mill fabrication. All wood cabinetwork shall be fabricated from 3/4"thick edge banded birch veneer plywood where surfaces are exposed.Provide solid components and nosing where called for or required by construction. Cabinet interior including partitions,drawer slides and backs,concealed shelves shall be fabricated from birch veneer plywood with edge band where exposed. Cabinet backs and drawer bottoms shall be constructed of 1/4"thick hardboard. Cabinetry shall be frameless cabinets. Door-Frame and panel with raised panel. Bathroom and laundry base cabinets shall be beech.-to be painted. Flush Overlay doors and drawers-stain grade. ' Adjustable and/or fixed shelves shall be painted or stained 314"birch veneer with edge band. Provide steel rolling hardware,drawer slides,concealed pivot hinges,magnetic catches. Hardware as manufactured by Knape and Vogt with No.255 standards and No.256 shelf supports of steel in a nickel finish. Standards shall be fully recessed. Granite countertop shall have a monolithic nosing. Apply over plywood rsubstrate. Install with adhesive. Sink to be an undermount.Provide silicone sealant. r 1 1 r 1 r 1 1 r r r r r r r r r r r r r Budget-InnI Phase ASpecs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Spedficatron-Phase 1.doc 45 1 r DIVISION 7 - MOISTURE PROTECTION - 7A.01 GUARANTEE: The Contractor shall and hereby does guarantee that all work executed under the . Division will be free from defects of materials and workmanship;and that all roofing,and flashing work will be thoroughly watertight for a period of five years from the date of completion of the work,and that at their own expense shall repair and/or replace all such defective work and all other work damaged thereby during the term of the guarantee. 7A.02 CAULKING: • General caulking compound for use around perimeter of all openings in the exterior walls shall be one part elastomeric,"Silicone Construction 1200 Sealant" as manufactured by General Electric or equal.Provide manufacturer's recommended joint back-up material as required. Color of caulking shall be translucent/clear. 7A.03 FLASHING: All base,cap,through wall flashing,etc.shall be,dear anodized aluminum. Window head flashing and over drip cap on horizontal trim band shall be copper. Flash all joints,bends,where indicated or as required to provide a weather tight installation. 7A.04 WATERPROOFING&DAMPROOFING: • Walls below grade shall be waterproofed with"Thoroseal Foundation Coating"; . and the walls above grade shall be damproofed using"Thoroseal with Acryl 60" of Thoro Systems Products as manufactured by Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc, . Jacksonville,Fl. (800)327-1570. Follow manufacturer's installation procedures. 7A.05 VAPOR BARRIERS: All polyethylene vapor barriers for use shall be"Moisttop"vapor barrier as . manufactured by American Sisalkraft Corp.,or equal,Vapor Barrier below slab shall be 6 mil. All vapor barriers at walls shall be 4 mils.Lap vapor barriers 6" minimum at splices.See drawings for locations of vapor barrier.All joints shall be taped with duct tape. Minimize joints as realistically possible. . 7A.06 JOINT SEALER: Joint Sealer shall be single component chemical curing polyurethane sealant in colors as selected. Provide backer rod and primer,if applicable. Clean joints and install sealant free of air pockets,ridges,sags and tooled in an appropriate manner. 7A.07 BUILDING FELT: Building felt shall be 30 lb.bituminous paper installed with minimum 12"end laps and shingled with 6"laps horizontally. 7A.08 ICE AND WATER SHIELD: ' Ice and water shield shall be installed in all valley areas and areas where roof breaks,penetrations and bends occur.See Copper roof section under Division 5 "Metals"Install at all roof intersections,valley's,penetrations and tie-ins. Extend 3'into dormer valley areas or"tie-ins". At valley's preparation of substrate shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and installation guidelines.Storage and protection shall follow manufacturer's instructions and installation guidelines. At drip and rake edges,extend ice and water shield up a minimum of 6'-0". There ' shall be no allowance for voids in substrate of more than 1/4". 1 r Budget-/nn=Phase 1tSpecs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 46 r 7A.09 RIDGE VENT: Furnish and install in locations as indicated on the drawings. Shall be as imanufactured by Englert,Inc.41 Warehouse Point Road,Wallingford,CT 08492. • 1-800-729-3759,203-265-6704,(908)862-8614.(fax)203-265-1870. ctCuD-englertinc.com-Aft: Mr. Dan Dionne. Internal baffles and insect screens. Provide end plugs as required.Ventilation must allow for more than 12 square inches per linear foot. 7A.10 GUTTER/DOWNSPOUTS(ADD ALTERNATE): General Contractor shall provide and install all gutters,downspouts and hook- ups to drains;confirm locations with site engineers. Style of gutter shall be "Ogee"or Style K";3 3/4" x 5" ;shall be.051 aluminum. Provide complete with all accessories,fittings,and connections.Space hangers @ 2'-0"o.c.strap hangers,fabricated form 1116" x V in the direction of flow.Connections can be secured by brass or galvanized or coated aluminum screws.Pitch gutters not less than 1/16"per foot. Leaders and downspouts to be of the same material and gauge as that of the gutters with slip joint connections. General Contractor shall co-ordinate with owner on extents of and he shall co-ordinate with site drawings for downspout to drain connection. Co-ordinate with site utility work- note all downspouts shall be into sub-surface drains out to site storm water . systems-they will not be allowed to tie into footing drains. Refer and co-ordinate as required with site and site utility drawings by Jarrett-Martin Engineers. 7A.11 UNDER EAVE CORNICE AND SOFFIT VENTS: Fumish and install under eave cornice and soffit vents, (with insect screening). Insure quantities as required for proper ventilation.Acceptable manufacturer's . are;Lomanco Inc.;Atlas International Inc.;6612 Snowdrift Road;Allentown, PA. . 18106. 610-395-8445. r r r r r r r r Budget InnIWIPhase 11Specs.&Schedules%Budget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 47 r r __ qW 0 SECTION 7B-INSULATION 7B.01 GENERAL: All insulating materials shall be manufactured by Owens-Coming,Johns Mansville,or approved equal,to meet or exceed the specified"R"values for the materials specified. 7B.02 BATT INSULATION: Furnish and install by stapling full thick,fiberglass,foil faced bait insulation in exterior framed walls,roofs,and floors or where indicated. Insulation thickness shall be as indicated on the drawings with the following resistance values: Basement walls Rigid Board-Min.2" Roof and ceilings R-38 minimum at ceiling area. Walls,floors,Ceilings Sound Insulation as called for on drawings. Keep all insulation a minimum of 3"away from all light fixtures to conform to Code. Completely fill all voids in framing,including shim spaces around doors and windows with cut to fit pieces of insulation. Unfaced insulation is to be installed using a polyethylene vapor barrier on the inside face of the framing. Tears,punchers and/or penetrations of vapor barrier(whether being polyethylene or foil faced),to be patched with duct tape for a continuous barrier. • Provide propa-vent baffle in areas of sloped ceiling in order to maintain continuous_airflow. Provide sill sealer insulation between framing plate and foundation as manufactured by Owens Coming-or equal. Budget-InnICOlPhase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Speafication-Phase 1.doc 48 s SECTION 8A-DOORS,WINDOWS,AND GLASS 8A.01 WOOD DOORS: See door schedule and plans for coordination and location. All trimmer studs at exterior doors are to be straight,plumb and square. No twisted or knot filled studs will be accepted.Screws through the door jambs shall be long enough to penetrate securely into the jambs. Use shims generously between the finished jambs and trimmer studs. Support thresholds w/pressure treated sills.Seal with G.E.Silicone Insulate between jamb and framing cavity with urethane foam both sides.inside and outside. Before painting exterior doors,remove groove-installed flexible gasket-reapply after painting is finished. Final installation of permanent lockset is to be done towards project closeout.-for temporary use, use Kwikset lockset. Related Work Specified Elsewhere A. Steel Frames A. Finish hardware B. Glass and Gazing C. Painting(Site Finishing Doors) References Standards: Unless otherwise specified,comply with the applicable requirements of the"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"(Fifth Edition)by The Architectural Woodwork Institute. Submittals • B. Shop Drawings:Show details,elevation,and construction for each door type,location and installation requirements for Finish Hardware(including cutouts and reinforcements),and accessory items. 1. Include a schedule of doors using the same reference numbers for details and openings as those on the Contract Drawings. B. Product Data:Catalog sheets,specifications,and installation instructions for each type door specified. . C. Samples: 1. 12 X 12 inch comer sample of each door type,with panel(if any). a). Factory Finished Doors:Include shop finish on samples. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Affidavit required under Quality Assurance Article. Quality Assurance A. Certifications:Affidavit by door manufacturer certifying that each door meets the specified requirements and standards. B. Fire rated Doors:Carry metal label,fastened on hinge edge with drive screws, indicating fire class/rating certified by an independent testing agency. Delivery.Storaue.and Handlincr A. Factory Finished Doors:Deliver doors in factory applied plastic bags or heavy paper protective cartons. Mark packaging with sufficient identification to insure proper door location. B. Comply with manufacturer's storage instructions. Project Conditions A. Environmental Requirements:Do not store doors within the building or install doors until after completion of cast-in-place concrete, masonry, plastering,gypsum board and tile work,and until after the building has dried out. Materials A. Lumber: Comply with applicable AWI species requirements for door type and grade. 1. Exposed Surfaces:As indicated on the Drawings or specified. Furnish matching exposed surface material on both faces and both edges of each door unless otherwise indicated. 2. Astragals:Clear ash or oak. B. Wood veneers:Comply with applicable AWI species requirements for door type and grade. Budget-InnIMPhase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 49 C. Glue:Type I waterproof adhesives for bonding faces and crossbands to core,for both exterior and interior door fabrication. Factory Pre-Finishing, Pre-fitting,and Preparation for Hardware A. Factory Pre-Finishing: Prefinish wood doors at the factory or finishing shop as follows: 1. Comply with AWI P-200,Section 1500 finishing recommendations including final sanding requirements. 2. Finishing System:Comply with the requirements of the following AWI Finish System: a). Transparent Finish:tr-4,transparent conversion varnish,premium quality. 1). Sheen: Dull satin; 15 to 20 degrees. 2). Stain Color:To be selected by the Architect from Manufacturers standard product line. 3). If open grain wood:Filled finish, 4). Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. B. Factory Pre-fitting and Pre-machining for hardware: Prefit doors scheduled or indicated to receive factory finishing. Premachine these doors for hardware schedule,doorframe shop drawings,and hardware templates to insure proper fit and alignment of doors and hardware. 1. Comply with AWI clearance requirements for pre-fitting. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Comply with finish hardware schedule,door frame shop drawings,and hardware templates to insure proper fit and alignment of doors and hardware. 2. Verify hardware mortises in steel frames in the field to verify dimensions and proper alignment prior to proceeding with factory machining doors. Preparation A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. B. Prepare doors to receive scheduled mortise hardware. Coordinate doors with the finish hardware schedule and with the door frame shop drawings for proper location of mortise hardware. Machine doors for hardware. C. Touch-up cut surfaces of factory primed doors with primer compatible with primer specifies for factory priming. Installation . A. Install the work of this section in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions,except as shown or specified otherwise. B. Fit doors to prepared frames for proper fit. Allow 3132 to 1/8 inch clearance at head and both jambs. Trim doors when necessary by planning. Slightly chamfer edge of lock stiles. Bevel lock stile as follows: 1. Non-fire rated doors:1/8 inch in 2 inches. 2. Fire rated doors: 1/16 inch in 2 inches. C. Prefit Doors: Do not alter prefit factory finished doors. D. Fire rated Doors: Install doors in corresponding fire rated frames in accordance with the requirements of NFPA No.80. E. Factory finished doors:Field touch-up and restore finishes damaged during installation. Installation Tolerances A. Conform to AWI P-200, Section 1300 for maximum diagonal distortion. B. Maximum vertical distortion(bow):1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string,top to bottom,over an imaginary 36 x 24 inch surface area. C. Maximum width distortion(Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string,edge to edge,over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area. R Adiusting A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust doors for proper operation:coordinate with hardware adjustment:replace doors which cannot be properly adjusted. C. Restore door finishes damaged during installation,in manner which results in the doors showing no evidence of the restoration. If refinished door cannot be made to match other doors, refinished door shall be replaced at the contractor's expense. D. Protect installed work as recommended by door manufacturer's to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. E. Adjust closers for full closure. r Budget-InnIMPhase ASpecs.8 SchedulesOudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 50 r r �+ 8A.02 DOOR HARDWARE: The cost of furnishing the door hardware shall be included in the base bid. Include all required knobs,roses,hinges,stops,closures,and other items of door hardware.The cost of installation shall be included as part of the Base Price.Co-ordinate operation with Owner and schedule. Following are the performance requirements;and also refer to door schedule hardware group notes. Related Work Specified Elsewhere A. Fire rated access door hardware. B. Balanced door operating mechanism&hold-open device. C. Thresholds,Weather stripping and seals. Definitions A. Class Number:A term used to identify the various types of hardware specified as a reference for hardware schedule. B. Company field advisor:A representative of the company which manufacturers the hardware specified in the field quality control article,who is qualified to assure the hardware is installed and operating property. Submittals A. Waiver of submittals:The"Waiver of Certain Submittal Requirements"does not apply to this Section. . B. Quality Assurance Data:Submit quality assurance data before other Submittal Packages. C. Submittal Packages:Submit the finish hardware schedule and product data,specified below,at the same time as a package. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware,schedules, catalog cuts,electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors,frames,and related work to ensure proper size,thickness,hand,function,and finish of door hardware. a). Final hardware schedule content:Based on hardware indicated,organize schedule into"hardware sets"indicating complete designations of every required for each door or opening. Include the following information: 1), Type,style,function,size and finish of each hardware item. 2). Name and manufacturer of each item. 3). Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4). Location of each hardware set cross referenced to confirmations of owner in drawings:and in door and frame schedule. 5). Explanation of all abbreviations,symbols,and codes Rcontained in schedule. 6). Mounting locations for hardware. 7). Door and frame sizes and materials. 8). Keying information. 1 3. Submittal sequence:Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the project construction schedule. Include the product data,samples,shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware,and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. 4. Keying schedule:Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. 5. Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule. 6. Sample will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal,review,and field comparison process may,after final check of operation,be incorporated in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. 7. Templates for doors,frames,and other work specified to be factory prepared for installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. E. Schedule Format: Budget-InntMPhase 11Specs.&Schedulesl6udget Inn-Specficatfon-Phase 1.doc 51 i 1. Arrange schedule by building in groups,each group consisting of similar doors and hardware. Do not combine labeled openings and non- labeled openings. . 2. Use vertical schedule layout. Horizontal hardware schedules are not acceptable. 3. Product quantities will not be checked for accuracy. F. Product data: For information only,furnish two copies of the manufacturer's catalog cuts for each item of finish hardware required to complete the work of this section. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Certification: Deliver to the director's representative written certification from the technical advisor that the finish hardware and the accessories are installed and operating properly. . 2. Manuals: Deliver 2 copies of manuals describing installation. Temolates A. Furnish required templates to the affected trades,to enable the fabricators to make proper provision for finish hardware without delaying the job progress. Delivery and Storage A. Packaging of door hardware jointly with representative of hardware supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers,sort and rrepackage in containers dearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. B. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. AC. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation(shop or Project site). D. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the project,but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. E. Storage:Store hardware in a dry secure location. Quality Assurance A. Uniformity of hardware and single source responsibility: Each kind of hardware (door closers,locks,hinges,etc)shall be the product(s)of a single manufacturer. Size variations:Manufacturer's products may vary slightly from sizes specifies except where a minimum size or thickness is specified. Variations shall not prevent the product from performing the intended use. ' C. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. NFPA 101. 2. Fire rated openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No.80 and requirements of authorities having jurstiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL,Warnock Hersey, FM,or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities ' having juristiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated and door frame labels. 8A.03 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES (MEDIUM STILE DOORS): ' This section includes Series 375 Medium Stile aluminum doors,and door frames for exterior and interior applications,shop fabricated,factory pre-finished,for field glazing. Manufactured by;Vistawall Architectural Products;P.O.Box 629;803 Airport Rd.;Terrell, Texas 75160; Voice(972)551-6100; Data(972)551-6264;ATTN: David Dingley—Sales Representative;800-556-6390. PART 1 —GENERAL Summary A. Related Documents: Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 -General Requirements, and Drawings apply to Work of this Section. ' Budget Inni=Phase 10pecs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 52 B. Section Includes: . 1. Aluminum doors complete with hardware. C. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchoring devices which are built into masonry. As required by the new construction. References • A. Aluminum Association(AA): 1. DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association(AAMA): 1. 2605 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. . 2. 606.1 Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 3. 608.1 Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 4. 701.2 Specifications for Pile Weather-stripping. 5. Manual#10 Care and Handling of rArchitectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. 6. SFM-1 Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual ' C. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. A117.1 Safety Standards for the Handicapped. D. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. A123 Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. 8209 Aluminum and Aluminum- Alloy Sheet and Plate. 3. B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Shapes,and Tubes. 4. B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes, Rolled or Extruded. r 5. E283 Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. 6. E330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 7. E331 Test Method for Water ' Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. E. Federal Specifications(FS): 1. TT-P-641G(1) Primer Coating,Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide(For Galvanized Surfaces). ` 2. TT-P-645A Primer,Paint,Zinc ` Chromate,Alkyd Type. I System Reauirements A. Design Requirements: ' 1. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement,glazing,anchorage,or moisture disposal. Budget-lnn=Phase 11Specs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 53 1W 2. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. 3. Provide concealed fastening. 4. Provide entrance systems,including necessary modifications,to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. 5. Attachment considerations are to take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of . loosening,weakening or fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. 6. Anchors,fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not more than 50%of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. 7. Provide for expansion and contraction due to structural movement without detriment to appearance or performance. • Submittals A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 1A.07. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and product specifications. 2. Include information for factory finishes, hardware,accessories,and other required components. • 3. Include color charts for finish indicating manufacturers standard colors available for selection. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings covering fabrication,installation and finish of specified systems. 2. Include following: S a. Fully dimensioned plans and elevations with detail coordination keys. b. locations of exposed fasteners and joints. 3. Provide detailed drawings of: a. Composite members. b. Joint connections for framing systems and for entrance doors. C. Anchorage. d. System reinforcements. e. System expansion and contraction provisions. f. Glazing methods and accessories. g. Internal sealant requirements and recommended types. 4. Schedule of finishes. D. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturers standard samples indicating quality of finish. 2. Where normal texture or color variations are expected, include additional samples illustrating range of variation. E. Qualification Data: r1. Submit installer qualifications verifying years of experience. Qualms Assurance A. Single Source Responsibility: 1. To ensure quality of appearance and performance,obtain materials for systems from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturer . approved by systems manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified for installation of specified systems. C. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and,manufacturer's written instructions. D. Conform to requirements of ANSI Al 17.1 and local amendments. Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. Comply with requirements of Section 01600. rB. Protect finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage. Budget-InnIMVhase 11Specs.&Schedulesftdget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 54 r C. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which become firmly bonded when exposed to sun. D. Do not leave coating residue on any surfaces. E. Replace damaged units. • Warranty A. Provide all required warranties. • B. Provide written warranty in form acceptable to Owner jointly signed by manufacturer, • installer and Contractor warranting work to be watertight,free from deflective materials, defective workmanship,glass breakage due to defective design,and agreeing to replace components which fail within 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. • C. Warranty shall cover following: 1. Complete watertight and airtight system installation within specified tolerances. 2. System is structurally sound and free from distortion. D. Provide written warranty stating organic coating finish will be free from fading more than 10%,chalking,yellowing,peeling,cracking,pitting,corroding or non-uniformity of color,or gloss deterioration beyond manufacturer's descriptive standards for 5 years from date of Substantial Completion and agreeing to promptly correct defects. PART 2—PRODUCTS iManufacturers and Products A. Subject to compliance with requirements indicated,provide products by one of the . following: 1.Vistawall Architectural Products,Terrell,TX. B. Substitutions:Submit under provisions of Section 14 Product Substitutions,a minimum of . 10 days prior to bid date. C. Acceptable Entrance Systems:Model 376-medium stile(8-1/2"bottom rail,3-1/2"top rail, 4-1/4"verticals) Framinq Materials and Accessories A. Aluminum: . 1.ASTM B221,alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions;ASTM B209,alloy 5005-H16 for sheets;or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for specified finish. B. Internal Reinforcing: 1. ASTM A36 for carbon steel;or ASTM B308 for structural aluminum. 2. Shapes and sizes to suit installation. 3. Steel components factory coated with alkyd type zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT-P-645. C. Anchorage Devices: 1. Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated steel or aluminum assemblies of shapes,plates,bars or tubes. 2. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies after fabrication,comply with ASTM A123,2.0 ounce minimum coating. D. Fasteners: 1. Aluminum,non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive ® materials compatible with items being fastened. 2. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible. ' 3. For exposed locations,provide Phillips flathead screws with finish matching item fastened. 4. For concealed locations,provide manufacturer's standard fasteners. E. Expansion Anchor Devices: Lead-shield or toothed-steel,drilled-in,expansion bolt anchors. Budget-inn=lPhase 11Specs. &ScheduleslBudgetlnn-Spermcation-Phase 1.doc 55 F. Protective Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, Scompounded for 30 mil thickness for each coat;or alkyd type zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT-P-645. G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Components: Zinc oxide conforming with FS TT-P-641. H. Glazing Gaskets: 1. Compression type design,replaceable,molded or extruded,of neoprene,polyvinyl chloride(PVC),or ethylene propylene diene monomer(EPDM). 2. Profile and hardness as required to maintain uniform pressure for watertight seal. 1. Weatherstripping: 1. Wool pile conforming to AAMA 701.2. 2. Provide EPDM or vinyl-blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail,adjustable for contact with threshold. Glass and Glazing Accessories A. Refer to Section 08810. All hardware shall be installed by storefront and entrance manufacturer. Coordinate requirements. . Door Hardware A. Hardware Items: 1. Pivot hinges[Center hung type]. . 2. Butt hinges. 3. Concealed overhead closers. 4. Push bar. 5. Pulls. 6. Panic devices. 7. Deadlocks. 8. Deadlatch. 9. Knoblock. 10. Cylinders: Specified in Section 08710. 11. Coordinators. 12. Door holders. . 13. Stops. . 14. Thresholds. 15. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard. All items shall be confirmed&approved by owner before order is placed. B. Hardware Set 1,each entry door system shall have: 1. 1-1/2 pair butt hinges. 2. 1 each deadlock. 3. 1 each closer. 4. 1 set push/pull bars. 5. 1 each stop. 6. 1 each threshold. Fabrication A. Coordination of Fabrication: 1. Check actual frame or door openings required in construction work by accurate field measurements before fabrication. 2. Fabricate units to withstand loads which will be applied when system is in place. B. General 1. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. r2. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements,and for support to ' structure. Budget-MMCDlPhase 11Specs.&Schedulesoudget Inn-Specificadon-Phase 1.doc 56 r 1W 3. Separate dissimilar metals and aluminum in contact with concrete utilizing I, protective coating or preformed separators,which will prevent contact and • corrosion. 4. Comply with glazing requirements; in Glazing Section. • Glazing shall be done after system has been erected and from the inside or outside. D. Entrance Doors: • 1. Fabricate with mechanical joints using internal reinforcing plates and shear blocks attached with fasteners and by welding. 2. Provide extruded aluminum glazing stops of mitered design, • permanenfly anchored on security side and removable on opposite side. E. Hardware: M1. Receive hardware supplied in accordance with Hardware Section and install in accordance with requirements of this Section. 2. Cut,reinforce,drill and tap frames and doors as required to receive hardware. • 3. Comply with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. 4. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. F. Welding: • 1. Comply with recommendations of the American Welding Society. 2. Use recommended electrodes and methods to avoid distortion and discoloration. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces;restore mechanical finish. G. Flashings: Form from sheet aluminum with same finish as extruded sections. Material thickness as required to suit condition without deflection or"oilcanning". MFinishes A. Organic Coating(high performance fluorocarbon): 1. Comply with requirements of AAMA 2605. . 2. Surfaces cleaned and given conversion coating pre-treatment prior to . application of 0.3 mil dry film thickness of epoxy or acrylic primer following recommendations of finish coat manufacturer. 3. Finish coat of[50%][70%]minimum fluorocarbon resin fused to primed surfaces at temperature recommended by manufacturer, 1.0 mil minimum dry film thickness. 4. Acceptable coatings are Trinar by Akzo Coatings, Inc.; Nubelar by Glidden Company; Fluoroceram by Morton International, Inc.;Duranar by PPG Industries Inc.;and Fluropon by Valspar Corporation. 5. Provide in either a 2,3,or 4 coat system as required for color selected. 6. [Custom colors as selected by Architect.] B. Color Anodized: 1. Conforming to AA-M12C22A44 and AAMA 606.1 and 608.1. 2. Architectural Class[I][II],etched, medium matte,colored anodic coating,0.7 mil minimum thickness. PART 3-EXECUTION Examination A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with this Section. rInstallation A. Erection Tolerances: 1. Limit variations from plumb and level: ' a. 1/8 inch in 10'-0"vertically. b. 1/8 inch in 20'-0"horizontally. Budget-lnn=Phase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specificatfon-Phase 1.doc 57 2. Limit variations from theoretical locations: 1/4 inch for any member at any location. 3. Limit offsets in theoretical end-to-end and edge-to-edge alignment: 1/16 inch from flush surfaces not more than 2 inches apart or out-of- flush by more than 1/4 inch. • B. Install doors and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Set units plumb,level and true to line,without warp or rack of frame. • D. Anchor securely in place,allowing for required movement,including expansion and • contraction. E. Separate dissimilar materials at contact points,including metal in contact with masonry or • concrete surfaces,with bituminous paint or preformed separators to prevent contact and • corrosion. F. Set sill members in bed of sealant. Set other members with internal sealants and baffles to provide weathertight construction. • G. Coordinate installation of perimeter sealant and backing materials between assemblies and adjacent construction in accordance with requirements of All Approved Sections. H. Glazing: Refer to requirements of the Section Glazing. • Adiustina A. Test door operating functions. Adjust closing and latching speeds and other hardware in • accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ensure smooth operation. Cleaning A. Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove excess mastic,mastic smears,foreign materials and other unsightly marks. B. Clean metal surfaces exercising care to avoid damage. i 8A.04 STEEL RATED DOOR FRAMES: . Provide factory pre-finished or primed steel door frames for interior doors-rated labels and sizes are indicated in the door schedule. Assembly and field installation of door frames shall be by a qualified tradesman. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the architect for his approval • Final door frames shall allow for application of new wood moulding and trim-to match existing. (Submit shop drawings to architect for final approval-before placement of order). Protect frames and install according to manufacturer's instructions. Door frames shall be cold-rolled or galvanized steel and UL approved with label listed on frames(See hardware schedule and co-ordinate accordingly). Frames shall be as manufactured by Rediframe Products Division;P.O.Box 6416,Dothan,Alabama 36302-6416(1-800-633-7553);or approved equal. 8A.05 FIRED RATED INSULATED S UN-INSULATED ACCESS DOORS: Provide and install fire rated insulated and un-insulated access doors;models PFI and PFN 24"x 36"as manufactured by Cendrex Inc., 10 100 Parkway St. Montreal, (Quebec) H1 J1 5;Telephone(514)493-1489; 1-800-479-1489;Fax(514)493-1992. Provide a 1- hour fire barrier;B Label—Warnock Hersey file no: 1-14031—painted cold rolled steel 16 gauge;hinge shall be continuous piano;to allow opening to 165 degrees. Lock/latch— ' self-latching tool—key operated latch or ring operated latch—shall be determined by Owner. Provide automatic panel closer with inside panel release, prime painted (commercial gray)finish. See drawings for locations. 1 1 1 Budget-Inn1COlPhase llSpecs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Spedfication-Phase 1.doc 58 BUDGET INN Enlarged Infill Plans DOOR SCHEDULE (Phasel) Tag. Manuf. I Rating/ Location Size R.O. Qty. Swing Remarks No. Type I FIRST FLOOR: D 1 Steel Series 375 Front Entry Door 1 3/4"x T-0"x T-0" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#10 Insulated Medium Double Acting (2) 1'-6"x 7'-0"x 4" Fixed Side Door Stile Side Lites Lites Vista Wall Or Equal D 2 Steel 1 Hour- ADA Guest 1 314"x 3'-0"x 7'-0" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#10 • Insulated B Label Room Single Door Series 375 Side Exit Door Action • Vista Wall Medium Or Equal Stile D 3 Steel 1 Hour- Managers Room 1 3/4"x T-0"x T-0" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#10 • Insulated B Label Side Exit Door Single • Door Series 375 Action Vista Wall Medium • Or Equal Stile D 4 Mohawk 20 Minute Managers Room 1 3/8"x T-0"x T-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Interior Entrance D 5 Mohawk Solid Core Managers 1 3/8"x T-0"x T-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 • "Rustic" Bathroom • D 6 Steel Door 1 Hour- Door to 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x T-0" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#3 B Label Basement D 7 Mohawk Solid Core ADA Guest 1 3/8"x T-0"x T-0" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Room ADA Compliant • Bathroom Door D 8 Mohawk 20 Minute ADA Public 1 3/8"x T-0"x T-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#11 • "Rustic C Label Lobby Restroom SECOND FLOOR: D 9 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 7'-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label . D 10 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Bathroom 1 3/8"x T-0"x T-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" D 11 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Bathroom 1 3/8"x T-0"x T-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" D 12 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x T-0"x T-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label D 13 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x T-0"x T-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label D 14 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x T-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustics C Label D 15 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Bathroom 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 7'-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" D 16 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Bathroom 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 7'-0" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" BASEMENT. D 17 Mohawk Solid Core Storage Under 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x T-0" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#5 "Rustic" I Stairs D 18 Cendrex PFI Steel Crawl Space 2'-0"x 3'-0" 2 Steel Provide All Required Insulated Access Door Insulated Closures, Hardware,Weather Fire Rated Fire Rated Stripping, and Threshold. ATTIC. D 19 Cendrex PFI Steel Attic Access in 2'-0"x T-0" 1 Steel Provide All Required Insulated Second Floor Insulated Closures,Hardware,Weather Fire Rated Corridor Fire Rated Stripping,and Threshold. \common\Budget-Inn\Post CD\Revised CD-Combined Phase 18L 2\Specs.&Schedules\Budget Inn-Door Schedule-Combined Phases-Revised-Nov 112005 11/15/05 • • BUDGET INN Stair Towers, Second Floor Addition DOOR SCHEDULE(Phase2) • Tag. Manuf. I Rating/ Location Size R.O. Qty. Swing Remarks • No. Type 7_ 1 • FRONT UNITS-FIRST FLOOR: D 1 Steel 1 Hour- Stair Tower#1 1 3/4"x T-0"x 6-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#4 • Insulated B Label Entry Door Door D 2 Steel Door 1 Hour- Stair Tower#1 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#3 B Label Basement Door D 3 Steel Door Stair Tower#1 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#5 • Storage Door D 4 Steel 1 Hour- Stair Tower#2 1 314"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#4 Insulated B Label Entry Door Door • D 5 Steel Door 1 Hour- Stair Tower#2 1 318"x T-0"x 6-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#3 . B Label Basement Door D 6 Steel Door Stair Tower#2 1 3/8"x T-0"x 6'-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#5 Storage Door FRONT UNITS-SECOND FLOOR: D 7 IMohawk 1 Hour- Stair Tower#1 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#3 "Rustic" B Label Entry Door D 8 Mohawk 1 Hour- Stair Tower#1 1 3/8"x T-0"x 6'-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#6 "Rustic" B Label Linen Storage Door . D 9 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x T-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door • D 10 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 318"x 2'-0"x 6'-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors • D 11 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6'-10" 1 In.Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 12 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 318"x T-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door D 13 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 • "Rustic" Closet Doors . D 14 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6'-10" 1 in Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 15 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 318"x 3'-D"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door D 16 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3J8"x 2'-0'x 6'-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors D 17 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 18 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label I Entry Door D 19 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors D 20 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 318"x 2'-6"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 21 Mohawk 45 Minute Guest Room to 1 318"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#7 "Rustic" C Label Guest Room D 22 Mohawk 45 Minute Guest Room to 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#7 "Rustic" C Label Guest Room D 23 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x T-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Ent Door D 24 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6'-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 'Rustic" Closet Doors D 25 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 'Rustic" Bathroom Door 026 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x T-0"x U-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Ent Door D 27 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6'-10" 1 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" I I Closet Doors \common\Budget-1nn\Post CD\Revised CD-Combined Phase 1&2\Specs.&Schedules\Budgct Inn-Door Schedule-Combined Phases-Revised-Nov 112005 11/15/05 • D 28 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 • "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 29 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 318"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door • D 30 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors • D 31 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 32 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 . "Rustic" C Label Entry Door D 33 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6'-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 • "Rustic" Closet Doors • D 34 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 35 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door D 36 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 318"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors D 37 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door ® D 38 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 in Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door • D 39 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors . D 40 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 41 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Ent Door • 042 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors D 43 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 318"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 44 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door D 45 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors D 46 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 47 Mohawk 45 Minute Guest Room to 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#7 "Rustic" C Label Guest Room D 48 Mohawk 45 Minute Guest Room to 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#7 "Rustic" C Label Guest Room D 49 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door D 50 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6'-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors D 51 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 52 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door D 53 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors D 54 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 55 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door D 56 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6'-10" 2 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors D 57 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 58 Mohawk 20 Minute Guest Room 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#1 "Rustic" C Label Entry Door D 59 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 2 1 Out Swing I Door&' Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Doors \common\BudgehInn\Post CD\Revised CD-Combined Phase I&2\Specs.&Schedules\Budget Inn-Door Schedule-Combined Phases-Revised-Nov 112005 11/15/05 D 60 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 • "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 61 Mohawk 1 Hour- Stair Tower#2 1 3/8"x T-0"x 6'-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#6 "Rustic" B Label Linen Storage Door D 62 Mohawk 1 Hour- Stair Tower#2 1 3/8"x T-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#3 "Rustic" B Label Entry Door FRONT UNITS-ATTIC: D 63 Cendrex PFI Steel Attic Access in 2'-0"x 3'-0" 1 Provide All Required Insulated Second Floor Closures,Hardware,Weather Fire Rated Stair Tower#2 Stripping,and Threshold. Linen Storage • D 64 Cendrex PFI Steel Attic Access in 2'-0"x 3'-0" 1 Provide All Required Insulated Second Floor Closures,Hardware,Weather • Fire Rated Corridor Stripping,and Threshold. . D 65 Cendrex PFI Steel Attic Access in 2'-0"x 3'-0" 1 Provide All Required Insulated Second Floor Closures, Hardware,Weather Fire Rated Corridor Stripping,and Threshold. D 66 Cendrex PFI Steel Attic Access in 2'-0"x 3'-0" 1 Provide All Required Insulated Second Floor Closures, Hardware,Weather Fire Rated Stair Tower#1 Stripping,and Threshold. Linen Storage FRONT UNITS-BASEMENT: D 67 Steel Door Stair Tower#1 1 3/8"x T-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#3 Basement Door Cut Down as Re 'd D 68 Steel Door Stair Tower#2 1 3/8"x 3'-0"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#3 Basement Door Cut Down as Reqd REAR UNITS-FIRST FLOOR: • Steel 1 Hour- Stair Tower 1 3/4"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#4 D 69 Insulated B Label Entry Door Door REAR UNITS-SECOND FLOOR: 771Mohawk Steel 1 Hour- Stair Tower 1 3/4"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#4 sulated B Label Entry Door Door Solid Core Guest Room 13/4"x T-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#9 Rustic" Entry Door D 72 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#6 "Rustic" Closet Door D 73 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 74 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/4"x T-0"x 6-10"" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#9 "Rustic" Entry Door D 75 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Door D 76 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 77 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/4"x T-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#9 "Rustic" Entry Door D 78 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Door D 79 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door D 80 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/4"x 3'-0"x 6'-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#9 "Rustic" Entry Door D 81 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-0"x 6'-10" 1 Out Swing Door&Hardware Note#8 "Rustic" Closet Door D 82 Mohawk Solid Core Guest Room 1 3/8"x 2'-6"x 6-10" 1 In Swing Door&Hardware Note#2 "Rustic" Bathroom Door REAR UNITS-ATTIC: D 83 Cendrex PFI Steel Attic Access in 2'-0"x 3'-0" 1 Provide All Required Insulated Second Floor Closures, Hardware,Weather Fire Rated Stair Tower Stripping,and Threshold. lcommon\Budget-1nn\Post CD1Revised CD-Combined Phase 1&2\Specs.&Schedules\Budget Inn-Door Schedule-Combined Phases-Revised-Nov 112005 11/15/05 General Notes: • 1. All hardware shall be handicap compliant. ` 2. Exterior Aluminum Doors shall be Hickory Color-Per Planning Board Approval; To match window frame colors. • Abbreviations D.O. = Door Opening Insul. = Insulation • R.O. = Rough Opening V.I.F. = Verify in Field Door&Hardware Notes: 1. Guest Entry Doors: - Solid Core 3 Plv Pre-finished RUSTIC Doors - Prepped for electric locks,hinges,and viewers 16 gauge Hollow Metal Frame - Door closer,barrier free,delayed action gold finish Door Guard Pressure Sensitive Door Seal Concave wall stop,Satin Brass Kick plate 8"x 34" • - Smoke Seal-CS-Cap sweep door bottom with#AMU(Allowance and Means Undercut)- Manufactured by Door&Hardware Systems Inc. 2. Guest Bathroom Doors: - Solid Core 3 Ply Pre-finished RUSTIC Doors - Prepped for cylinder locks and hinges 16 gauge Hollow Metal Frame • - Privacy Leverset,Satin Brass Concave wall stop,Satin Brass • 3. Stairwell Door(Interior): • - Solid Core 3 Ply Pre-finished RUSTIC Doors with 5 x 20 view lite • - Prepped for cylinder locks and hinges Kick Plate 8"x 34" - Door closer,barrier free,delayed action Aluminum Finish Fire rated rim panic exit device,Aluminum - Passage Sensitive Door Seal Pressure Sensitive Door Seal - Concave wall stop,Satin Brass 4. Stairwell Door(Exterior) - Tempered Glass with Grilles as shown - Prepped for cylinder locks and hinges - Kick Plate 8"x 34" . - Door closer,barrier free,delayed action Aluminum Finish Fire rated rim panic exit device,Aluminum - Passage Sensitive Door Seal Pressure Sensitive Door Seal - Concave wall stop,Satin Brass No exterior door handle hardware - 16 gauge doors with 14 gauge frames 5. Storage Doors(Stairwell- 1"Floor): 16 gauge Hollow Metat Frame with 18 gauge doors r - Storeroom Leverset,Satin Brass . - Concave wall stop,Satin Brass . 6. Linen Storage Door(Stairwell-2"d Floor): Prepped for cylinder locks and hinges 16 gauge Hollow Metal Frame with 18 gauge doors - Office/Entry Leverset,Satin Brass Concave wait stop, Satin Brass r - Smoke Seal/Gasketing, 17' r r r \common\Budget-Inn\Post CD\Revised CD-Combined Phase 1&2\Specs.&ScheduleMudget Inn-Door Schedule-Combined Phases-Revised-Nov 112005 11/15/05 r r MW 7. Connecting Room Doors: . - Solid Core 3 Ply Pre-finished RUSTIC Doors Prepped for cylinder locks and hinges - 16 gauge Hollow Metal Frame Pressure Sensitive Door Seal Concave wall stop,Satin Brass . - Connecting Room Leverset,Satin Brass Thumb Turn Deadbolt,Blank Plate Outside Satin Brass • - Smoke Seal-CS-Cap sweep door bottom with#AMU(Allowance and Means Undercut)- Manufactured by Door&Hardware Systems Inc. 8. Guest Room Closet Doors: Solid Core 3 Ply Pre-finished RUSTIC Doors - Prepped for fixed handle sets 16 gauge Hollow Metal Frame Pressure Sensitive Door Seal . - Concave wall stop, Satin Brass . 9. Exterior Guest Entry Doors at Rear Units: - Insulated - Exterior Grade Solid Core 3 Ply Pre-finished RUSTIC Doors . _ Prepped for electric locks,hinges,and viewers Door closer, barrier free,delayed action aluminum finish - Door Guard Threshold/Weather Sealed Concave wall stop, Satin Brass Kick plate 8"x 34" - Exit Devices Hardware 10. Exterior Doors at Front Units Infill(Aluminum): 1"diameter Aluminum pulls w/10"centers-ADA Compliant. Door Closure-Concealed - Hinges-Butt-Electric Locks Seal,Threshold - Co-ordinate to Aluminum Door Hardware Section 11. Men and Women Public Restrooms: - Solid Core 3 Ply Pre-finished RUSTIC Doors Prepped for hinges. - 16 gauge Hollow Metal Frame Door closer, barrier free,delayed action,gold finish. - 3.5"x 15"Pull Plate,US4 finish Kick Plate 8"x 34"Brass Tone Aluminum Push Plate - Smoke Seal/Gasketing, 17' r - Concave wall stop,Satin Brass r r r r r r r r r r r r \common\Budget-1nn\Post CD\Revised CD-Combined Phase 1&2\Specs.&Schedules\Budget Inn-Door Schedule-Combined Phases-Revised-Nov 112005 11/15/05 r r 8A.06 WINDOWS: Windows shall be the following sizes and types: See window schedule sheet and plans: Shall be as manufactured by: . Bonneville Windows and Doors; 274 Duchesnay Street, P.O. Box 1000; Ste-Marie de Beauce(Quebec);G6E 3C2; Contact: Brian Sicard, 802-238-3750(cell), 802-893-6595(phone). United States,20B Deer Park Drive, East Longmeadow,MA 01028, 1-800-854-9504. • Or local sales support representative: Dan Fulmer 858—3980(cell). rWindow units shall be supplied with frame and sash members that are fabricated . of rigid 100%virgin UPVC extrusions—to meet AAMA 303. Wintech Series 3000-2%"frame commercial vinyl windows with fusion welded sash and frame . comers for added strength. . Reinforced members shall be aluminum,zinc plated steel to ASTM B 63. Hardware shall consist of lock and keeper;painted cast zinc sweep lock and keeper. Sash release tilt mechanisms shall be high impact nylon housing and latch units. Tilt pivot bar;zinc plated steel with high strength and rigidity. Fasteners:stainless steel flat,hexagon,pan or oval head screws. Stainless steel tamper proof tri-wing screws. Weather stripping—silicone—treated pile with a polypropylene center finish to AAMA—701. Balance systems—Aluma—tilt spiral balances;block and tackle balances. r Screens;Aluminum alloy 6063—T5 frame half or full screens with aluminum . mesh or fiberglass mesh. Glazing:marine glazed. r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r Budget-lnnlCDIPhase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 59 BUDGET INN Phase 2 Abi WINDOW SCHEDULE Tag. Manuf. Location/ Size R.O. Type Remarks Model#/ No. Quantities (W X H) Architect Series Bonneville 32 21 1/8"x 51 3/4" PVC Fixed Casement No Hardware(Fixed) #1546 (No Equal) Front Units (V-91/8"x 4'-3 3/4") Gold Line Series VCS1 2nd Floor FB Bonneville 16 32 7/8"x 51 3/4" PVC Casement Egress Window #2746 (No Equal) Front Units (2'-8 7/8"x 4'-3 3/4") Gold Line Series VCS1 2nd Floor Bonneville 4 21 1/8"x24 114" PVC Casement #1518 (No Equal) Rear Units (1'-9 1/8"x 2'-0 1/4") Gold Line Series VCS1 1 1st Floor D Bonneville 2 29"x 47 7/8" PVC Casement #2342 (No Equal) Rear Units (2'-5"x 3'-11 7/8") Gold Line Series VCS1 Stair Tower E Bonneville 8 21 1/8"x 47 7/8" PVC Casement #1542 (No Equal) Rear Units (1'-9 1/8"x 3'-11 7/8") Gold Line Series VCS1 2nd Floor F Bonneville 4 48 5/8"x 47 7/8" PVC Fixed Awning No Hardware(Fixed) #4342 (No Equal) Rear Units (4'-0 5/8"x 3'-11 7/8") Gold Line Series VAS 2nd Floor G Bonneville 8 22 5/8"x 49 7/8" PVC Single Hung #1621 (No Equal) Rear Units (1'-10 5/8"x 4'-1 7/8") Gold Line Series VHE1 2nd Floor H Bonneville 4 48 5/8"x 49 7/8" PVC Fixed Awning No Hardware(Fixed) Custom (No Equal) Rear Units (4'-0 5/8"x N-1 7/8") Gold Line Custom Height Series VCS1 2nd Floor (Custom Height) Window Notes: • 1.All interior&exterior trim shall be furnished&installed by general contractor. 2.All units shall have jamb extenders as required for total installation. 3.Windows shall be delivered to site by Window manufacturer. 4.Windows shall be Dbl insulated glazing Clear Low—E-5/8"with argon. 5. Simulated Divided Lite in window configuration as shown on drawings;w/painted spacer,or aluminum finish—verify with Architect. 6. Half white screens with white hardware. Abbreviations: R.O. = Rough Opening SDL = Simulated Divided Lite W = Width H = Height NA = Not Applicable sq.ft = Square Feet \common\Budget-Inn\CD\Phase 2\Specs.&Schedules 8/23/05 1 Job Site Address: Budget Inn —931 NYS, Route 9, Queensbury, New York, 12804 Owner: Shaki Bhatti , Date: November 11, 2005 Application No.: File No.: Window— Light I Vent— Schedule Tag. Window Window Model/ Unit or Rough Rough SQ.FT. SQ.FT. SQ.FT. Clear Clear Special Hardware or No. Manufacturer Type Stock Opening Opening Glass/ Egress/ Opening Opening Instructions Name Number Width Height Visible Vent Clear Width in Height in Light Opening Inches Inches Enlar ed infill Plans Phase 1 A Bonneville PVC Single 3627 T-6 5/8" 5'-1 7/8" 13.75 6.22 6.22 36 3/4" 24 3/8" Fi X�d Hung Gold B Bonneville PVC Single 1627 1'-10 5'-1 7/8" 6.19 2.84 2.84 16 3/4" 24 3/8" Hung Gold 5/8" C Bonneville PVC Single 3227 T-2 5/8" 5'-1 7/8" 12.26 5.54 5.54 32 3/4" 24 3/8" Hung Gold Second Floor Addition Phase 2 A Bonneville PVC Casement 1546 V-9 1/8" 4'-3 3/4" 4.25 3.07 3.06 9 5/8" 45 3/4" Gold B Bonneville PVC Casement 2746 2'-8 7/8" 4'-3 3/4" 8.00 6.82 7.43 21 1/2" 45 3/4" Egress Window Gold C Bonneville PVC Casement 1518 V-9 1/4" 2'-0 114" 1.63 1.22 1.48 9 5/8" 22 1./8" Gold D Bonneville PVC Casement 2342 2'-5" T-11 7/8" 6.13 5.09 5.56 17 1/2" 45 3/4" Gold E Bonneville PVC Casement 1542 V-9 1/8" T-11 7/8" 3.88 2.80 2.80 9 5/8" 41 7/8" Gold F Bonneville PVC Awning 4342 4'-0 5/8" T-11 7/8" 11.63 NA NA NA NA Fixed Fixed Gold Fixed Fixed Fixed G Bonneville PVC Single 1621 1'-10 4'-1 7/8" 4.83 2.14 2.37 16 3/4' 20 3/8" Hung Gold 5/8" H Bonneville PVC Awning Custom 4'-0 5/8" 4'-1 7/8" Custom NA NA NA NA Fixed Fixed Gold Fixed I Fixed Fixed \\Sda1\common\Budget-Inn\Post CD\Revised CD-Combined Phase 1 &2\Revised Specs.&Schedules\Budget Inn-Combined Phases-Window-Light-Vent Schedule.DOC i t Job Site Address: Budget inn-931 NYS, Route 9, Queensbury, New York, 12804 Owner: Shaki Bhatti Date: November 11, 2005 * Application No.: File No.: Building Permit-Calculation Sheet Room /Space Natural Light, Ventilation and Egress Information Habitable Area of Req. light Actual light Req.vent Actual Sq.ft. Remarks Room room in (8%of sq.footage (4%of vent sq. opening for square ft room) room) footage egress First Floor-Enlarged Infill Plans(Phase 1) Lobby/Recp. 601 48.08 80 24.04 38 Use of dr. ADA Room 172 13.76 32 6.88 11.38 Use of dr. Manager's 166 13.28 32 6.64 11.38 Use of dr. Room Use of dr. Second Floor-Enlarged Infill Plans(Phase 1) Guest Room 183 14.64 24.56 7.34 12.28 5.54 " . 95.8 7.66 3.83 5.61 . Guest Room 165 13.2 24.56 6.6 12.28 5.54" 95.8 7.66 3.83 5.61 Guest Room 214 17.12 24.56 8.56 12.28 5.54" 165.54 13.24 6.62 5.61 Guest Room 214 17.12 24.56 8.56 12.28 5.54" 165.54 13.24 6.62 5.61 not required-due to building being spdnklered *" Please reference attached"hand mark-up floor plan-they reflect fair calculations of the floor areas-designated to the habitable room use-other areas are used as circulation/corridor functions and therefore do not constitute calculation as such. Second Floor-Second Floor Addition(Phase 2) Typical 202 16.16 16.5 9.84 12.96 7.43 (2)A-windows R Front Units (1) B-window Guest Room Typical 281 22.48 29.05 11.24 29.38 NA (2) E-windows Rear Units (2)G-windows Guest Room (1) F-window 1 H-window 1 HSda1\common\Budget-Inn\Post CD\Revised CD-Combined Phase 1 &21Revised Specs.&Schedules\Budget 1 Inn-Combined Phases-revised-natural-light-vent-Schedule.DOC ar Room / Space Natural Light, Ventilation and Egress Information Habitable Area of Req. light Actual light Req.vent Actual Sq.ft. Remarks Room room in (8%of sq.footage (4%of vent sq. opening for • square ft room) room) footage egress First Floor Lobby/Recp. 601 48.08 80 24.04 38 Use of dr. ADA Room 172 13.76 32 6.88 11.38 Use of dr. Manager's 166 13.28 32 6.64 11.38 Use of dr. Room Use of dr. . Second Floor Guest Room 183 14.64 24.56 7.34 12.28 5.54 " 95.8 7.66 3.83 5.61 Guest Room 165 13.2 24.56 6.6 12.28 5.54 95.8 7.66 3.83 5.61 Guest Room 214 17.12 24.56 8.56 12.28 5.54 165.54 13.24 6.62 5.61 Guest Room 214 17.12 24.56 8.56 12.28 165.54 13.24 6.62 5.61 not required-due to building being sprinklered *" Please reference attached"hand mark-up floor plan-they reflect fair calculations of the floor areas- designated to the habitable room use-other areas are used as circulation/corridor functions and therefore do not constitute calculation as such. r r r r Dufour/CD/CORR/Window-ligh-vent-Schedule.doc 11/15/2005 1 r r 8A.07 GLASS: All glass shall have a minimum five-year guarantee against defects or seal • failure. All glazing work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the kinds of materials furnished and the kind of installation. Provide all required accessories foe a complete installation of glass including glazing beads and gaskets,which meet manufacturer's approval.Absolutely no metal/glass contact is to occur either during or after installation.Setting blocks used to support the insulating glass must be of sufficient width and positioned to support both lites of the units. Warranty for wind velocity protection shall be provided and deemed acceptable to Architect and Owner prior to fabrication. 8A.08 MIRRORS: All mirrors shall be 1/4"thick,Type 1,class 1,quality Q-2,with a uniform coating of silver protected by a film of electrolytically deposited copper on non-metallic paint coating with all edges sealed. Shall be installed with"Palmer Mirro-Mastic as manufactured by palmer products Corporation,Louisville,Kentucky,40207;or an acceptable equal. Mastic shall be applied to rear of mirror minimum 3"to edge of mirror,use holding dips at base,unless otherwise directed. All mirrors shall be frameless,(unless otherwise noted),type applied with mirror manufacturer's recommended adhesive.Provide concealed steel support angles where mirrors are unsupported by cabinetry. Mirror shall be located all bathrooms.All dimensions shall be field verified prior to ordering. M R Budget-InnICOlPhase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase l.doc 60 MW DIVISION 9 -FINISHES - SECTION 9A-MISCELLANEOUS FINISHES: Refer to Finish Schedule 9A.01 COUNTERTOP SURFACES: Granite at Reception Desk,all bathrooms, and breakfast bar area(Confirm with Owner). Color to be confirmed by Owner 9A.02 GYPSUM BOARD: All wallboard shall be in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.Gypsum board,fasteners,adhesive,joint treatment,miscellaneous accessories,etc.shall be as manufactured by United States Gypsum Company; 125 South Franklin Street, P.O. box 806278,Chicago, 11.60680-4124, (in Albany 518-458-7437); or equal. . Provide Water Resistant wallboard in all moisture prone areas;(such as bathrooms,laundry rooms at kitchen sink areas). Panels shall be either 1/2"or 5/8"with shallow tapered edges;finish green treated paper-suitable for tile, paint or wallpaper. . Provide"Durock"Cement Board for all areas indirect contact with moisture, (such as shower/bath bases-walls platforms and half walls.Available in 1/2" and 5/16" thickness-(furr out as required when need for alignment to other thickness'of wallboard.)Installation shall strictly adhere to SA-932 Durock Cement Board Systems manual or equal. Fire resistant wallboard(5/8"thick),shall comply with ASTM C 36 of types, edge configuration and thickness as indicated and meet the definition of a"Type X"gypsum board for fire rated assemblies in the Gypsum Association Fire Resistance Design Manual.Widths 4';lengths 8',9' 10',12'or 14'tapered edges SW or tapered;finish-natural face paper,suitable for painting.or other wall decoration material. Finishing system shall strictly adhere to the drywall manufacturers instructions consisting of a minimum 3-coat application of tape and spackle for a smooth even finish. Provide all required metal trim and accessories such as comer beads and No.200 casing beads.No metal"J"beads will be permitted. Skim Coating"Plastering"-shall be accomplished with"Sheetrock"All-purpose Joint Compound Ready-Mixed or"Sheetrock"Vinyl-Base Powder Joint Compounds or an approved equal.Used as a final coat finishing-texture as requested by the Owner.Adhere strictly to the manufactures'requirements- avoid areas of moisture. 9A.03 CARPET AND PAD: Carpet- To be movided by the Owner General Contractor shall not allow for carpet installers with less then two years of carpeting experience. All carpeting work shall conform to"Carpet Specifiers Handbook" by The Carpet and Rug Institute.All carpet shall be proved and delivered to the project site at least 5%overrun on calculated yardage—(this is a industry standard necessary for proper installation plus waste and usable scraps). General Contractor shall use"Venture's'Interweave'"brand carpets. Before ordering carpet provide all color samples to owner. Samples can be found at the Architect's office,or the General Contractor can contact: Harry Lentz Belknap-White-Alcco Commercial and Ceremic Division 800-283-7500 ext.614 800-882-8736 fax Budget-InnICDlPhase 11Specs. &ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 61 All new carpeting shall be delivered to the project site in protective wrapping,and stored inside,protected from the water,moister and soiling. Carpet installation shall make use of tackless carpet stripping,installation adhesive, Seaming Cement,Carpet Adhesive, Miscellaneous materials—shall be done strictly according to manufactures instructions. All substrate shall be clear,free from moisture,defects,sage,holes or damage to the finished under-laymen plane. All extended carpet,cut-outs,expansion joints,and installation of starch—in—tackless installation shall follow industry standards. Upon completing of new carpeting with padding—a"full"valuing of carpet,re-starching after 6 months of installation of finished carpet—to reset and insure no faults or"humping "have occurred. 9A.04 DROP CEILING TILE Determine acceptability of substrates and conditions under which acoustical ceiling systems are to be installed.Do not proceed until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.Commencement of installation constitutes Installer's acceptance of substrates and conditions. PREPARATION: A. Layout ceiling system in accordance with reflected ceiling plans(A-25A)and as acceptable to Architect. B. Surfaces to receive adhered file shall be free of oils,form residue,dust or any other substance that may be detrimental to proper tile adhesion.Prime surfaces to receive adhered tile and test moisture-bearing substrates pursuant to CISCA recommendations. C. Unless otherwise indicated,establish layout of acoustical ceiling units to balance border widths at opposite edges,with no units less than 1/2 width. COORDINATION: SCoordinate layout and installation with other work supported by,or penetrating through ceiling,including,as applicable,light fixtures, HVAC equipment,fire suppression system components,and partition systems. INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Prior to installation of acoustical ceiling units,open packages and allow product to stabilize to current environment. Provide all required accessories as necessary for a complete assembly system. STYLE AND COLOR: "Celotex"Brand Ceiling Tile or an Armstrong equal Tufcore 49-multi-finish-HUM 90 24"x 24"the Body Color=White Square Edge(Trim)Detail Refer to reflected ceiling plan(E-1)for specific locations and patterns. Contact:Carl A. Piccolo(BPB Celotex) 732-708-9214 r r r Budget-InnICDlPhase 11Specs.&Schedulesleudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doC 62 r r ■ 9A.05 CERAMIC TILE FINISH: All new ceramic tile work shall adhere strictly to the standards of ANSI A 108.5—for installed tile with dry-set Portland mortar or latex—Portland cement mortar.All installation shall adhere to manufacturePs instructions for mixing and installation of proprietary materials.All the grades shall comply with standard TCA 137.1. All glazed wall tile shall meet ANSI A 137.1 standards.All materials shall be provided for from one source—for each type and color of grout,tile and setting material.All materials shall be delivered and stored on site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use,in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.General Contractor shall insure that an extra supply—approx 2%of each tile remains in clean marked cartons for the Owner's emergency use. Mortar and grout—shall be a LATEXT modified Portland cement dry—stet mortar;ANSI A118.4. - shall be proprietary compound composed of Portland cement with latex additive for a more. flexible and less permeable grout. Grout color to be black from manufacturers standard.Insure product(latex additive)is compatible with latex additive in latex—Portland cement mortar. Acceptable manufacturer's: Latex Modified Floor Grout: L&M Surco Mfg.lnc. Laticrete Dry Bend;Laticrete International, Inc. ' Layouts: determine layouts of all accessories before tiling work begins. Layout tile cuts less then one—half tile in size.Locate file cuts in both walls and floors so as to be least conspicuous.Align all wall joints to give a straight uniform grout lines,plumb and level.All ' joints shall be the same width. Workmanship: follow manufacturer's instructions on preparing mixes.All out tiles shall be Geared and smooth before placement.Tiles at trim,accessories,around pipes,electric boxes and other built-in fixtures shall be placed to allow for escutcheons,plates and collars to completely overiap curt edges. Insure all tile work is free of grout film upon completion. Insure ail tile cut or drilled shall show no signs of scratching or marring. Upon completing of tile work—all file shall be`washed down"and dried with a soft cloth;no hazing shall be acceptable. No access or traffic will be allowed onto tile work for 3 days upon completion. Ceramic tile shower bases shall be provided with a constant waterproofing membrane system sloped to a drain. Acceotable Wall tiles in all Bathrooms(Confirm with Owner before final bid): "Huntington Tile Group"brand -Heritage Style -3"x 6"Horizontal Brickwork(see interior elevations) ' -Color-"Ice White"(G1II/M11) -Chair Rail Accent Color—"Burgundy"(G680) or "American Olean"brand -Greenwich Village Style -3"x 6"Horizontal Brickwork(see interior elevations) -Color—"Designer White" A -Chair Rail Accent Color—"Burgundy" Possible Contact: ' Harry Lentz Belknap-White-Alcco Commercial and Ceramic Division 800-283-7500 ext.614 800-882-8735fax 1 Budget-Inn1CDIPhase A$pecs.&SchedulesOudget Inn-Spedfication-Phase 1.doc 63 M M Finish Schedule— Budget Inn ROOM FLOOR WALL BASE CEILING NOTES M FLOOR 1 infill-Phase 1 LOBBY CERAMIC PAINTED GYPSUM TILE COVE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread Wall=B TILE BOARD BASE Flame Spread-Ceil.=B CERAMIC PAINTED GYPSUM TILE COVE Flame Spread Wall=B RECEPTION TILE BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread-Ceil.=B BREAKFAST CERAMIC PAINTED GYPSUM TILE COVE Flame Spread Wall=B ' AREA TILE BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread-Cell_=B ADA TOILET 1 Flame Spread-Wall=B ROOM CERAMIC PAINTED GYPSUM TILE COVE TILE BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread-Ceil.=B t CORRIDOR AT CERAMIC PAINTED GYPSUM TILE COVE Flame Spread Wall=B STAIR TILE BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread-Ceil.=B MANAGER'S CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE Flame Spread Wall=C ' ROOM PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread-Ceil.=C ADA ROOM CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM Flame Spread Wall=C VINYL COVE PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread-Ceil.=C ADA CERAMIC PAINTED GYPSUM TILE COVE Flame Spread Wall=C BATHROOM TILE BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread-Ceil.=C MANAGER'S CERAMIC PAINTED GYPSUM TILE COVE Flame Spread Wall=C BATHROOM TILE BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread-Ceil.=C Flame Spread Wall=B INTERIOR CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE Flame Spread-Ceil.=B STAIRWELL PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN PAINTED 1 1/2"DIA. PIPE HANDRAIL- 1 BOTH SIDES 10 1 FLOOR 1 0 new wing- hase 11 It STAIR TOWER Flame Spread Wall=B 1 and 2 CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE PAINTED GYP. BD. Flame Spread-Ceil.=B PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE PAINTED 1 1/2"DIA. PIPE HANDRAIL- It BOTH SIDES 10 STAIR TOWER VINYL PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE Flame Spread-Wall=C COMPOSITE PAINTED GYP. BD. Flame Spread-Ceil.=C STORAGE TILE(VCT) BOARD BASE 1 FLOOR 2 infill-Phase 1) TAI Flame Spread Wall=B S R HALL/ TAI R ALLDOR CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread—Ceil.=B PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE PAINTED 1 1/2"DIA. PIPE HANDRAIL- BOTH SIDES GUEST CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE Flame Spread Wall=C ROOMS(ALL) PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread—Ceil.=C BATHROOMS CERAMIC PAINTED GYPSUM TILE COVE Flame Spread Wall=C (ALL) TILE BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread—Ceil.=C FLOOR 2 M ( new 2ND flr. Addition.-Phase 11 HALL/ CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE Flame Spread Wall=B COORIDOR PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread—Cell.=B GUEST Painted Gypsum Flame Spread Wall=C ROOMS/ CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE Board Flame Spread—Ceil.=C CLOSETS PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE (SEE RCP PLAN (ALL) BATHROOMS CERAMIC PAINTED GYPSUM TILE COVE Flame Spread Wall=C (ALL) TILE BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread—Ceil.=C STAIR TOWERS/ CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE Flame Spread Wall=B LINEN PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread—Ceil.=B STORAGE NEW BASEMENT M infill-Phase I ) Flame Spread Wall=C BASEMENT] SEALED Flame Spread—Ceil.=C LAUNDRY CONCRETE CONCRETE N.A. SEE RCP PLAN PROVIDE WASHER BASE PAN WITH DRAIN- VERIFY WITH OWNER Flame Spread Wall=C SEALED BASEMENT CONCRETE CONCRETE N.A. SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread—Ceil. =C ND FLOOR 2 ( new 2 fir.Addition.-Phase II—REAR UNIT) STAIR CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE Flame Spread Wall=B TOWERS PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread—Ceil.=B P 10 I 10 IP r r GUEST ROOMS/ CARPET W/ PAINTED GYPSUM VINYL COVE Painted Gypsum Flame Spread Wall=C CLOSETS PAD(28 Oz.) BOARD BASE Board Flame Spread-Cell.=C (ALL) (SEE RCP PLAN r BATHROOMS CERAMIC PAINTED GYPSUM TILE COVE Flame Spread Wall=C (ALL) TILE BOARD BASE SEE RCP PLAN Flame Spread-Cell.=C r **Finish notes: Vinyl Walkovering if selected by Owner shall be Type II, 20 oz.-Class A. r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 1 ` DIVISION 9B FINISHES - SECTION 9B STAINING AND PAINTING 9B.01 GENERAL: All surfaces shall be clean and free of dirt or grease prior to applying finishes. Prior to applying paint and/or stain fill in all cracks, nail holes,open joints,etc. with putty or wood filler.Sand all surfaces smooth that are to be painted including filled surfaces. Shellac all knots in wood prior to finishing. Use paint and/or stain on surfaces for the purposes recommended by the manufacturer.All materials shall be applied evenly to prevent runs,sags and/or other defects. Furnish and lay drop cloths as necessary to protect adjacent work,finishes,or equipment. Remove all excess paint or stain from items not to be finished. No painting or staining shall be started until all of the colors have been selected. All prime colors shall be properly pigmented to receive the final color coats. All colors shall be selected by the Owner unless noted otherwise.Verify the specified glosses with the Owner prior to execution of the work. All finishing shall occur in areas of new work and patching only unless noted otherwise. All paint materials and equipment shall be compatible in use.Paint shall be as manufactured by Sherwood-Williams, Benjamin Moore,or Pittsburgh. Stains shall be as manufactured by Cabots. All products shall be delivered to the site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. 913.02 INTERIOR PAINTING: Walls (Bathrooms and kitchen), 2 prime coat . 1 finish coats alkyd semi-gloss enamel-color to be selected. Walls, 1 prime coat 2 finish coat latex flat-color to be selected by Owner Ceilings, 1 prime coat 2 finish coat latex flat-white SDoor Frames, 1 prime coat 2 finish coat,alkyd semi-gloss enamel.-color to be selected by owner. Color to be Determined by Owner after walls have been taped. 96.03 INTERIOR STAINING: Items to be Stained include- Cabinetry, Built-ins and shelving 2 coats-interior transparent stain Contractor to provide samples prior to selecting stain and performing work. 9B.04 EXTERIOR PAINTING: • Misc. metal items such as,vent stacks (vents,caps,ridge vents shall be furnished prefinished). 1 prime coat and 1 finish coat shall be applied. Galvanized material-1 prime coat-13201 white metal primer Nongalvanized material-1 prime coat-41821 red lead primer. ` Budget-Inn1CWIPhase 11Specs.8 Schedules%Budget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 64 1 DIVISION 10-MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10A.01 TOILET ACCESSORIES:(Allowance) 1 Toilet accessories shall be included in an allowance amount for materials only. see Division 1).The cost of installation of the accessories shall be included in the Base Bid. DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT r SECTION 11A-MISC.EQUIPMENT 11A.01 APPLIANCES: The following appliances shall be furnished by the owner and installed/ coordinated by the General Contractor. Refrigerators(one per suite and one at coffee/seating) Microwaves(one at each suite-above refrigerator and one at coffee/seating) SIce Machines(one per floor) Washers and Dryers-at Basement. Dryer Units shall be shall be gas.General Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Owner for all electrical/gas hook-up locations/as requirement. See engineering drawings and specifications. The General Contractor shall provide all required electrical,plumbing and vent . connections including related accessories. 11A.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS: • Fire extinguisher cabinets—shall be furnished and installed as noted on the drawings—minimum(3)units. One at each floor and one at basement. Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be as manufactured by Larson's Manufacturing; www.larsensmfg.com. (Unless noted otherwise). Shall be unit model numbers Vertical Duo—recessed—model 2409-R2 with trim istyle—rec.5/16.Glass shall be tempered safety glass—Bronze. Budget-Inn1CDV'hase 11Specs.&ScheduleslBudget Inn-Specification-Phase 1.doc 65 SECTION- SCOPE OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work under this title, on drawings or specified, is subject to the architectural general and special contract conditions for the entire project, and the contractor for this portion of the work is required to refer especially thereto, and to the architectural drawings. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK The following is a general listing of work items to be provided under this Contract. Work indicated is not necessarily all-inclusive, nor shall it limit the extent of the work or exclude any work shown or specified and not listed. This Contractor shall refer to Division 1 for additional scope items required by Contract including but not limited to the listed as"Summary of Work Multiple Prime Contracts"for Scope of Work Summary by Contract". Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment and labor to make following complete installations: A. Temporary water as required. B. Cutting and patching as required to accomplish the work indicated including painting finish work. C. Complete hot water, hot water return, tempered water, and cold water distribution systems as indicated on plans for all new plumbing fixtures and equipment. D. Complete sanitary drainage and vent piping as indicated on plans for all new plumbing fixtures and equipment to 5-0"outside the building. E. Complete natural gas piping as indicated on plans for all gas fired equipment to 5-0" outside the building. F. Complete wet pipe sprinkler system as indicated on plans to 5-0"outside the building. G. Furnishing and installing of plumbing fixtures, equipment and specialties. H. Insulation and Identification of piping and valves as required by the specifications but not limited to pipe identification and valve identification for all systems. 1. Sleeves and plates including fire stop material. J. Testing, start-up and balancing of all plumbing installations to include domestic hot water, domestic cold water, and domestic hot water return systems. Balancing work shall include rebalancing of all existing and new domestic hot water systems. K. Servicing of plumbing equipment installed as required during guarantee period for a minimum of one year after owners acceptance. L. Provide competent factory-trained personnel at site for the purpose of instructing Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of all new plumbing equipment. M. Preparation and submission of coordination drawings to include coordination with all trades involved in the renovated and new work areas. N. All work as shown and indicated on P drawings and as specified in Division 15. i SECTION-BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following basic materials and methods to complement other Division 15 Sections. 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Concrete equipment base construction requirements. 3. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 4. Labeling and identifying plumbing systems and equipment is specified in Division r 15 Section"Plumbing Identification". 5. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations. �1 6. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 7. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections. 8. Plumbing demolition. 9. Cutting and patching. 10. Touch-up painting and finishing. B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceiling, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels. C. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished • occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. D. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. 1.03 DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION A. Dimensional information used for layout and locations shall be taken from architectural or structural drawings used by the construction trades. B. Plumbing drawings are diagrammatic and have no dimensional significance. Do not scale. • Locations of equipment and piping are to be as: 1. Shown on Architectural drawings; 2. Directed in the field; 3. Required for proper connection of equipment to be served; 4. Required for proper symmetry in the space involved; 5. With deviations made only with specific approval of Architect C. Division 15 shall review the drawings of other divisions, exchange shop drawings with them, cooperate in the preparation or prepare space layouts as required, to avoid conflicts and interferences with the installation of other trades in advanced stages of construction. D. Contractor shall field verify all existing conditions prior to installation of equipment and material. It is recommended that the contractor verify all existing conditions prior to submitting a proposal. Lack of field verification does not constitute a basis for additional • monies during construction.Contractor assumes full responsibility for completeness of installation including coordination of work with other trades. 1.04 SUB MITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. . B. Product data for the following piping specialties: 1. Mechanical sleeve seals. C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for plumbing materials and equipment. D. Welder certificates signed by(Sub)Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under"Quality Assurance"Article of this Section. E. If substitutions are proposed after the bids are received, the Contractor shall state the amount of credit to the Owner for substitution. Substitutions that are considered equal by the contractor and carried in bid without approval by the Engineer shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Engineer and/or Owner shall not be made liable or . responsible for losses incurred by the Contractor,due to the rejection of said items for installation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS CI.I "Structural Welding Code-Steel". B. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME"Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,"Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications". �i 1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series"Code for Pressure Piping". 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.06 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Check Division 15P drawings with all others. B. Anticipate and avoid interferences with all other trades. C. Take particular care to coordinate all piping, ductwork, plumbing and major electrical components above ceiling, to prevent conflict. Remove and relocate work as may be made necessary by such conflict, at no extra cost to the owner. The use of coordination drawings is recommended but may not be required(refer to Division 1 for additional requirements). Lack of coordination drawings assumes the contractor has verified and coordinated all work associated with installation. D. Obtain decision for approval from project engineer for proposed group installation before • proceeding, and for clearance in structure and finish of the building. E. Running pipe over electrical equipment and elevator machine rooms is prohibited. ' 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. i C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. . 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate plumbing equipment installation with other building components. . B. Arrange for chases, slots, and opening in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in- place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of plumbing materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate connection of electrical services. F. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where plumbing items requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces.Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section"Access Doors". H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completion of covering and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installations of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. • PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipefittings. 2.02 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 for special joining . materials not listed below. B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents. . 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1-8-inch maximum thickness, except where thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges. • 2. ASME B 16.20 for grooved, ring joint, steel flanges. 3. AWWA Cl 10, rubber, flat face, 1/8-inch thick, except where other thickness is indicated; and full-face or ring type, except where type is indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is i indicated. D. Plastic Pipe Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated. E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32. 1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin(approximately 95 percent)and silver (approximately 5 percent), having 0.10 percent lead content. 2. Alloy Sn50: Tin(50 percent)and lead(50 percent). Drainage, Waste&Vent (DWV)copper only. 3. Alloy E: Tin (approximately 95 percent)and copper(approximately 5 percent), having 0.10 percent maximum lead content.. 4. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-zinc, having 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 5.Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-nickel, having 0.10 percent maximum lead content. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. . G. Flanged, Ductile-lion Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts:AWWA C 110, rubber gasket, carbon steel bolts and nuts. H. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of plain- end, pressure pipes. 1. Sleeve:ASTM A 126. Class B, gray iron. 2. Followers:ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA Clii. 5. Finish: Enamel paint • 2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type,where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. Inside Diameter. Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping. 2. Outside Diameter. Completely cover opening. 3. Cast Brass: One-piece,with set-screw. . a. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 4. Stamped Steel: One-piece,with set-screw and chrome-plated finish. B. Dielectric Fittings:Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials. 2. Insulating Material:Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.temperature. 4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated,companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 4. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full- face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining,with threaded ends and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. temperature. 1 7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining,with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300 psig working pressure at 225 deg F. temperature. C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular,watertight, mechanical type. Components include interlocking synthetic links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and . sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened. • D. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: i . 1. Steel Sheet Metal:24 gage or heavier, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welding longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Pipe:ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, • having plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified. . 4. Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, . and pipe sleeve, with 1 mechanical joint end conforming to AWWA 010 and 1 plain pipe- sleeve end. a. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage. b. Housing: Ductile-iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring,with ductile-iron gland, steel studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA Clii, of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe. C. Pipe Sleeve:AWWA C151, ductile-iron pipe. d. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene, push-on type, of • manufacturer's design. • 2.04 GROUT . A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout:ASTM C 1107, Grade B. • 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged. • PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS-COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system. B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings(plans, schematics, and diagrams) • indicate general locations and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, • and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to • layout are approved on coordination drawings. C. Install piping at indicated slope. D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating • pressure. E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and • service areas. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. i G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated. I H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams,joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. I Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. ' 1. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation. J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions. M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wallboard partitions,and suspended ceilings according to the following: 1 1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast-brass, one-piece,with set-screws, and polished chrome- plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons where required, for existing piping. ' 2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with set-screw. 3. Uninsuiated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. 4. Insulated Piping: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish. 5.Piping in Utility Areas: Cast-brass or stamped-steel,with set-screw or spring clips. r N. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. ' 0. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic(removable)sleeves. ' P. Install sleeves for piping passing through concrete and masonry walls,concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated. Q. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified. _ 2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. 3. Install large enough sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches. 4. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Flashing is specified in Division 7 . Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal". 5. Except for below-grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulations, using elastomeric joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". . R. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches. 2. Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 inches and larger. 3. Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions. S. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. I. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install ductile-iron wall penetration system sleeves according to manufacturer's printed installation instructions. U. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material. Firestopping materials are specified in Division 7 Section"Firestopping". I I V. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. W. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing requirements. X. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping system specification Sections. 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. ` 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS"Soldering Manual,"Chapter ' 22"The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." 4. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B ` 1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Join pipef+ttings and valves as follows: ' a. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads(except where dry seal threading is specified) C. Align threads at point of assembly / d. Tighten joints with wrench.Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. ' 5. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12"Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe"using qualified 1 processes and welding operators according to the`Quality Assurance"Article. 6. Flanged Joints:Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench. Y. Piping Connections; Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below: M 1. Install unions in piping 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having 2 inches or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at r final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3. Dry Piping Systems(Gas, Compressed Air, and Vacuum): Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 5. Wet Piping Systems(Water): Install dielectric couplings and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 1 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION-COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom,where mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Contractor assumes full responsibility for any and all items furnished and installed without written approval by the Architect or Engineer. Under no circumstances will a change order be approved for work installed that was not approved by the Architect or Engineer. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems i and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated. D. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement . of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,with minimum of interference with other installations. E. Install equipment-giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.03 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Refer to Division 9 Section"Painting"for field painting requirements. B. Damage and Touch-Up: Repair marred and damaged factory painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. • 3.04 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and be locations. Use 3000 psi,28-day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section"Cast-In-Place • Concrete." 3.05 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment,and . elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel." 3.06 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place wood ground, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.07 GROUTING A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for plumbing equipment base baring surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. i C. Provide forms for placement of grout, as required. D. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. SECTION -VALVES l PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections. ' 2. Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15 Section"Plumbing Identification." 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. ' B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and ` temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and r arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application. ' C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section"Materials and Equipment,"under"Source Limitations" Paragraph. B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B3 1.1 for power piping. M C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MS S Standard Practice Documents referenced. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure to functional surfaces. . 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: . 1. Maintain valve end protection. . 2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Gate Valves: a. Hammond Valve Corporation. b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. C. NIBCO Inc. l d. Stockham Valve&Fittings, Inc. I 2, Ball Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.;Apollo Division. I b. NIBCOIric. ' C. Stockham Valves&Fittings, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Company. 3. Plug Valves: a. DeZurik Valve Company. b. Milliken Valve Company, Inc. c., Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. d. Rockwell Valves& Fittings, Inc. 3. Swing Check Valves: ' a. Hammond Valve Corporation. b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. C. NIBCO Inc. ` d. Stockham Valves&Fittings, Inc. 4. Calibrated Balancing Valves: t a. Amtrol, Inc. ' b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. C. Bell&Gossett Div., ITT Fluid Technology Corp. 2.02 BASIC COMMON FEATURES A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems,except as specified below. 1. Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising r stems. 1 B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings:As indicated in the"Application Schedule"of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures. C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. D. Operators: Use specified operators and hand wheels,except provide the following special operator features: 1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Owner with I wrench for every 10-plug valves. . E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation. F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections. G. Threads:ASMEB1.20.1. 1 ' H. Flanges: ASME B 16.1 for cast iron,ASME B 16.5 for steel, and ASME B 16.24 for bronze valves. ' I. Solder Joint: ASMEB16.18. 1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 8400 F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 4210 F for ball valves. 2.03 GATE VALVES A. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi cold working pressure(CWP), or Class 150, 300-psi CWP;ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and bonnet, i solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable iron handwheel. B. Gate Valves, 3 inches and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125,200-psi CWP,ASTM A 126 . cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem,outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel. Provide UL-listed valves meeting the above . for fire protection systems_ 2.04 BALL VALVES A. Ball Valves,4 inches and Smaller: MSS SPA 10, Class 150, 600-psi CWP,ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction;chrome-plated brass ball, full port; . threaded or soldered end connections: 1. Operator:Vinyl-covered steel lever handle. 2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping. 3. Memory Stop: For operator handles. • 2.05 CHECK VALVES A. Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 175-psi(1200kPa)CWP,ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and • bonnet, cast-iron plug, Buna N,Vinton, or Teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections: Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves. 2.06 CHECK VALVES A. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller. MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, or . Class 150, 300-psi CWP; horizontal swing,Y-pattem,ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections. 2.07 BALANCING VALVES . A. Balancing Valves 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze body, brass ball construction, TFE seat ring packing, differential pressure readout ports, straight pattern,globe type for throttling, tamper-proof"memory"stop with drain-purge port. 200 psig design pressure for sweat connection, 300 psig design pressure for threaded end connections. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION • A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until satisfactory • conditions have been corrected. B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special s • D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper . size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage. . F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.02 INSTALLATION . A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. • C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation. . H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. 3.03 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS S A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths. B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a ! bright finish. Clean valve socket. C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube. • D. Open gate and glove valves to fully open position. E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs. F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate i tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux. G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until it . completely fills the joint around tube.Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts . cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush. 3.04 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve. B. Align threads at point of assembly. C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is specified. D. Assemble joints,wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the Pe i is being threaded. pipe s • I 1 ' 3.05 FLANGED CONNECTIONS A. Align flange surfaces parallel. ` B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench. C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper ' shutoff and retention. 3.06 VALVE END SELECTION A. Select valves with the following ends Or types of pipe/tube connections: 1. Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Solder ends ball valves for domestic water systems and gate valves for fire protection systems. 2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end. 3. Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches and Larger: Grooved end or flanged. 3.07 APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly . for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements. B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types: . 1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system. 2. Bail Valve: Class 150, 600-psi CWP,with stem extension. • 3. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125,with rubber seat. • 5. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated. • 3.08 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists. 3.09 VALVE SCHEDULE Gate Valves-2 Inch and Smaller. THREADED SOLDER MANUFACTURER NRS RS NRS RS Hammond 1B645 113640 113647 16635 Milwaukee 105 148 115 1149 NJBCO T113 Till S113 Sill Stockham B-103 B-100 B-104 B-108 Gate Valves-2-1/2 Inch and Larger(Domestic Water): MANUFACTURER OS&Y RS NRS Hammond IR1 140 1 R1138 Milwaukee F-2885 F-2882 NIBCO 617-OF-619 Stockham G-623 G-612 Bail Valves-4 Inches and Smaller. THREADED SOLDER MANUFACTURER ENDS ENDS Conbraco(Apollo) 77-100 77-200 Hammond 8301 8311 NIBCO T-585-70 S-585-70 . Watts B-6080 B-6081 Plug Valves-2 Inches and Smaller: 10 0 r 1 ' MANUFACTURER ` DeZurik 425 Milwaukee BB-100 Milliken 1 70M Plug Valves-2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MANUFACTURER Milliken 171 M Rockwell 143 Swing Check Valves-2 Inches and Smaller: CLASS 125 CLASS 150 THREADED SOLDER THREADED MANUFACTURER ENDS ENDS ENDS Hammond 1 B940 1 B941 ff3946 Milwaukee 509 1509 510 1 N1BCO T-413 S-413 T-433 Stockham B-319 B-309 B-321 For grooved connections, use Victaulic Series 712. Swing Check Valves-2-1/2 Inches and Larger(Domestic Water): MANUFACTURER CLASS 125 CLASS 175 Hammond 1 R1124 x Milwaukee F2974 x NIBCO F-918 x Stockham G-931 G-940 For grooved connections, use Victaulic Series 712. x means not available. . SECTION-METERS AND GAGES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY . A. This Section includes meters and gages used in plumbing systems. B. Related Sections:The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: . 1. Meters and gages furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified . as part of the equipment assembly in other Division 15 Sections. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of meter, gage, and fitting specified. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves, certified where indicated. Submit meter and . gage schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and gage. C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies r 1 i i under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements. 1 D. Maintenance data to include in the"Operating and Maintenance Manuals"specified in i Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." Include data for the following: ' 1. Test plugs. 1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable portions of American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME) and Instrument Society of America(ISA)standards pertaining to construction and installation of meters and gages. ' B. Design Criteria: The Drawings indicate types, sizes, capacities, ranges, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of meters and gages and are based on the ' specific manufacturer types and models indicated. Meters and gages having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered, provided that deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof for equality of meters and gages is on the proposer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Liquid-In-Glass Thermometers: a. Marsh Instrument Co. r b. H.O. Trerice Co. C. Weiss Instruments, Inc. d. Weksler Instruments Corp. 2. Thermometer Wells: Same as for thermometers. 3. Pressure Gages: a. Marsh Instrument Co. b.. HO. Trerice Co. C. Weiss Instruments, Inc. d. Weksler Instruments Corp. 4. Pressure Gage Accessories: Same as for pressure gages. 5. Test Plugs: . a. Flow Design, Inc. b. MG Piping Products Co. C. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. d. Sisco Co., Spedco, Inc. e. H.O. Trerice Co. f. Watts Regulator Co. • 2.02 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows: 1. Domestic Hot Water:30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions(0 to 115 deg . C, with 1-degree scale divisions). 2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F,with 2-degree scale divisions(minus 18 to 38 deg C,with 1-degree scale divisions). • B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span. 2.03 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Description:ASTM El, liquid-in-glass thermometer. . B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring 1 i / secured, 9 inches long. 1 C. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 36- / degree adjustment in horizontal plane,with locking device. D. Tube: Red reading, organic liquid-filled(no mercury), with magnifying lens. ' E. Scale: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum,with permanently etched markings. F. Stem: Copper-plated, steel, aluminum, or brass for a separable socket of length to suit installation. r 2.04 THERMOMETER WELLS A. Description: Brass or stainless steel thermometer well. ' B. Pressure Rating: Not less than piping system design pressure. C. Stem Length: To 2 inches into fluid. D. Stem Length: To extend to center of pipe. E. Extension for Insulated Piping: 2 inches nominal, but not less than thickness of insulation. F. Threaded Cap Nut: With chain permanently fastened to well and cap. 2.05 PRESSURE GAGES A. Description:ASME B40.1, Grade A, phosphor-bronze Bourdon-tube pressure gage,with bottom connection. B. Case: Drawn steel, brass or aluminum,with 4-1/2 inch diameter glass lens. C. Connector. Brass, 1/4-inch NPS. D. Scale:White coated aluminum,with permanently etched markings. r E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span. . F. Range: Conform to the following: . 1. Water: 0-160 psi. . 2. Fire: 0-300 psi. . 2.06 PRESSURE GAGE ACCESSORIES . A. Snubber: 1/4 inch NPS brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous metal disc of material suitable for fluid served and rated pressure. 2.07 TEST PLUGS A. Description: Nickel-plated brass body test plug in 1/2 inch NPS fitting. . B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation. C. Pressure Rating: 500 psig minimum. D. Core Inserts:2 self-sealing valve-types, suitable for inserting a 1/8 inch outside diameter probe from a dial thermometer or pressure gage. E. Core Material:According to the following for fluid and temperature range: . 1. Air,Water, Oil, and Gas, 20 to 200 degrees F. (minus 7 to 93 degrees C), 1 1 neoprene rubber. 1 2. Air and Water, minus 30 degrees to 275 degrees F(minus 35 to 136 degrees C), ethylene-propylene-dieneterpolymer(EPDM) rubber. F. Test Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap with retention chain. G. Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 1 pressure gage, gage adapter with probe, 2 bimetal dial thermometers, and carrying case. H. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately 2 times systems operating conditions. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 METER AND GAGE APPLICATIONS A. General: Where indicated, install meters and gages of types, sizes, capacities, and with features indicated. 3.02 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for applications where used. 3.03 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. B. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At inlet and outlet of each hot water recirculation balancing station. 2. At inlet and outlet of each water heater. C. Thermometer Wells: Install in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. 1. Install wells with stem extending to center of pipe. 2. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure cap. 3.04 PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION A. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve located on pipe at most readable position. r B. Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 2. At building water service entrance. C. Pressure Gage Needle Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. 3.05 TEST PLUG INSTALLATION A. Install test plugs in piping tees where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap. 3.06 CONNECTIONS . A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties. . B. Install meters and gages adjacent to equipment to allow servicing and maintenance. 3.07 ADJUSTING ANI)CLEANING . A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation. r r r B. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. rr C. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's r touch-up paint. r r SECTION- PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION r PARTI-GENERAL r 1.01 SUMMARY r A. This Section includes plumbing identification materials and devices. r 1.02 SUBMITTAL S r A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 r Specifications Sections. r B. Product data for identification materials and devices including catalog sheets, r specifications and installation instructions for each item specified. r C. Valve Schedules: Submit valve schedules for each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as r shown on tag), location of valve(room or space), and variations for identification. Mark r valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Furnish extra copies(in addition to mounted copies)for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1 Section r "Project Closeout. r 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE r A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing r angles of identification devices. r 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completion of covering and painting r where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installation of r acoustical ceilings and similar concealment r PART 2-PRODUCTS r r 2.01 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS A. General: Products specified are manufacturer's standard products of categories and r types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections. Where r more than single type is specified for listed application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. r B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate permanently fastened to equipment and having r data engraved or stamped. r 1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data. r 2. Location:An accessible and visible location. r C. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Pressure sensitive adhesive backed type constructed r of vinyl with clear polyester coating, and integral flow arrows for applications where flow r arrow banding tape is not being used. r D. Pipes Smaller Than 6 Inches including insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 r degrees around pipe at each location. r r r i i i E. Pipes 6 Inches And Larger including insulation: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, i at least 3 times the letter height and of length required for label. i F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed terms,which best describe each piping i system, or as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance with name as specified. i G. Lettering: Use piping system terms as indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. i i 1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. i 2. Pipe Marker Legend and Color Field Sizes: i Length of Color i OD of Pipe or Insulation Letter Size Field (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) i 3/4 to 1-1/4 mcl. 1/2 8 i 1-1/2to2incl. 3/4 8 2-1/2to6incl. 1-1/4 12 i 8 to 10 md. 2-1/2 24 i Over 10 3-1/2 32 H. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, i vinyl tape, at least 3-mils thick. i 1. Width: 1-1/2-inches wide on pipes with outside diameters(including insulation) less than 6 inches;2-1/2-inches wide for larger pipes. i 2. Color: Comply with ASME Al 3.1, except where another color selection is i indicated. i 1. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch sequenced numbers. Provide a 5/32-inch hole for fastener. 1. Material: 19-gage polished brass. 2. Size: 1-1/2-inches diameter, except as otherwise indicated. J. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain, beaded chain, or S-hooks. K. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame,with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule, sized to fit 8-1/2xl 1 inches valve chart. 1. Frame: Extruded aluminum. 2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, 2.5 mm, single thickness, sheet glass. a. Type: Type I,flat transparent. b. Class: Class 1, clear. M C. Quality: Glazing B, for general applications. L. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs:ASTM D 709,Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic- resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white(letter color) melamine subcore, except when other colors are indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. . 1. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive. M. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in plumbing identification,with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of plumbing 1 1 systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same name are indicated, identify individual system number as well as service(such as Water Heater No. 3, Air Compressor No. 1A, or Standpipe F12). r PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete testing, insulation and finish painting Work prior to completing the Work of this Section. B. Clean pipe surfaces with cleaning solvents prior to installing piping identification. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. B. Install the Work of this Section in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions, unless otherwise specified. C. Plastic markers,with application systems. 1. Fasten markers on pipes smaller than 6 inches including insulation where r applicable by one of following methods: a. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. c. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe(or insulation). d. Taped to pipe(or insulation)with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4-inch wide, lapped 1-1/2 inches minimum at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe. . 2. Fasten markers on pipes 6 inches and larger by one of following methods: a. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe(or insulation). . b. Taped to pipe(or insulation)with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2-inches wide, lapped 3 inches minimum at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe. C. Strapped to pipe(or insulation)with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. D. Stick-On Pipe Markers: 1. Install minimum of 2 markers at each specified location, 90 degrees apart on . visible side of pipe. 2. Encircle ends of pipe markers around pipe or insulation with banding tape with one-inch lap. Use plain banding tape on markers with integral flow arrows, and flow arrow- banding tape on markers without integral flow arrows. E. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed in finished . spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces(shafts,tunnels, plenums)and exterior non-concealed locations. . 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal . units. Mark each pipe at branch,where flow pattern is not obvious. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at a maximum of 50-feet intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 IF 1 feet in congested areas of piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers. F. Valve Tags: install valve tag on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shut-off valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibbs, and rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule. 1. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room. G. Equipment: Install engraved plastic laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of plumbing equipment. Provide signs for following general categories of equipment: 1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. 2. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units. 3. Fuel-burning units including water heaters, stills, etc. 4. Pumps, compressors, and similar motor-driven units. 5. Heat exchangers, and similar equipment. 6. Tanks and pressure vessels. 7. Strainers, filters,water treatment systems, and similar equipment ' 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Relocate plumbing identification materials and devices, which have become visually, blocked by work of this Division or other Divisions. B. Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts. 1 3.03 PIPING IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Piping Identification Types: 1. Piping or Insulation 3/4 inch to 5-7/8 inch od: Snap-on marker or stick-on marker. 1 M 2. Piping or Insulation 6 inch od and Larger: Strap-on marker or stick-on marker. B. Identify exposed piping, bare or insulated, as to content, size of pipe and direction of flow, ' with the following exceptions: 1. Piping in furred spaces or suspended ceilings, except at valve access panels where valves and piping shall be identified as specified for exposed piping systems. 2. Piping in finished spaces as specified. C. Locate piping identification to be visible from exposed points of observation. Locate piping identification at valve locations; at points where piping enters and leaves a partition,wall, floor or ceiling, and at intervals of 20 feet on straight runs. Where 2 or more pipes run in parallel, place the printed legend and other markers in the same relative location. 3.04 VALVE IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and with captions to clearly and concisely indicate piping system and valve function. B. Valve Service Identification Charts: 1. Provide 2 framed valve charts for each piping system specified to be provided with valve identification tags. Type charts on 8-1/2 x 11 inches heavy white bond paper, indicating valve number, service and location. 2. Hang framed charts at locations as directed. 1 SECTION -PIPE INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe insulation. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 15 Section Hangers and Supports"for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 deg F or higher. B. Dual-Temperature Surfaces: Normal-operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold. C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 deg F. D. Thermal Resistivity: "r-values" represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity(k-value). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between two exposed faces required to cause one Btu to flow through one square foot of material, in one hour, at a given mean temperature. E. Density: Is expressed in Ib/sq.ft. 1.03 SUBMITTALS . A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 . Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of pipe insulation identifying k-value, thickness, and . accessories. . C. Material test reports prepared by a qualified independent testing laboratory. Certify that insulation meets specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation . including facings, cements,and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory. 1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after testing of piping systems. B. Schedule insulation application after installation and testing of heat trace tape. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Glass Fiber: a. CertainTeed Corporation. i 1 1 b. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH. C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation. d. Schuller international, Inc. e. USG Interiors, Inc. -Thermafiber Division. 2. Cellular Glass: a. Pittsburg Coming Corporation. 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Material: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin. 1 B. Jacket:All-purpose, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil having self-sealing lap. C. Preformed Pipe Insulation:ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation,jacketed. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2. Density: 10 average maximum. D. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service. 1. Type: Non-flammable, solvent-based. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F. E. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for outside service. 2.03 CELLULAR GLASS A. Material: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible. B. Facing: ASTM C 921,Type 1, factory-applied, laminated foil, flame retardant,vinyl facing. C. Form: Preformed pipe,ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2 (jacketed). D. Thermal Conductivity: 0.38 average maximum at 75 deg F mean temperature. E. Minimum Density: 7 pcf. F. Maximum Density: 9.5 pcf. 2.04 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral Fiber:ASTM C 195. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 1.0 average maximum at 500 deg F mean temperature. 2. Compressive Strength: 10 psi at 5 percent deformation. . B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite: ASTM C 196. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 1.10 average maximum at 500 deg F mean temperature. • 2. Compressive Strength: 5 psi at 5 percent deformation. . C. Mineral Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C 449. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 1.2 average maximum at 400 deg F mean temperature. 2. Compressive Strength: 100 psi at 5 percent deformation. 2.05 ADHESIVES A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Adhesive: Solvent-based, contact adhesive 1 1 recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. Lagging Adhesive: MIL-A-3316C, non-flammable adhesive in the following Classes and M Grades: 1. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass fiber insulation, sealing edges of glass fiber insulation, and bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass fiber insulation. 2. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass fiber insulation to metal surfaces. 1 2.06 JACKETS A. General:ASTM C 921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated. B. PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mu-thick, high-impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC. 1. Adhesive:As recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.07 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 ounces per sq. yd. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. 2. Cloth Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type 1. 3. Tape Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type II. B. Bands: 3/4-inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 1. Stainless Steel:Type 304, 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Brass: 0.01 inch thick. 5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick. • C. Wire: 14-gage nickel copper alloy, 16-gage, soft-annealed stainless steel, or 16-gage, soft-annealed galvanized steel. 2.08 SEALING COMPOUNDS A. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water-based,fire-resistive composition. 1.Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum. 23emperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, and dirt. B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water. Mix insulating cements contacting stainless-steel surfaces with demineralized water. 1. Follow cement manufacturer's printed instructions for mixing and portions. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms,jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping systems. B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories • that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or 1 dry state. C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes having surface operating temperatures below 60 degF. D. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's R printed instructions. E. Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces. F. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier. G. Seal penetrations for thermometers, pressure gages, and valve handle projections in insulation requiring a vapor barrier. H. Seal Ends:Taper ends at 45-degree angle and seal with lagging adhesive. . I. Apply adhesives and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended coverage-per-gallon rate. J. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. K. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Fire protection-piping systems. 3. Sanitary drainage and vent piping. 4. Below grade piping. r 5. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings. 6. Piping specialties including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators. • L_ Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive. M. Stagger joints on double layers of insulation. N. Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves, and specialties, except as otherwise indicated. 0. Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints. 7. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation,with 2 layers of lagging adhesive to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Install glass cloth between layers. Overlap adjacent insulation by 2 inches in both directions from joint with glass cloth and lagging adhesive. U. Hangers and Anchors:Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. Install saddles, shields, and inserts as specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" For cold surface piping, extend insulation on anchor legs a minimum of 12 inches and taper and seal insulation ends. 1. Inserts and Shields: Cover hanger inserts and shields withjacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. 3.03 GLASS FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Bond insulation to pipe with lagging adhesive. B. Seal exposed ends with lagging adhesive. C. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound. f 1 3.04 CELLULAR GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Cellular Glass Insulation: Join sections of cellular glass insulation with vapor barrier 1 compound. Secure insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Seal joints with manufacturer's recommended joint sealer. 1. Finishing: Apply manufacturers recommended weather barrier mastic. 3.05 JACKETS A. Foil and Paper Jackets(FP): Install jackets drawn tight. Install lap or butt strips at joints with material same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal joints and 3-inch-wide butt strips at end joints. 1. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed insulation with vapor barrier compound. 3.06 APPLICATIONS A. General: Materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Interior, Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping systems: 1. Domestic cold water. 2. Domestic hot water. 3. Tempered water. 4. Recirculated hot water. C. Interior, Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping systems: 1. Domestic cold water. 2. Vent piping in attic. 3. Domestic hot water. 4. Tempered water. 5. Recirculated hot water. 3.07 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULES A. General:Abbreviations used in the following schedules include: 1. Field-Applied Jackets: P-PVC, K-Foil and Paper,A-Aluminum, SS- Stainless Steel. . 2. Pipe Sizes: NPS-Nominal Pipe Size. INTERIOR DOMESTIC COLD WATER AND VENT PIPING IN ATTIC PIPE THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- SIZES IN BARRIER APPLIED (NPS1 MATERIALS INCHES REOD JACKET 1/2 TO I GLASS FIBER 1/2 YES NONE CELLULAR GLASS 1/2 YES NONE 1-1/4 AND UP GLASS FIBER 1 YES NONE CELLULAR GLASS 1 YES NONE INTERIOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER, TEMPERED WATER AND RECIRCULATED HOT WATER PIPE THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- SIZES IN BARRIER APPLIED (NPS) MATERIALS INCHES REQ'D JACKET • 1/2 TO 1 GLASS FIBER 3/4 NO NONE CELLULAR GLASS 1 NO NONE 1-1/4 TO 4 GLASS FIBER I NO NONE ® (105°TO 1400) CELLULAR GLASS 1 NO NONE SANITARY DRAINS AND TRAPS EXPOSED AT FIXTURES FOR DISABLED (Sub)Contractor shall install pre-formed supply and trap covers, as specified. SECTION -PLUMBING PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY r A This Section includes plumbing piping systems to a point 5 feet outside the building. Systems include the following: 1. Potable water distribution, including cold-and hot-water supply and hot water to circulation. 2. Drainage and vent systems. B. Related Sections:The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: • 1. Division 15 Section"Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods"for piping joining materials,joint construction, and installation requirements not specified in this Section. 2. Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages"for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings. 3. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties"for plumbing system components. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working pressure ratings, except where indicated otherwise: 1. Water Distribution Systems, Below Ground: 150 psig. 2. Water Distribution Systems,Above Ground: 125 psig. 3. Soil,Waste, and Vent Systems: 10-foot head of water. 1.03 SUBMITTAL S A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for the following plumbing piping products: 1. Couplings and fittings for grooved-end steel pipe and grooved-end ferrous fittings. C. Water samples,test results, and reports specified in"Field Quality Control"and"Cleaning" Articles. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the provisions of ASME B31.9"Building Services Piping"for materials, products, and installation. B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards. PART 2-PRODUCTS 1 1 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: M 1. Couplings for Grooved-End Steel Pipe and Grooved-End Ferrous Fittings: a. Grinnell Supply Sales Co., Grinnell Corp. b. Gustin-Bacon Div.,Tyler Pipe. ` C. Mech-Line Div., James Hardie Industries, Ltd. d. Sprink, Inc., James Hardie Industries, Ltd. e. Stockham Valves& Fittings, Inc. f. Victaulic Co. of America. 2. Couplings for AWWA-Size, Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings: a. Gustin-Bacon Div., Tyler Pipe. b. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.02 PIPES AND TUBES A. General: The application of the following pipe,tube, and fitting materials and joining methods required for plumbing piping systems are indicated in Part 3 Article"Pipe and Fittings Applications." B. Hard Copper Tube:ASTM B 88, Types L,water tube, drawn temper. C. Copper Drainage Tube:ASTM B 306, Type DWV, drawn temper. D. Hub and Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe:ASTM A 74, Service Class. E. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI 301. 2.03 PIPE FITTINGS AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.22. B. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings:ASME B 16.18. C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings:ASME B 16.29. D. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings:ASME B 16.23. 10 E. Bronze Flanges:ASME B 16.24, Classes 150 and 300. F. Copper Unions:ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy body, and hexagonal stock, with ball- and-socket joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder joint, threaded, or solder- joint and threaded ends. 1. Threaded Ends: Threads conforming to ASME B 1.20.1. G. Hub and Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings:ASTM A 74, Service Class. H. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301. 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solder, brazing, and welding filler metals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods." B. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 564 neoprene rubber gaskets and lubricant. C. CISPI Couplings for Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 310, having ASTM C 564 neoprene sealing sleeve, with 300 Series stainless-steel corrugated shield-and-clamp assembly. • 2.05 VALVES M A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves"for gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves. B. Refer to Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties"for special-duty valves. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section"Earthwork." 3.02 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED PIPING A. Grade trench bottom to provide smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation throughout length of piping. 1 B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at surface on which piping is to be laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped-sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve bells of loads and to ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on foundation. 3.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS APPLICATIONS A. General: Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications. B. Water Distribution Piping Above Ground: Use the following: 1. 4 to 6 Inches: Hard copper tube, Type L; wrought-copper fittings. 2. 3-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Hard copper.tube,Type L; wrought-copper or cast- copper-alloy pressure fittings; copper unions; bronze flanges; and solder joints with Alloy Sn95 solder. C. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping Below Ground: Use the following: 1. 5 to 15 Inches: Hub-and-spigot cast-iron soil pipe, hub-and-spigot cast- iron soil pipe fittings, neoprene rubber gaskets, and compression joints. D. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping Above Ground: Use the following: 1. 5 to 10 Inches: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe; hubless cast-iron soil pipe fittings; heavy-duty stainless steel, heavy-duty cast-iron, or FM-type heavy-duty couplings for hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; and hubless joints. 2. 1-1/2 to 4 Inches: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe, hubless cast-iron soil pipe fittings, CISPI-type couplings for hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, and hubless joints. 3. 2 to 4 Inches: Copper drainage tube, wrought-copper or cast- copper-alloy drainage fittings, and soldered joints with Alloy E or Alloy • Sn50 solder. 3.04 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves. 3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section"Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods." 3.06 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING A. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping of size and in location r indicated for service entrance to building. install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of r building sanitary drain and building sanitary sewer. Sanitary sewerage piping is specified in r separate Section of Division 2. r B. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at service penetrations through foundation wall for watertight installation. 3.07 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping with 1/32-inch-per-foot(1/4 percent)slope downward toward drain. 3.08 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install cast-iron soil pipe and cast-iron soil pipe fittings according to CISPI 1990 revised and edited edition of"Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Volume I,"Chapter IV, "installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate Y branches,Y branches with 1/8 bends, and long-sweep 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, and 1/16 bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn double-Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings where 2 fixtures are installed back-to-back or side-by-side and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Make no change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. C. Lay buried building drains beginning at low point of each system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub or bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as completed. D. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, except where another slope is indicated: 1. Sanitary Building Drain: 1/4 inch per foot(2 percent)for piping 3 inches and smaller; 1/8 inch per foot(1 percent)for piping 4 inches and larger. 2. Vent Piping: Slope upward continuously to provide ventilation by gravity . circulation of air. E. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil pipes passing through concrete slab,without membrane waterproofing, on grade. 3.09 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section"Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods." B. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fitting Joints: Make joints according to recommendations in CISPI 1990 revised and edited edition of"Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 1 Handbook,Volume I," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Compression Joint: Make with neoprene gasket matching class of pipe . and fittings. • 2. Hubless Joint: Make with neoprene gasket and sleeve or clamp. 3.10 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METER A. Install roughing-in piping and plumbing specialties specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties"for water meter installation according to utility company's 1 r instructions and requirements. 3.11 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for sectional valves 2 inches and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for sectional valves 2-1/2 inches and larger. B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves. 1 C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves specified in Division 15 Section"Plumbing ' Specialties"on each plumbing equipment item located to drain equipment for service and repair. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to drain water distribution piping system. ' 1.Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. i 2.Install stop and waste drain valves where indicated. D. Check Valves: Install swing check valve on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated. Use MSS SP-80, Class 125, cast-bronze body for 2-inch and r smaller piping and MSS SP-71, Class 125,cast-iron body for 2-1/2-inch and larger piping. E. Balance Valves: Install valve in each hot-water circulating loop, discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Use ball valve for 2-inch and smaller piping and butterfly valve for 2-1/2-inch and larger piping. 3.12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION A. Hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section"Hangers and Supports." 1 B. Install hangers for horizontal piping with following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: Nom. Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Tube Size Max. Span Max. Span Mm. Rod Diameter (Inches Feet Feet (Inches) Upto3/4 7 5 3/8 r 1 7 6 3/8 1-1/4 7 7 3/8 1-1/2 9 8 3/8 M 2 10 8 3/8 2-1/2 11 9 1/2 3 12 10 1/2 ! 3-1/2 13 11 1/2 4 14 12 5/8, 112 for copper 1 5 16 13 5/8, 1/2 for copper 6 17 14 3/4,5/8forcopper 1. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor. C. Conform to table below for maximum spacing of supports: i Horizontal Vertical Pipe Material In Feet In Feet Cast-Iron Soil Pipe 5 15 Copper Tubing- 1-1/4 Inches 6 10 and Smaller ' Copper Tubing- 1-1/2 Inches and 10 10 Larger r Steel Pipe 12 15 D. Pipe Attachments: Install the following: 1. Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8 or Type 42 for vertical runs. 2. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 for individual straight horizontal runs 100 feet and less. 3. Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 44 for multiple straight horizontal runs 100 feet or longer. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. E. Support cast-iron soil pipe and fittings not included in table, at maximum horizontal spacing of 5 feet, except 10-foot sections of pipe may be supported at 10-foot spacing and at maximum vertical spacing of 15 feet. 3.13 CONNECTIONS A. Supply Runouts to Fixtures: Install hot-and cold-water supply piping runouts of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code to fixtures. B. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts, with approved trap, of sizes indicated to plumbing fixtures and drains. C. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. D. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot-and cold-water supply piping system to plumbing equipment as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection; provide drain valve on drain connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 2-1/2 inches and larger. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose,cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. During progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at least 24 hours prior to time inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the plumbing official a. Roughing-In Inspection:Arrange for inspection of piping system before concealed or closed-in after system roughing-in and prior to setting fixtures. M b. Final Inspection:Arrange for final inspection by plumbing official to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of 1 plumbing code. 3. Reinspections: When a plumbing official finds that piping system will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the plumbing official. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by plumbing official. B. Test water distribution piping as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new water distribution piping systems and parts of r existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested. M2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered, extended, or replaced water distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved for testing. ' 3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the operating pressure without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate 1 test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute 1 1 defects that must be repaired. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. C. Inspect drainage piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. . 2. During progress of installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at . least 24 hours prior to time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the plumbing official. a. Roughing-In Inspection:Arrange for inspection of piping system after system roughing-in, before concealing, and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by plumbing official to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of plumbing code. 3. Reinspections: Make required corrections and arrange for reinspection by plumbing official when piping system fails to pass test or inspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the plumbing official. • D. Drainage and Vent Piping System Tests: Test drainage and vent systems according to procedures of authority having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered,extended, or replaced . drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose for testing work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. r 3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain tile, test piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems on completion of roughing-in piping installation. Tightly close all openings in piping system i and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure:After plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, test connections and prove gastight and watertight. Plug stack openings on roof and building drain where it leaves the building and introduce air into the system equal to pressure of 1-inch water column. Use a U tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure.Air pressure shall remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. . 3.15 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: r 1. Purge new potable water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if that authority does not prescribe a method, the procedure described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate(valve off)and allow to stand for 24 hours. c. Drain system or part thereof of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. . d. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system following allowed standing time. • e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authority having jurisdiction. . Repeat procedure if biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.16 COMMISSIONING . A. Fill water systems. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is completely full of water. B. Before operating systems, perform these steps: . 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to full open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping systems and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water. D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. E. Energize pumps and verify proper operation. 3.17 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops. r s r . SECTION -PLUMBING SPECIALTIES . PART I -GENERAL . 1.01 SUMMARY . A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for water distribution systems; soil, waste, and vent systems; and storm drainage systems. • B. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters that will be furnished by the utility company to the site and ready for installation. This is the name and address of the utility company: C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this . Section: . 1. Division 15 Section"Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods"for piping joining materials,joint construction, basic installation requirements, and labeling and identifying requirements. 2. Division 15 Section"Valves"for gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves. . 3. Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages"for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings. . 4. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Piping"for piping and connections. • 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following . minimum working pressure ratings, except where otherwise indicated: . 1. Water Distribution Systems, Below Ground: 150 psig. 2. Water Distribution Systems,Above Ground: 125 psig. 3. Soil,Waste, and Vent Systems: 10-foot head of water. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. • B. Submit product data including rated capacities of selected models and weights(shipping, installation, and operation). Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the . following plumbing specialty products: 1. Water meters. 2. Backfiow preventers. 3. Water pressure regulators. . 4. Thermostatic water-mixing valves and water-tempering valves. 5. Strainers. 6. Hose bibbs and wall hydrants. 7. Drain valves. 8. Water hammer arresters. 9. Backwater valves. 10. Ceeanouts, cover plates, and access panels. 11. Vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies. . 12. Floor drains, trench drains, and cleanouts. C. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance manuals as specified in Division 1 Section"Project Closeout"for the following: . 1. Water meters. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure regulators. . 4. Water filters. w . 5. Thermostatic water-mixing valves and water-tempering valves. 6. Backwater valves. . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Comply with ASME B3 1.9, "Building Services Piping,"for materials, products, and installation. B. Electrical Component Standard: NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code." . C. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment that is listed and labeled. 1. The Terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in the"National Electrical Code," . Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described . below. Package them with protective covering for storage and identify with labels clearly . describing contents. B. Operating Keys(Handles): Furnish 1 extra key for each key-operated hose bibb and hydrant installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS • A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: • 1. Water Meters: a. Badger Meter, Inc. 2. Backflow Preventers: ` a. AmesCo.,lnc. b. Febco. C. Watts Regulator Co. d. Wilkins Regulator Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. 3. Water Pressure Regulators: a. Watts Regulator Co. b. Wilkins Regulator Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. 4. Thermostatic Water-Mixing Valves: a. Leonard Valve Co. b. Powers Process Controls Unit, Mark Controls Corp. C. Symmons Industries, Inc. 5. Wall Hydrants: a. Smith by Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. b. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe. C. Zurn by Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. 6. Water Hammer Arresters: a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. b. Smith by Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. C. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Regulator Co. e. Zurn by Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. 1 7. Floor Drains and Cleanouts: a. Smith by Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. b. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe. C. Zurn by Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. 8. Backwater Valves: a. Smith by Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. . b. Zurn by Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries Inc.. 9. Pool Deck Trench Drains: • a. National Diversified Sales, Inc. . 2.02 WATER METERS A. General: Register in gallons, except where registration in cubic feet is indicated. B. Water Meters:AWWA C702, compound type. Provide"Badger"3 Recordall compound meter. . C. Remote Registration Systems: Specified water meter type, modified to include factory-or field- installed, self-contained, pulsing-type, generating system transmitter. Include low-voltage connecting wiring, totalizing device, and remote wall register. • 1. Encoder-Ty pe, Remote-Registration System: AWWA C707; meter- mounted transmitter, totalizing device; 2-or 3-conductor connecting wire; weatherproof, outdoor, remote receptacle for automatic reading and billing; and conforming to utility standards. 2.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. General:ASSE Standard, backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate indicated . and maximum pressure loss indicated. 1. Working Pressure: 150-psig minimum except where indicated otherwise. . 2. 2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 3. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless steel body with flanged ends. . a. Interior Lining: FDA-approved epoxy coating, for backflow preventers having cast-iron or steel body. 4. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. 5. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate when used in chrome-plated piping system. 6. Strainer on inlet,where strainer is indicated. B. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers:ASSE 1011, nickel plated,with nonremovable and manual drain features, and ASME B 1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to rough- bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze. . C. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventer: ASSE 1013, consisting of ball valves on inlet and outlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve having ASME Al 12.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous pressure application. 1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. D. Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies:ASSE 1015, consisting of resilient seat shutoff valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks with 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous pressure application. 1 1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 2.04 WATER PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General:ASSE 1003,water pressure regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 150 psig minimum, of size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Include integral factory- 1 installed or separate field-installed Y type strainer. 1. 2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. • 3. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate when used in chrome plated piping system. B. Single-seated, direct-operated type. C. Single-seated, direct-operated type with factory installed pressure gage on outlet. 2.05 THERMOSTATIC WATER-MIXING VALVES A. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water-mixing valve with bronze body. Include checkstop and union on hot water and cold-water supply inlets, adjustable temperature setting, and capacity at pressure loss as indicated. 1. Operation and Pressure Rating: Bimetal thermostat, 125-psig minimum. • B. Manifolded, Thermostatic Water-Mixing Valve Assemblies(TMV-1): Factory-fabricated unit consisting of parallel arrangement of thermostatic water-mixing valves. 1. Arrangement: 1 large-flow thermostatic water mixing valve with flow control valve, inlet and outlet pressure gages, and 1 small-flow thermostatic . water-mixing valve with flow control valve. Include outlet thermometer, factory-or field-installed inlet and outlet valves, and other indicated options. 2. Piping, of sizes and in arrangement,with valves and unions, indicated. 3. Piping Component Finish: Rough brass. 4. Cabinet: Stainless-steel box with stainless-steel, hinged door. . 5. Cabinet Mounting: Surface. 6. Capacity: 1 GPM to 60 GPM @ 1 OPSI differential, Provide Leonard model number TM-1520A-STSTL EXP. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Piping specialties such as escutcheons, dielectric fittings, sleeves, and sleeve seals are specified . in Division 15 Section"Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods." B. Strainers:Y pattern, except where otherwise indicated, full size of connecting piping. include Type . 304 stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch perforations except where other screens are indicated. 1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam working pressure except where otherwise indicated. 2. Sizes 2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze body,with female threaded ends. 3. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Cast-iron body,with interior FDA- approved epoxy coating and flanged ends. 4. Y-Type Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown. a. Drain: Pipe plug. C. Wall Hydrants:ASME Al 12.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic draining, antibackflow type, key operation,with 3/4-or 1-inch threaded or solder joint inlet, and M ASME B 1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Provide 1 operating key. 1 1. Type: Projecting. r 2. Finish: Nickel bronze, provide Zurn model number Z- 1315. D. Hose-End, Drain Valves: 3/4-inch ball valve, rated for 400 psig WOG. Include 2-piece bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable"TFE"seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. 1. Inlet: Solder joint or threaded. 2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B 1.20.7 garden-hose thread and cap. E. Water Hammer Arresters: ASME Al 12.26.1 M, ASSE 1010, or PDI WH-201, bellows or . piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water-supply fixture units,ASME Al12.26.1M sizes"A"through "F"and PDI WH-201 sizes"A"through"F." F. Horizontal Backwater Valves:ASME Al 12.14.1, cast-iron body,with removable bronze swing-check valve and threaded or bolted cover. 1. Open-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang open except when subject to backflow condition. . 2. Extension: Full-size, Service Class, cast-iron soil-pipe extension to field-installed cleanout at floor, instead of cover. G. Fresh Air Inlet: Commercially manufactured, round, nickel bronze, crowned and perforated, complete with 4-point contact locking device, provide Zurn model number ZANB-1471. 2.07 CLEANOUTS A. General: Size cleanouts as indicated on drawings, or where not indicated, same size as connected drainage piping. Cleanouts larger than 4 inches are not required except where indicated. B. Cleanouts:ASME A 112.3 6.2M, cast-iron body with straight threads and gasket seal or taper threads for plug, and a brass closure plug. Fumish cleanouts with access cover, finish, and other specific features as follows: 1. Deck Plate Ceeanout: r a. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron. b. Outlet Connection: hiside calk. C. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads. d. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. e. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. M f. Frame and Cover Shape: Round scoriated. g. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. 2.08 FLOOR DRAINS A. General: Size outlets as indicated on drawings. B. Floor Drains:ASME Al 12.21.1 M, cast-iron body,with seepage flange and clamping device. Floor drains for installation in floors not having membrane waterproofing may have seepage flange without clamping device. Furnish floor drains with shape, dimensions, strainer and body top finish, top-loading classification, sump size, sediment bucket, and specific features as follows. a. Body Material: Cast iron. b. Outlet Connection: Bottom outlet, inside calk. C. Strainer: 6-inch round nickel bronze, light duty,with square heelproof openings. d. Clamping Device: Combination invertible membrane clamp with adjustable collar. e. ZurnZN-415-Y. 2. FD-"B': a. Body Material: Cast iron. b. Outlet Connection: Bottom outlet, inside calk. C. Strainer: 10-inch round nickel brass, light duty,with square heelproof openings. 1 d. Clamping Device: Combination invertible membrane clamp with adjustable collar. e. Funnel: 9-inch x 4-inch x 3-inch high oval. f. Zurn ZN-520-Y-1. C. Deep Seal Traps: Cast iron or bronze,with inlet and outlet matching connected piping, cleanout where indicated, and trap seal primer valve connection where indicated. 1. 2-Inch Size: 4-inch-minimum water seal. 2. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal. D. Inlet Fittings: Cast iron,with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection. E. Air Gap Fittings:ASME Al 12.1.2, cast iron or cast bronze,with fixed air gap, inlet for drain pipe or tube, and threaded or spigot outlet. PART 3-EXECUTION . 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WATER METER A. Install water meter according to utility company's written installation instructions and . requirements. B. Size meter and arrange piping and specialties to comply with utility company's . requirements. C. Set meter on 3000-psi minimum, Portland cement mix concrete pad, as indicated. Refer to Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete"for requirements for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete. D. Mount meter as indicated. E. Mount remote-registration devices in locations required by the local water authority. Drill hole in exterior wall and install connecting wire. Seal hole with single-part; neutral-curing silicone sealant specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." 3.02 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METER A. Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility company's instructions and requirements. 3.03 PIPING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated, at each water supply connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and to other equipment and systems as indicated. Comply with plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same room as equipment being connected. Install air-gap fitting on units having 1 atmospheric vent connection and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer. B. Install pressure-regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance cock bypass. Install pressure gage on valve outlet and install valved bypass where indicated. C. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-regulating valve, and solenoid valve, and where indicated. D. Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker. E. Install wall hydrants with integral vacuum breaker. F. Install backwater valves in building drain piping as indicated. For interior 1 installation, provide cleanout deck plate(cover)flush with floor and centered over • backwater valve cover and of adequate size to remove valve cover for service. G. Install cleanouts in above-ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated, according to the following: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to 4-inch size. Use 4-inch size for larger drainage piping except where larger size cleanout is indicated. 45 degrees. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than . 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4 inches and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. H. Install cleanout deck plates(covers), of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor,for floor cleanouts for piping below floors. 3.04 FLOOR DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Install floor drains according to manufacturers written instructions, in locations indicated. B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor. C. Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper floor slope to drain: 1. 5-Foot Drain Area Radius: 1/2-inch depression. D. Trap drains connected to sanitary building drain. E. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. F. Position drains for easy accessibility and maintenance. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. Supply Runouts to Fixtures: Install hot-and cold-water supply piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. B. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. C. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. D. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16. 1. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground according to the National Electrical Code and Division 16 Section"Grounding." 3.06 COMMISSIONING A. Preparation: Perform the following checks before start-up: 1. Systems tests are complete. 2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. 1 3. There is clear space for servicing of specialties. 1 1 B. Before operating systems, perform these steps: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open valves to full open position. 3. Remove and clean strainers. 4. Verify drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear. C. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows: 1. Energize circuits for grease recovery units. Start and run units through complete sequence of operations. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures related to startup and servicing of . interceptors. . 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops. SECTION -PLUMBING FIXTURES 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, and accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports associated with plumbing fixtures. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Section"Valves"for valves used as supply stops. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: Describes a plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered, and used by physically handicapped people. B. Accessory: Device that adds effectiveness, convenience, or improved appearance to a fixture but is not essential to its operation. C. Appurtenance: Device or assembly designed to perform some useful function when attached to or used with a fixture. D. Fitting: Fitting installed on or attached to a fixture to control the flow of water into or out of the fixture. E. Fixture: Installed receptor connected to the water distribution system, that receives and makes available potable water and discharges the used liquid or liquid-borne wastes directly or indirectly into the drainage system. The term "Fixture" means the actual receptor, except when used in a general application where terms"Fixture" and "Plumbing Fixture" include associated trim,fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, support, and equipment. M 1W F. Roughing-In: Installation of piping and support for the fixture prior to the actual installation of the fixture. G. Support: Device normally concealed in building construction, for supporting and securing plumbing fixtures to walls and structural members. Supports for lavatories are made in types suitable for fixture construction and the mounting required. Categories of supports: 1. Chair Carrier: Support for wall-hung fixture, having steel pipe uprights that transfer weight to the floor. 2. Reinforcement: Wood blocking or steel plate built into wall construction, for securing fixture to wall. H. Trim: Hardware and miscellaneous parts, specific to a fixture and normally supplied with it required to complete fixture assembly and installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of plumbing fixture specified, including fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appurtenances, supports, construction details, dimensions of components, and finishes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of Article 13 of the New York State . Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code, and CABO/ANSI Standard A117.1-1992, "Buildings and Facilities—Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People,"with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. • B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. • 1. The terms"listed"and "labeled"shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering. B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in a dry location. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching ' products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Faucet Washers and 0-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 of each type installed. 2. Faucet Cartridges and 0-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 of each r type installed. 3. Provide a hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, having a separate compartment for each type and size of above extra materials. 5. Water Closet Tank Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical flush valve units not less than two of each type installed. 6. Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 of each type toilet seat installed. r r r r . PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products in each . category, by one of the following listed for that category: . 1. Water Closets: a. American Standard, Inc. b. Eljer;A Household International Co. C. Kohler Co. 2. Lavatories: a. American Standard, Inc. b. Eljer,A Household International Co. C. Kohier Co. 3. Bath Tub/Showers: a. Aqua Bath Company Inc. b. Aqua Glass Corp. C. Aquarius Div.; Briggs Industries, Inc. d. Kohler Co. 4. Showers: a. Aqua Bath Company Inca b. Aqua Glass Corp. ' C. Aquarius Div.; Briggs Industries, Inc. d. Kohler Co. 5. Whirlpools: ' a. Aqua Glass Corp. b. Jacuzzi Whirlpool Bath Div.; Jacuzzi, Inc. C. Kohler Co. 6. Toilet Seats: a. Bemis Mfg. Co. b. Beneke Div.; Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc. C. Church Seat Co. d. Kohler Co. e. Olsonite Corp. 7. Commercial/Industrial Cast-Brass Faucets: a. American Standard, Inc. ' b. Chicago Faucet Co. ' C. Delta Faucet Co.; Div. of Masco Corp. d. Eljer,A Household International Co. e. Kohler Co. / f. Speakman Co. ' 8. Pressure Balance Bath/Shower Faucets: a. Delta Faucet Co.; Div. of Masco Corp. r b. Leonard Valve Co. ' C. Symmons Industries, Inc. r 9. Thermostatic Mixing Valve Bath/Shower Faucets: ' a. Bradley Corp. b. Grohe America, Inc. C. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc. ' d. Leonard Valve Co. e. Powers Process Controls;A Unit of Mark Controls Corp. r r f. Symmons Industries, Inc. g. T& S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. 10. Miscellaneous Fittings(Except Faucets): a. Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Co. b. Dearborn Brass Co. i C. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. 11. Supports: d. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. e. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 12. Sanitary Joint Sealant: g. Pecora Corp.; 863. h. GE Silicone; Sanitary 1700. 2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL A. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, other components, and supports as specified in`Plumbing Fixture Data Sheets"at the end of Part 3 of this Section. 2.03 FAUCETS A. Faucets General: Unless otherwise specified, provide faucets that are cast brass with . polished chrome-plated finish. B. Lavatory Faucets, Type 1: ASME A 112,18.1 M, center set fitting,with single lever hot and cold mixing type self-closing valve. C. Lavatory Faucets, Type 2:ASME Al 12.18.1 M,widespread fitting, having inlet shanks on 8-inch centers,with hot and cold handles,with pop-up waste. D. Bathtub Faucet, Type 1:ASME A 112.18.1 M, cast-brass combination single-lever mixing valve and escutcheon, and tub filler, diverter, shower head, arm, and flange. Polished chrome- plated finish on all exposed metal. E. Shower Faucet, Type 1:ASME Al12.18.1M, cast-brass combination single-lever, pressure-balancing mixing valve and escutcheon, and showerhead, arm, and flange. Polished chrome-plated finish on all exposed metal. F. Whirlpool Faucet, Type 1: ASME A 112.1 8.1 M,combination faucet, tub filler, and air control valve. Polished chrome-plated finish on all exposed metal. 2.04 FITTINGS, EXCEPT FAUCETS A. Fittings General: Unless otherwise specified, provide fittings fabricated of brass, with polished chrome plated finish. • B. Lavatory Supplies and Stops, Type 1: Loose-key angle stop, having 1/2-inch NPS inlet with wall flange and 1/2-inch by 12-inch flexible tubing riser outlet- C. Lavatory Supplies and Stops, Type 2: Loose-key angle stop, having 1/2-inch NPS inlet with wall flange and 3/8-inch by 12-inch long flexible tubing riser outlet. D. Lavatory Traps,Type 1: Cast-brass, 1-1/2-inch NPS adjustable P-trap with cleanout, 17-gage tubular waste to wall, and wall flange. E. Water Closet Supplies and Stops, Type 1: Loose-key angle stop, having 1/2-inch NPS inlet with wall flange and 1/2-inch by 124nch flexible tubing riser outlet with collar. F. Bathtub Waste and Overflow Fittings, Type 1: Concealed 1-1/24nch, 17-gage, P polished chrome-plated, tubular brass; lever-operated pop-up bath waste and overflow, spud with universal-type outlet connection suitable for 1-1/2-inch tubing, or 1-1/2-inch solder joint outlet connection on waste tee. G. Bathtub Traps, Type 1: Cast-brass, 1-1/2-inch NPS adjustable P-trap with cleanout, 17 gage tubular waste to wall, and wall flange. H. Supply and drain plumbing service fittings not listed above shall be as specified and as scheduled. I. Fittings installed concealed inside a plumbing fixture or within wall construction may be without chrome plate finish. J. Escutcheons: Wall flange with set screw. K. Deep Pattern Escutcheons: Wall flange with set screw or sheet steel wall flange ' with friction clips, of depth adequate to conceal protruding roughing-in fittings. 2.05 TOILET SEATS A. General: Provide toilet seats compatible with water closets, and of type, color, and features indicated. B. Toilet Seats, Type 1: Extra heavy-duty, commercial/industrial type, elongated, open front, solid plastic,with check hinge. 2.06 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Supports: ASME Al 12.6.1 M, categories and types as required for wall-hanging fixtures specified, and wall reinforcement. B. Support categories are: a. Chair Carriers: Supports with steel pipe uprights for wall-hanging fixtures. b. Reinforcement: 2-inch by 4-inch wood blocking between studs or 1/4-inch by 6-inch steel plates attached to studs, in wall construction,to secure floor-mounted and special fixtures to wall. C. Support Types: Provide support of category specified,of type having features required to match fixture. D. Provide supports specified as part of fixture description, in lieu of category and type requirements above. 2.07 SANITARY JOINT SEALANT . A. One-part, Mildew-resistant Silicone Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, non- modified, single component, acid-curing, silicone sealant. Sealant shall comply with ASTM C920, Type 5, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to non- porous joint substrates indicated, Use 0. Sealant shall be formulated with fungicide and specifically intended for sealing interior joints with non-porous substrates and subject to in-service exposure to high humidity and temperature extremes. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for potable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to 0 be installed. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 3.02 APPLICATION i A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations indicated on Drawings. B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of type required: 1. Heavy-duty chair carriers for the following fixtures— a. Accessible lavatories. b. Fixtures where specified. ' 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers'written installation instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards. B. Install floor-mounted,floor-outlet water closets with cast iron closet flanges and ` gasket seals. C. At accessible water closets, install tank with handles oriented toward the wide side of the room. D. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building . substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated. E. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures and special fixtures having holes for securing . fixture to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls. F. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. G. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework. H. Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid installation. I. Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture. . J. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures haying integral trap. K. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished M locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. . L. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant in accordance with sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section Joint Sealers." Match sealant color to fixture color. 3.04 CONNECTIONS . A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other sections of Division 15. 2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other sections, direct connected to plumbing piping systems. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ` A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. ' B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then r retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly. ® 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,fittings, and controls. 1 ' B. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flushometers having controls, to provide proper flow and stream. C_ Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. D. Clean fixtures,fittings,and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. E. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section"Project Closeout." 3.07 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by the Owner. 3.08 FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. Provide plumbing fixtures as scheduled on the following"Plumbing Fixture schedule." B. Water Closets(WC): Type`A': Gerber Pressure-Assist#21-318 with trip lever at left and#21-318-97 with trip lever at right. Elongated front,floor mounted, pressure-assisted, 12" Rough-in, close- coupled tank, rim at 17". 1/2" I.P.S. supply with loose key angle stop, Brass Craft# . FISR1 721 DL-C. White, Close seat with concealed check hinge and cover, Olsonite 94. 2. Type'B': Gerberr Pressure-Assist#21-312 with trip lever at left and#21-312-97 with trip . lever at right. Elongated front, pressure-assisted, floor mounted, 12" rough-in, close-coupled tank, rim at 14-1/2". 1/2" I.P.S. supply with loose key angle stops, Brass Craft#1-ISR1 721 DL-C. White, Close seat with concealed check hinge and cover, Olsonite 94. 3. Type'C': Gerber Pressure-Assist#21-318 with trip lever at left and#21-318-97 with trip lever at right. Elongated front, floor mounted, pressure-assisted, 12" Rough-In, close-coupled tank, rim at 17". 1/2" I.P.S. supply with loose key angle stop, Brass Craft#HSR1721 DL-C,White open front seat with concealed check hinge, Olsonite 95ss. C. Lavatories(LAV): i Type`A': Gerber Luxoval#12-844,20"x 17-3/8" lavatory with 4" centers. Gerber Model #40-135 single handle faucet 2 .Ogpm flow control, vandal proof aerator, and pop-up waste. 3/8" I.P.S. supplies with loose key angle stops as manufactured by Brass Craft# S3601 C, 1-1/4"x 1-1/2"cast brass P-trap, chrome plated, with cleanout, Brass Craft #0020. For handicapped accessible rooms(rooms with roll-in showers) insulate exposed drain and supply piping below lavatory, Plumberex No. 2333 insulation kit. 2. Type'B': Gerber Luxoval#12-844, 20"x 17-3/8"lavatory with 4"centers. Gerber Model #40-135 single handle faucet 2 .Ogpm flow control, vandal proof aerator, and pop-up waste. 3/8" I.P.S. supplies with loose key angle stops as manufactured by Brass Craft#53601 C, 1-1/4"x 1- 1/2"cast brass P-trap, chrome plated,with cleanout, Brass Craft#0020. 3. Type'C': Gerber, Plymouth#12-314, 19"x 17" lavatory with 4"centers. Rim height at 34". Gerber,#40-133, 4"single handle faucet. 0.5 gpm flow control. 3/8" I.P.S. supplies with loose key angle stops, Brass Craft#53601 C. 1-1/4" 17 ga. offset drain with perforated strainer, Brass Craft #0702. 1-1/4"x 1-1/2"cast brass P-trap, chrome-plated,with cleanout, Brass Craft#0020 Provide Zurn floor secured concealed arm carrier. Insulate exposed drain.and supply piping below lavatory, Plumberex No. 2444 insulation kit. • D. Shower(Roll-in): 7. Type'A':Aqua Bath Model C6436BF-FUS 3/4"-L valve on left or C6436BF-FUS 3/4"-R valve on right. Molded one piece acrylic shower stall with inside dimensions 60"x 36"x 78"with a built-in soap holder, floor drain, grab bars, curtain rod, and white weighted shower curtain with hooks. Symmons No. 1-1 17-FSB-X pressure balanced chrome valve, spray personal shower, 30" shower bar for personal shower, and diverter valve. 1-1/2"cast brass P-trap, chrome-plated, with cleanout, Brass Craft No. 0030. r E. Bathtub(BT): 1. Type'A':Aqua Bath Model 626034B valve on (L) left or valve on(R) right. 1-1/2" ` pop-up drain, Gerber#41-802. Gerber"Safety Temp'tub and shower unit No. 49-731-82. 1-1/2" cast brass P-trap, chrome-plated,with cleanout, Brass Craft 0030 2. Type'B': Jacuzzi"Tara"whirlpool tub valve on left#B950 or valve on right#8450. Molded one-piece acrylic tub with dimensions of 60"x 60"x 20-3/4"with built-in tub drain, 4 fully adjustable flexjets, 2 lumbar jets, foot 1 and drain. Provide Jacuzzi P251-827'Trevi"chrome plated faucet with tub fill spout. Provide Jacuzzi standard tub drain with trip lever kit. 1-1/2"x 2" cast brass P-trap, chrome-plated, with cleanout, McGuire No. 8903. 3.09 ROUGH-IN SCHEDULE r FIXTURE HOT WATER COLD WATER WASTE VENT r Lavatory 1/2" 1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" Water Closet 1/2" 4" 2" Shower 1/2" 1/2" 2" 1-1/2" r Bathtub 1/2" 1/2" 2" 1-1/2" r r r r r r r r W SECTION-WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of water distribution pumps for plumbing r systems: ' 1. In-line circulators. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages"for pressure gages. 2. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Piping"for piping not specified in this Section. 3. Division 16 Sections for power-supply wiring, field-installed disconnects, required electrical devices, and motor controllers. 1.02 PUMP PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Pump Pressure Ratings:At least equal to system maximum operating pressure at point where installed. 1.03 SUBMITTAL S A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data including certified performance curves,weights(shipping, installed, and 1 operating), furnished specialties, and accessories. Include startup instructions. C. Shop drawings showing layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages. D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems differentiating between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. E. Product certificates signed by pump manufacturers certifying accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements. F. Maintenance data for each type and size pump specified to include in the"Operating and Maintenance Manual"specified in Division 1 Section"Project Closeout." 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. ASME B3 1.9"Building Services Piping"for piping materials and installation. 2. H.I. "Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating Pumps'for pump design, manufacture, and installation. 3. UL 778"Standard for Motor Operated Water Pumps"for construction requirements. include UL listing and labeling. 4. NEMA MG 1 "Standard for Motors and Generators"for electric motors. Include NEMA listing and labeling. 5. NFPA 70"National Electrical Code"for electrical components and installation. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain same type of pumps from a single manufacturer. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain same type of pumps from a single manufacturer with i pumps, components, and accessories from a single source. Include responsibility and ! accountability to answer and resolve problems regarding compatibility, installation, r performance, and acceptance of pumps. r r r 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANT) HANDLING A. Store pumps in a clean, dry location. B. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage. r ' C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, or other foreign matter. D. Extended Storage Greater Than 5 Days: Dry internal parts with hot air or a vacuum- producing device.After drying, coat internal parts with light oil, kerosene, or antifreeze. Dismantle bearings and couplings, dry and coat with an acid-free heavy oil, and tag and r store in a dry location. r E. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling. r r PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Compact, In-Line Circulators: a. Bell &Gossett Div., ITT Fluid Technology Corp. r b. Grundfos Pumps Corp. !) C. Paco Pumps, Inc. d. Taco, Inc. 2. Aquastats: a. Honeywell Inc. b. Johnson Controls Inc. C. Barber-Coleman Co. 3. Time Clocks: a. Intermatic, Inc. b. Paragon Electric Co. C. Tork, Inc. 2.02 PUMPS, GENERAL A. Water Distribution Pumps: Factory assembled and tested. B. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated. C. Motors: NEMA MG 1; single, multiple, or variable speed with type of enclosure and electrical characteristics indicated. Include built-in thermal-overload protection and grease- lubricated ball bearings. Motors are non-overloading within full range of pump performance curves. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to assemble and-tested plumbing pump units before shipping. E. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs. 2.03 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS A. General Description: Horizontal, in line, centrifugal, single stage, rated for 125-psig (86OkPa) minimum working pressure and 225 deg F (107 deg C)continuous water temperature. 1 B. Compact, In-Line Circulator:Leak proof, in-line, seamless, volute-type pump. Include pump and motor assembled on a common shaft in a hermetically sealed unit, without stuffing boxes or mechanical seals. Lubricate sleeve bearing and cool motor by circulating pumped liquid through motor section. Isolate motor section from motor stator windings with a corrosion-resistant, r nonmagnetic alloy liner. 1. Casing: Cast bronze,with stainless-steel liner and static 0-ring seal to ' separate motor section from motor stator, and flanged piping connections. 2. Impeller: Overhung, single-suction, closed or open nonmetallic impeller. ' 3. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft with carbon-steel bearing sleeve. 4. Motor: Single speed. ' 5. Capacity: CP-I: 1/25hp, 11 Volt, single phase, 6gpm at 8 feet of head, Provide"TACO"#008. : 1/25hp, 1 IS volt, single phase,69pm at 8 feet of head, Provide"TACO"#008. 1 2.04 AQUASTAT A. General: Provide an immersion type aquastat to automatically start the pump when the temperature in the recirculating line is below the set point, when the temperature is satisfied(at system temperature), contacts open to stop the pump. B. Controls: Set aquastat for main hot water system at 135°F. 2.05 TIME CLOCK A. General: Seven(7)day calendar dial; number of trippers to suit required number of on-off cycles; 120 volt, SPST, minimum 40A per pole rating; spring-wound reserve power feature to keep dial on time for 10 hours minimum; in surface-mount NEMA 1 enclosure, with lockable hasp. 2.06 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves"for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of plumbing pumps. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to pump installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A_ Install pumps according to the manufactures written installation instructions. B. install pumps in locations indicated and arrange to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. C. Support pumps and piping so that weight of piping is not supported by pumps. • D. Suspend horizontal, in-line pumps independent from piping. Use continuous-thread hanger nods and vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to support weight of pumps. Fabricate brackets or supports as required for pumps. 1 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Connect piping to pumps as indicated. Install valves that are same size as piping connecting to pumps. B. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. C. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of in-line pumps and circulators. D. Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of in-line pumps and circulators. r E. Install flexible pipe connectors on suction and discharge of end-suction pumps. Install flexible pipe connectors upstream from pump suction diffusers and strainers, and between pump casings and discharge valves. F. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure gage tapings where provided. G. Install pressure gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Pressure gage connector plugs are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages." H. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices. I. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Check suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps. B. Clean strainers on pump suction piping. C. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation. 3.05 COMMISSIONING A. Final Checks Before Startup: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before startup: 1. Lubricate oil-lubricated-type bearings. 2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers and flush bearings with kerosene and thoroughly clean. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper rotation. Rotation shall match direction of rotation marked on pump casing. . 4. Check that pumps are free to rotate by hand. Pumps for handling hot liquids shall be free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if bound or if if drags even slightly until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 5. Check that pump controls are correct for required application. B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power: 1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for operation. 2. Open the liquid supply valves if pumps are so fitted. 3. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff. 4. Start motors. 5. Open discharge valves slowly. 6. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valves for proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing"run in"before reducing leakage through stuffing boxes, and then tighten glands. 7. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors. 8. Close circulating piping valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent overheating. 9. Remove startup strainers from suction diffusers and install permanent strainers t after system has been in operation. t C. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge gate valves open, ► steps are same except open discharge gate valves some time before motors are started. i ► ► 1 SECTION - FUEL-FIRED WATER HEATERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gas water heaters. 2. Hot water storage tanks. M 3. Water heater accessories. B. Related Section: Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties"contains requirements that relate to this Section. 1 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and M Division I Specification Sections. B. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models,weights(shipping, installed, ' and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, finishes and coatings, required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring connections. 1 C. Shop Drawings showing layout of each unit, including tanks, pumps, controls, related accessories, and piping. D. Setting Drawings with templates and directions for installing foundation bolts, anchor I bolts, and other anchorages. E. Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical requirements for electrical power supply wiring to water heaters. Include ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation of water heaters and controls. Differentiate between factory-installed and field-installed wiring. M F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1 G. Certificates of shop inspection and data report as required by provisions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, when ASME construction is indicated. H. Field quality-control installation reports. I. Maintenance data for water heaters to include in operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include startup instructions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AGA Standards: Comply with AGA standards and bear AGA certification label. B. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings." C. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code,"for electrical components. D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated water heater controls and components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. i 1. The Terms"Listed"and"Labeled":As defined in National Electrical Code, Article100. 1 r 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.04 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by(Sub)Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents. ` B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair ' or replace water heaters and accessories that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks, coils, heat exchangers, and burners. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other ' rights Owner may have against(Sub)Contractor under Contract Documents. ' C. Warranty Period: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the r following: 1. Commercial, High-Efficiency, Sealed-Combustion-Chamber, Gas Water Heaters: a. Lochinvar Corp. b. Smith:A.O. Smith Water Products Co. C. PVI Industries Inc. 2. Commercial, Hot Water Storage Tanks: a. Lochinvar Corp. b. Smith:A.O. Smith Water Products PVI Industries Inc. 3. Compression Tanks: a. Amtrol, Inc. ` b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. C. Smith:A.O. Smith;Aqua-Air Div. 2.02 WATER HEATERS, GENERAL A. Specified manufacturer's standard components and features are acceptable where specific product requirements are not indicated. B. Temperature Control:Adjustable thermostat, except for units where other arrangement is indicated or temperature is regulated by flow-control fitting. C. Safety Control:Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system on commercial units and where indicated. Include automatic low-water cutoff device or system on commercial units . where indicated. D. Interior Finish: Materials that comply with requirements of applicable NSF, AWWA, or FDA and EPA regulatory standards for tasteless and odorless, potable-water-tank linings. . E. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Include tapings for piping connections, relief valves, pressure gage, thermometer, blow down, vent, and controls as required and others as indicated.Attach tapings to tank before testing and labeling. Include tapings and connections as follows: 1. 2-Inch NPS (DN50)and Smaller:Threaded ends. 2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65)and Larger: Flanged ends. 1 1 F. Insulation: Fiberglass, polyurethane foam, or manufacturers standard that is suitable for operating temperature and required insulating value. Include insulation material that surrounds entire tank except connections and controls. ' G. Jacket: Steel, with baked-on enamel finish, except where otherwise specified. ' H. Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium. 2.03 COMMERCIAL, HIGH-EFFICIENCY, GAS WATER HEATERS A. Description: Sealed-combustion-chamber configuration and components complying with appropriate requirements of ANSI Z21.13 and UL 795,with nominal efficiency rating not less than 93 percent. B. Unit Construction: ASME labeled with 160-psig-(1100-kPa-) minimum working-pressure rating. C. Burner: Manufacturer's standard, for use with sealed combustion chamber and natural-gas r fuel, and complying with appropriate requirements of UL 795. D.Gas Shutoff Valve:ANSI Z2 1.15, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping. E. Pressure Regulator: ANSI Z2 1.18,factory or field installed, for gas appliances. Provide 1 regulators with pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required for water heater and gas supply. ' F. Automatic Ignition:ANSI Z2 1.20, automatic gas-ignition system and components. ' G. Automatic Valve: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, automatic gas valve. H. Automatic Damper:ANSI Z2 1.66, gas-fired-appliance, automatic-vent-damper device. 1 I. Pressure Relief Valve:ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3 and ANSI Z21 .22. Include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Furnish for 1 installation in piping. J. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve:ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3 and ANSI Z21.22. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into stored hot water or, if unit is without tapping, furnish for installation in piping. K. Vacuum Relief Valve: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping. L. Description: Condensing configuration and components complying with appropriate requirements of ANSI Z2 1.10.3 and UL 795, with nominal efficiency rating not less than 93 percent. M. Shell Construction:ASME labeled with 150-psig (1035-kPa)working-pressure rating. N. Burner: Condensing type for natural-gas fuel, complying with appropriate requirements of UL . 795. 0. Gas Shutoff Valve:ANSI Z2 1.15, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping. P. Pressure Regulator:ANSI Z21.18, factory or field installed, for gas appliances. Provide regulators with pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required for water heater and . gas supply. Q.Automatic Ignition:ANSI Z2 1.20, automatic gas-ignition system and components. r r r ' R. Automatic Valve: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, automatic gas valve. ' S. Automatic Damper: ANSI Z21.66, gas-fired-appliance, automatic-vent-damper device. 1 T. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve:ASME rated and stamped and complying ' with ASME PTC 25.3 and ANSI Z21.22. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank. ' 1. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of combination relief valve. U. Vacuum Relief Valve: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping. 1. Exception: Omit where water heater has integral vacuum relieving device. V. Capacity: 130 gallon storage, 300btuh input, 360 gallons per hour recovery at 100 degree rise, provide AO Smith model number BTH-300. 2.04 COMMERCIAL, HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS A. Description: UL 795, packaged, factory insulated with baked enamel steel jacket, and glass lined. Include drain valve, and all required openings. B. Storage Tank: Insulated; provide anode rods and relief valve. . 1. Construction:ASME labeled, steel with 160-psig (1100-kPa)working-pressure rating. 2. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve:ASME rated and stamped and . complying with ASME PTC 25.3 and ANSI Z2 1.22. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank. . 3.Vacuum Relief Valve: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping. C. Capacity: 200 gallon storage, provide AO Smith model number TJV 200. D. Mounting: Mount on 4"high concrete housekeeping pad. . E. Piping: Manufacturer's standard copper tubing. F. Temperature Control:Aquastat wired to circulator, CP-2. G. Safety Control:Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff. • 2.05 COMPRESSION TANKS A. Description: Steel, pressured-rated tanks constructed with welded joints and factory . installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating • pressure at tank- B. Construction: 15 0-psig(1035-kPa)working-pressure rating. • C. Interior Finish: Materials that comply with requirements of applicable NSF,AWWA, or FDA and EPA regulatory standards for tasteless and odorless, potable-water-tank linings. D. Accessories: Include air-charging valve and pressure gage. E. Capacity: 34 gallon, 34 acceptance volume, provide Amtrol model number ST-60V. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE BASES 1 1 A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for water heaters and accessories. Refer to Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete"and Division 15 Section"Basic Plumbing ' Materials and Methods." 3.02 WATER HEATER NSTALLATION A. General: Install water heaters on concrete bases. Set and connect units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install units plumb, level, and firmly-anchored in locations indicated. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Install so controls and devices are accessible for service. B. Anchor water heaters and storage tanks to substrate. C. Install and connect gas water heaters according to NEPA 54. 1. Install gas pressure regulators on gas-bumer inlets. 2. Install vent piping from gas-train pressure regulators and valves to outside of building where required. Terminate vent piping with brass-screened vent cap fitting. Do not combine vents except with approval of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage water heater tanks and hot-water storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge to closest floor drain. E. Install pressure relief valves in hot-water-outlet piping for water heaters without storage. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge to closest floor drain. F. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping. G. Install vacuum relief valves in water heaters and hot-water storage tanks that have copper . lining. H. install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank . drains. Refer to Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties"for drain valves. I. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping.Thermometers are specified in Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages." J. Install pressure gages on water heater piping when and as indicated. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages." K. Install inlet and outlet piping manifolds for multiple water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through water heaters. Include throttling valves in outlet manifolds and thermometers in inlet and outlet manifolds. L. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate . general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Connect hot-and cold-water to units with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water piping circulating piping to unit with shutoff valve,check valve, and union. . 2. Connect gas piping to gas bumer with drip leg,tee, shutoff valve, and union; minimum size same as inlet connection. Gas piping is specified in Division 15 Section"Natural Gas Piping Systems." r 1 i i 3. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metals. r Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." i B. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 ' Sections.Arrange wiring to allow unit servicing. C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. D. Gas, Water Heater Vent Connections: Provide combustion air intake and exhaust vent system. Include manufacturers standard concentric vent termination fitting. Use 4-schedule 40 PVC pipe r and fittings with increaser fittings installed at vent connections to water heater and concentric vent termination fitting. Install combustion air intake and exhaust vent system in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. 3.04 COMMISSIONING A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. 1. Test and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. 3. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 4. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days'advance notice. B. Perform the following final checks before startup: • 1. Fill water heaters with water. 2. Charge compression tanks with air. 3. Check that piping system tests are complete. 4. Check for piping connection leaks. 5. Check for adequate combustion air. 6. Check for clear vents and devices. 7. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping. 8. Check operation of pumps and circulators. 9. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices. . C. Perform the following startup procedures: 1. Energize electric circuits. 2. Adjust operating controls. . 3. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. 1 r r SECTION-NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS r r PART 1 -GENERAL r 1.01 SUMMARY r A. This Section includes piping, specialties, and accessories for natural gas systems within building and to gas meters. B. This Section includes piping, specialties, and accessories for natural gas systems within building and to point indicated. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages"for pressure gages and fittings. . 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Low-Pressure Natural Gas Piping: Operating pressure of 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa)or less. • B. Gas Service: Operating pressure indicated. C. Gas Service: Pipe from gas main or other source to gas point of delivery for building being served. Piping includes gas service piping,gas valve, service pressure regulator-meter bar or meter support, and gas meter. D. Gas Delivery Point: Gas meter or service pressure regulator outlet, or gas service valve if . gas meter is not provided. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working-Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, minimum pressure requirements are as follows: 1. Low-Pressure Natural Gas Piping: 0.5 psig. B. Approximate values of natural gas supplied for these systems are as follows: . 1. Heating Value: 1000 Btulcu. ft. (37.3 MJ/cu. m). 2. Specific Gravity: 0.6. 3. Service Line Pressure: 15 to 20 psig (103 kPa to 138 kPa). • 1.04 SUBMITTAL S A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. • B. Product Data for each type of natural gas specialty and special-duty valve. Include • pressure rating, rated capacity, and settings of selected models. • C. Test reports specified in"Field Quality Control"Article in Part 3. D. Maintenance data for natural gas specialties and special-duty valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division I Section"Contract Closeout." 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code,"for gas piping materials and components; installations; and inspecting, testing, and purging. B. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code,"for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated control devices. C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards. D. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. Terms"Listed"and "Labeled":As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2_ Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications:A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises from end of one day to beginning of next day. . 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Notify each affected user when gas supply will be turned off. . B. Work Interruptions: Leave gas-piping systems in safe condition when interruptions in work occur during repairs or alterations to existing gas piping systems. . PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS(DN5O)and Smaller: a. Huber: J.M. Huber Corp.; Flow Control Div. b. Milliken Valve Co., Inc. C. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. 2. Gas Valves,2-1/2-Inch NPS(DN65)and Larger: a. Huber: J.M. Huber Corp.; Flow Control Div. b. Milliken Valve Co., Inc. 3. Gas Pressure Regulators: a. Equimeter, Inc. b. Fisher Controls International, Inc. . c. Maxitrol Co. d. Schlumberger Industries; Gas Div. i 2.02 PIPES AND TUBES A. Steel Pipe:ASTM A 53,Type E, electric-resistance welded or Type 5, seamless; Grade B; Schedule 40; black. 2.03 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings:ASME B 16.3, Class 150, standard pattern,with threaded ends conforming to ASME B 1.20.1. 1 B. Unions:ASME B 16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends conforming to ASME B 1.20.1. C. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.1, Classes 125 and 250. D. Steel Fittings:ASME B 16.9,wrought steel, butt-welding type; and ASME B 16.11, forged steel. 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS A. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section`Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods"for joining materials not included in this Section. B. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. C. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas. 2.05 VALVES . A. Manual Valves: Conform to standards listed or,where appropriate, to ANSI Z2 1.15. B. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS(DN50)and Smaller:AGA-certified, 125 psig (860 kPa)WOG minimum, equivalent to ASME B 16.33, lubricated, straightaway pattern, cast-iron or ductile-iron body. Include tapered plug, 0-ring seals, square or flat head, and threaded ends conforming to ASME . 61.20.1. C. Gas Valves, 2-1/2-Inch NPS(DN65)and Larger: MSS SP-78, Class 125 or Class 175 WOG, . lubricated-plug type, semi steel body,wrench operated,with flanged ends. 2.06 PIPING SPECIALTIES . A. Gas Pressure Regulators:ANSI Z21.18, single-stage, steel jacketed, corrosion-resistant pressure regulators. Include atmospheric vent, elevation compensator,with threaded ends conforming to ASME B 1.20.1 for 2-inch NPS(DN50)and smaller and flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS(DN65) . and larger. Regulator pressure ratings, inlet and outlet pressures, and flow volume in cubic feet per hour(liters per second)of natural gas at specific gravity are as indicated. 1. Appliance Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system pressure, with capacity and pressure setting matching appliance. 2. Gas Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory-or field-installed corrosion-resistant screen in opening when not connected to vent piping. B. Flexible Connectors:ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION • A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified in"Field Quality Control"Article to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section. B. Comply with NFPA 54 Paragraph"Prevention of Accidental Ignition." S 3.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING A. Extend natural gas piping and connect to gas distribution system (gas service)piping in location and size indicated for gas service entrance to building. 1. Gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and gas meter will be provided by gas utility. 2. Include gas distribution system piping to point indicated. B. Install shutoff valve, downstream from gas meter, outside building at gas service entrance. ® 3.03 CONCRETE BASES A. Install concrete bases of dimensions required by the local utility for gas meters. 3.04 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, except where otherwise indicated. B. Low-Pressure, 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa)or Less, Natural Gas Systems: Use the following: . 1. 1-Inch NPS(DN25)and Smaller. Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 2. 1-1/4-to 2-Inch NPS(DN32 to DN5O): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 3. 2-1/2-to 4-Inch NPS(DN65 to DN100): Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints. 3.05 VALVE APPLICATIONS . A. Use gas valves of sizes indicated for gas service piping, meters, mains, and where indicated. . 3.06 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Refer to Division 15 Section"Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods"for basic piping installation requirements. B. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of gas meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for . removal of plug or cap. C. Install gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers. D. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. • E. Connect branch piping from to or side of horizontal n . p P 9 P piping. iF. Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS(DN5O)and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection • to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices. G. Install dielectric fittings(unions and flanges)with 2 ferrous end connections, separated by insulating material, at outlet from gas meter and,where indicated, for ferrous piping. H.Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS(DN65)and larger connections. I. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of piping expansion and contraction. Install expansion joints, • expansion loops, and pipe guides as indicated. J. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down,screens in large end. reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect 3.07 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.Refer to Division 15 Section"Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods"for basic piping joint construction. 3.08 VALVE INSTALLATION A.Install valves in accessible locations, protected from damage.Tag valves with metal tag indicating piping supplied. Attach tag to valve with metal chain. 1. Refer to Division 15 Section"Plumbing Identification"for system identification and valve tags. B.Install gas valve upstream from each gas pressure regulator. Where 2 gas pressure regulators are installed in series, valve is not required at second regulator. C.Install pressure relief or pressure-limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if valve is free; test to determine pressure at which they will operate; and examine for leakage when in closed position. 3.09 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.Refer to Division 15 Section"Hangers and Supports"for pipe hanger and support devices. B.Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. 1/2-Inch NPS(DN15): Maximum span, 72 inches(1829mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2. 3/4-and 1-Inch NPS(DN2O and DN25): Maximum span, 96 inches(2438 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch(10 mm). 3. 1-1/4-Inch NPS(DN32): Maximum span, 108 inches(2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch(10 mm). 4. 1-1/2-and 2-Inch NPS (DN4O and DN5O): Maximum span, 108 inches(2473mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 5. 2-1/2-to 3-1/2-Inch NPS(DN65 to DN9O): Maximum span, 10 feet(3 m); minimum rod i size, 1/2 inch(13 mm). 3.10 CONNECTIONS A. Install gas piping next to equipment and appliances using gas to allow service and maintenance. B. Connect gas piping to equipment and appliances as indicated. C. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom forming drip, as close as practical to inlet for appliance using gas. 3.11 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING A. Install aboveground portions of natural gas piping systems that are upstream from equipment shutoff valves, electrically continuous, and bonded to grounding electrode according to NFPA 70. . B. Do not use gas piping as grounding electrode. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect,test, and purge piping according to NFPA 54, Part 4"Gas Piping Inspection, Testing, and purging"and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. • B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. r D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of gas meters, regulators, valves, and specialties. E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators. F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete. 3.13 ADJUSTING A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices. r r r r r r r SECTION - SCOPE OF WORK r r PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS r r A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications sections, apply to this Section. r 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK r r The following is not a general listing of work items to be provided under this contract, which is not necessarily all-inclusive, nor shall it limit the extent of the work or exclude any work shown or r specified and not listed: r A. Provide new underground primary electrical service entrance as required. GC and EC shall verify r as required, understanding the requirements for the New Outback Steakhouse. r B. Provide a new main service switchboard as required by the new work and"tie-ins". C. Removals of electrical equipment and devices as required by the new work and"tie-ins". r D. Provide new branch and distribution panel boards, protective devices, branch circuit wiring and raceways as required by the new work and"tie-ins". r E. Provide new interior lighting fixtures, controls and wiring devices as required by the new work and r "tie-ins". F. Provide power circuit wiring, raceways and devices for wiring of motors, appliances and r equipment furnished by other trades as required by the new work and"tie-ins". r G. Provide conduit, cable,and outlet system as required for complete data, telephone, and cable television systems as required by the new work and"tie-ins". r H. Provide conduit, cable, and outlet system as required for a new addressable fire alarm system as r required by the new work and"tie-ins". I. Operationally test and check all installed equipment. r J. Provide new exterior lighting fixtures, controls and wiring devices as required by the new work and "tie-ins". r K. Provide temporary wiring, lighting and power, as needed to suite the job requirements. Temporary r wiring and lighting must be performed and removed in accordance with the latest edition of the r NEC. r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r SECTION- BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL I 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary I Conditions and Division 1 Specifications sections, apply to this Section. ( 1.02 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations: EC: The Contractor performing the electrical work. MC: The Contractor performing the heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and mechanical work. PC: The Contractor performing the plumbing work. SC: The Contractor performing the sprinkler system work. GC: The Contractor performing the general building work. CM: The Construction Manager. References to the above designations are not intended to define contracts and/or r subcontracts but only as reference to where items are shown on drawings or described in ' specifications. ' B. Definitions: Concealed: Embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall furring, ' within partitions or hung ceilings(permanent or removable), in trenches, or in crawl t spaces. Exposed: Not installed underground or concealed. Noted: As indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Indicated or Shown:As indicated or shown on the drawings. Wiring: Conduits, fittings, wire,junction and outlet boxes, switches, cutouts, and receptacles and items necessary or required in connection with or relating thereto. 1 r 1.03 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Intent: 1. Provide all items and work indicated on the drawings and all items and work called for in the specifications in accordance with the Contract Documents. This includes all incidentals, equipment, appliances, services, hoisting, scaffolding, supports,tools, supervision, labor, consumable items, fees, licenses, etc., necessary to provide complete and workable heating,ventilating, air conditioning, electrical and plumbing systems. Perform start-up and testing of each item and system to provide fully operable systems. 2. Neither the specifications nor the drawings undertake to illustrate or describe all items necessary for the work; it is expected that, after review of the drawings and specifications, 1 the EC shall be completely familiar with the function of all items included and that his bid shall reflect the inclusion of all hangers, racks, inserts,etc., necessary for a complete and operable system. The EC shall provide offsets, fittings and accessories as may be ' required to meet such field conditions.The EC shall make all changes in equipment, ' locations, etc., to accommodate the work and to avoid obstacles at no increase in remuneration. 1 3. Items of work shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications shall be furnished and installed as appearing on both drawings and specifications. r 4. Equipment, conduit, etc., shall be installed to avoid interferences with the operation, ' servicing and maintenance of equipment. 5. Certain materials and-equipment shall be provided by other trades.The EC shall examine the Contract Documents to ascertain these requirements. Unless specifically indicated as being supplied or installed by others, all items of work shown on the drawings or indicated in the specifications shall be included by the EC in his bid. 6. All dimensions,which relate to the building shall be taken as construction progresses.All errors incurred as a result of the EC's failure to check or verify dimensions, measurements, etc., shall be corrected at the EC's expense. 7. The EC shall review the drawings for the work of other trades, informing the Architect of ' any conditions,which obstruct, interfere with, or in any way prevent him from completing his work in a first class manner. 8. The EC shall participate in the coordinated shop drawing procedure with the MC and PC. The EC shall note the location and elevation of all conduits 1-1/2"or greater. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical related work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified ' in other Division 16 sections. B. Work also includes minor items,which may not be shown or mentioned, but are necessary for a complete,working electrical instaHation. If, in the interpretation of contract documents, it appears that the drawings and specifications are ' not in agreement, the one requiring the greater quantity or superior quality shall prevail, as decided by the Engineer.Addenda supersede the provisions, which they amend. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:Applicable local, state and national laws, statutes, building codes and regulations shall govern the complete installation. D. Permits: Obtain permits and pay all fees required by the local inspecting authority. E. Reference Standards: The latest editions of the following codes, standards, and specifications shall be considered minimum requirements unless indicated otherwise: 1. National Electrical Code 1999(NFPA#70) 2. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA 101, 12A, 72D, 72E, 75) 3. New York State Uniform Fire Prevention&Building Construction Code (NYSUFPBBC) 4. New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code(NYSECCC) 5. Local Codes 6, Americans With Disabilities Act(ADA) 7. Public Health Service Regulations 1 r ' 8. Local Utility Standards and Regulations 9. Certified Ballast Manufacturer(CBM) r 10. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 11. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 12. Electrical Testing Laboratories(ETL) r 13. Independent Testing Laboratories(ITL) r 14. American Society of Testing&Materials(ASTM) 15. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) r 16. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) r F. Tests and Adjustments: The Electrical Contractor shall furnish testing equipment, instruments and r personnel to perform any test procedures and adjustments deemed necessary by the Engineer to r establish proper performance and installation of electrical equipment and materials. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings,wiring diagrams, and/or r equipment lists for the following equipment and material in accordance with criteria r outlined in Section 01300. r B. Description Shop Wiring Equipment r Drawings Diagram List r Light Fixtures X X(samples) Lamps X X X r Ballasts X X X r Fire Alarm System X X X Wiring Devices X X r Data/Telephone System X X X r Wiring Diagrams for fire alarm system shall be complete riser diagrams showing all devices, r locations and wiring connection. Shop drawings will not be reviewed without this information. r Equipment list shall indicate manufacturer and catalog/model series number of each item. r r C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Upon completion of the work, prepare and deliver to the Owner complete operating and maintenance manuals for systems and major equipment installed as r outlined in Division I of this specifications. Include all updated materials listed above in r submission, including as built wiring diagrams. M 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Make provisions for delivery and safe storage of all materials. Check and r properly receipt material to be"furnished by others"to contractor,and assume full responsibility for all materials while in storage with full visible identification and information. r B. Delivery of Equipment: Make the required arrangements with general Contractor for the r introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Protect equipment against weather, damage, and vandalism. r 1.07 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT r A. The EC shall, at his own expense, protect his work, material and equipment and is liable to injury r during the construction period. The EC shall be held responsible for all damages and theft until his r work is fully and finally accepted. r 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions: Field verify all conditions that will determine exact locations, distances, levels, dimensions, elevations, etc. Review all drawings of other trades and report any conflicts to the r r r A 1 M Architect,which will affect the project design, costs and schedules. B. Dimensional information used for layout and locations shall be taken from architectural or structural drawings used by the construction trades. C. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic and have no dimensional significance. Locations of ' equipment are to be as: 1. directed in the field 2. required for proper connection of equipment to b served 3. required for proper symmetry in the space involved 4. with deviations made only by the architect. D. Division 16 shall review the drawings of other divisions, exchange shop drawings with them and cooperate in the preparation or preparation of space layouts as required to avoid conflicts and interferences with the installation of other trades in advanced stages of construction. Refer to Division, "Project Coordination". E. The Owner or Owner's representative reserves the right to relocate an outlet or outlets, six(6)feet in any direction from locations indicated on plans, before roughing-in,with no change in contract price. 1.09 PREPARATION A. If products and materials are specified or indicated on the drawings for a specific item or system, those products or materials shall be used. If products and materials are not listed in either of the above, use first class products and materials, subject to approval of shop i drawings. B. All products shall be new, clean, undamaged, and free of defects and corrosion. C. All products shall be shipped and stored in a manner,which shall protect them from ' damage,weather and entry of debris. If items are damaged,they shall not be installed. The EC shall take immediate measure to obtain replacement or repair in order to maintain the schedule. D. The EC shall verify that all materials he or his suppliers select conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Transmittal of drawing and specification information to manufacturers supplying materials,and adherence to these requirements is the EC's responsibility.Approval of manufacturer's name by the Engineer does not release the EC of the responsibility for providing materials,which comply in all respects with the requirements in the contract documents. 1.10 ALTERATION WORK A. The EC shall inspect the site and become familiar with the condition of the premises and the scope and character of work required.Additional compensation for adverse field r conditions shall not be approved. B. The EC shall minimize interference with the working routine of occupied areas, by coordinating the performance of his work in a manner acceptable to all groups involved. C. The EC shall not interrupt any of the building's electrical services in any way without the expressed permission of the Owner.Ample written notice of shutdowns shall be given well in advance to the Owner. Interruptions and interference shall be made as brief as possible and only at times as stated by the Owner. When temporary loss of services is unavoidable, it shall be made at times as shall cause the least interference with the established routine. D. The EC shall obtain the Owner's permission before utilizing any room or any other part of the building as a shop. w r 1.11 PUNCH LISTS A. The EC shall receive punch list(s)prepared by the engineer. These punch list(s)shall contain items which need further attention by the EC in order to fulfill the obligations of the contract.These punch list(s)have space provided for the EC to sign off on each item when completed. The completion of the work listed on these punch list(s)and the return of these signed off punch list(s)to the engineer by the EC is required to complete the contract obligation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable electrical materials and equipment shall be new and of the type and quality specified or shown on drawings. They shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. and bear their label where standards have been established. 1 B. Permission to substitute equal or superior items of materials and equipment may be requested by following the procedure outlined in the Division 1 "Substitutions"of the project specifications. Completion date will not be extended because of any time lost due to consideration or installation of substitutions.All coordination of substituted equipment shall be the Contractor's responsibility. C. In purchasing materials and equipment to be furnished and installed under this contract ' the contractor shall convey to the Owner all rights and privileges extended by the various manufacturers thereof in the form of warranties and guarantees covering quality and i performance of such items. D. Fire-stopping for all low voltage cables passing through fire rated floors and walls shall be accomplished by the use of preformed square tubes with an intumescent material insert that adjusts automatically to cable additions or subtractions. Product shall be provided with steel wall plates allowing for single or multiple devices to be ganged together. Product shall be Specified Technologies Inc. (STI)EZ-PATH fire rated pathway. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All work described in these specifications or shown on the drawings and all work required by this Contract shall be executed in a thoroughly substantial and workmanlike manner by skilled mechanics in the various trades involved. Follow manufacturer's instructions for installing, connecting and adjusting all equipment. 3.02 CUTTING AND REPAIRING A. All normal cutting, drilling,chasing and patching required for accommodation of the electrical work shall be accomplished by the EC. Work shall be carefully laid out in advance and performed in a skilled manner.Any damage to the building piping, equipment shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 WELDING A. The EC shall perform all welding in a skilled and craftsmanlike manner by certified welders. verify that welds are free from cracks, craters, undercuts, arc strikes, weld spatter and any and all other surface defects.Any welds deemed unacceptable in size or configuration shall be cleaned,or rewelded completely at the discretion of the Owner or Architect.Any rework required shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.Any welding or cutting will require a"Hot Work Permit". 3.04 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT A. Install all equipment to permit removal(without damage to other parts)of coils, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts requiring periodic w 1 replacement or maintenance. Provide access panels in equipment,ducts, etc.,as i required for inspection of interiors and for proper maintenance. B. Arrange equipment to permit access to valves, cocks,traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of swinging doors and access panels. ' C. The EC shall provide the Owner with all special tools needed for proper operation, adjustment and maintenance of equipment. r 3.05 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Notify proper authorities for inspections of work required by applicable codes, rules or regulations. Completed work must be inspected and certified by an inspection agency approved by the Engineer. Systems to be inspected include: 1. Underground Work 1 2. Concealed Work 3. Distribution and Branch Circuits 4. Illumination System 5. Grounding System ' 6. Receptacles 7. Connections to Mechanical Equipment 8. Panelboards 9. Switchboards 10. Underground Primary Electrical Service B. Operational test will be performed on all electrical equipment as recommended by the applicable manufacturer. Test all wiring and connection for continuity and grounds before energizing any system. C. The grounding electrode system to include the column ground conductors shall be tested to show satisfactory grounding.All final tests of the grounding electrode system shall be made in the presence of the Architect or Engineer. The test shall be performed by the EC or his designated representative. A"Fall Off Potential Test"shall be performed on the grounding electrode system. The test equipment used to perform this test shall be designed specifically for Fall Off Potential" Testing. This test shall be performed with U.L. listed testing equipment. Resistance to ground shall in no case exceed ten (10)ohms. D. Prior to the acceptance of the completed work under this Contract,the EC shall balance and test the complete installation specifically accomplishing the following: 1. Load each panel individually, balancing the load on each phase by necessary recircuiting. Record loads. 2. Load distribution panels, balancing the load on each phase by necessary recircuiting. Record loads. 3. Make necessary changes in feeder connection to balance entire system. 4. Check for grounds, shorts, etc., on all fixtures, equipment, apparatus, etc., and leave system in satisfactory operating condition. 5. Load test various parts of the system as directed by the Engineer, to determine if excessive heat is developed in panels, switches,wiring, etc. E. Clean up, remove all waste material each day, and clean all lamps, lenses, lighting fixtures, cabinets, and electrical equipment prior to final inspection. 3.06 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION A. The EC shall personally supervise the work and shall have at all times a competent person, approved by the Architect, following the work to receive instructions and to act with authority for the EC. SECTION -WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The EC shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and incidental to, the installation of Wiring Devices as shown on the drawings, and/or as specified herein. B. Wiring devices are to consist of, but are not limited to, wall switches, ground type, polarized receptacles, and face plates and special wiring devices as indicated and/or specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide electrical wiring devices,which have been ULlisted and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction &installation of electrical wiring devices. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for general-and specific-purpose wiring devices. !i PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wall Switches: 1.All wall switches shall be similar in appearance, toggle type, federal specification grade,color as selected by the Architect. Provide ivory color unless otherwise noted. Single pole: Hubbell No. HBL 1221, or equal. Double pole: Hubbell No. HBL 1222, or equal. 3-way: Hubbell No. HBL 1223, or equal. 4-way: Hubbell No. HBL 1224, or equal. 2. Unless otherwise directed, equip each line voltage switch outlet with a switch of capacity and rating required for the load controlled as listed below: Load (watts) Capacity(amps) Rating(volts) 1-1800 20 120/277 1801-3000 30 120/277 3. Hazardous locations switches: Provide Class 1, Division 1, factory sealed unit r completely enclosed with no external field-installed seals, single pole, 125 VAC or 277VAC, 20 Ampere. Crouse-Hinds EDS, or approved equal. 4. Cover Plates: Installation: a. Provide smooth nylon cover plates in occupied areas, color to match device and as selected by the Architect. b. Provide smooth stainless steel 302/304 cover plates in unoccupied areas such as closets and maintenance rooms. C. Provide smooth stainless steel 302/304 cover plates on each device box installed in fire rated construction. ■ B. Convenience Outlets: Equip each location indicated on the plans with a federal specification grade duplex convenience outlet rated at 20 amperes with NEMA 5-20R. Provide ivory color unless otherwise noted. Install at points as shown on drawings. Hubbell No. 5352, or equal. a. Provide smooth nylon cover plates color to match device and as selected by the Architect. 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles: Provide federal specification grade, GFCI duplex receptacles, 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole 3 wire grounding type, per UL 2003 standards 943 Class A and 498. Hubbell No. GF53621, or equal. 3. "Weather Proof(WP) Receptacles:As noted on the drawings. Provide ground fault circuit protected Receptacle in°Raintite° box and cover assembly, per NEC 410- 57(b)and listed by UL. The receptacle shall remain weatherproof with the plug(s) inserted. Hubbell No. GF53621 in TayMac No. 10370, or equals. 4. Quadraplex Receptacles:As noted on the drawings. Provide two(2)duplex receptacles in a single 4'x 4"device box, 20 ampere, 125 volt, 1 phase 3 wire grounding type, Nema 5-20R, UL listed, federal specification grade. Single Faceplate. Hubbel No. (2)5352, or equal. C. Special Wall Devices: INCANDESCENT LAMP DIMMERS: Provide AC slide dimmer for incandescent fixtures;wattage as required for connected load, 120-volts,60 hertz,with linear slide-to-off control, ivory face, single-pole. Equip with electromagnetic filters to eliminate noise, RF and TV interference, and with 5-inch wire connecting leads. Provide Lutron lamp debuzzing coil(LDC-I6-TCP). Provide Lutron Hi- Power incandescent dimming modules as required to boost load capacity of dimmer to meet the load of the controlled fixtures. (Note: Dimmer maximum load is 2000 watts. A High Power dimmer module is required for loads greater than 2000 watts.) Lutron No. N-2000-IV,with HP-4,or HP6,as required. 2. INCANDESCENT LAMP DIMMERS: Provide single-pole or 3-way, slide to dim, rocker switch on-off, preset dimmers for incandescent lamps, 120 volt,60 hertz, and with electromagnetic fitters to reduce noise, RF and TV interference to minimum. Construct with continuously adjustable trim potentiometer and with anodized heat sinks. Provide 5-inch wire connecting leads. Provide Lutron lamp debuzzing coil(LDC-I6-TCP). Provide Lutron Hi-Power incandescent dimming modules as required to boost load capacity of dimmer to meet the load of the controlled fixtures. (Note: Dimmer maximum load is 1000 watts.A High Power dimmer module is required for loads greater than 1000 watts.) Lutron No. DV-10P-IV, DV-103P-IV, DV-3PS-IV,with HP-2, HP-4, or HP-6, as required. 3. LOW VOLTAGE LAMP DIMMERS: Provide AC slide dimmer for magnetic incandescent ballasts;wattage as required for connected load, 120-volts, 60 hertz,with linear slide-to-off control, ivory face, single-pole. Equip with electromagnetic fitters to eliminate noise, RF and TV interference, and with 5- inch wire connecting leads. Provide Lutron lamp debuzzing coil(LDC-I6-TCP). Provide Lutron Hi-Power low-voltage dimming modules as required to boost load capacity of dimmer to meet the load of the controlled fixtures. (Note: Dimmer maximum load is 1500 watts. A High Power dimmer module is required for loads greater than 1500 watts.) Lutron No. NLV-15004V,with HP-2, HP-4, or HP-6, as required. r r 4. LOW VOLTAGE LAMP DIMMERS: Provide single-pole or 3-way, slide to dim, rocker switch on-off, preset dimmers for r magnetic incandescent ballasts, 120 volt, 60 hertz, and with electromagnetic filters to reduce noise, RF and TV interference to minimum. Construct with continuously adjustable trim potentiometer and with anodized heat sinks. Provide 5-inch wire connecting leads. r Provide Lutron HiPower low voltage dimming modules as required to boost load capacity of dimmer to meet the load of the controlled fixtures. (Note: Dimmer maximum load is 300 watts. A High Power dimmer module is required for loads greater than 300 watts.) r Lutron No. DV-300P-IV, DV-303P-IV, DV-3PS-IV,with HP-2, HP-4, or HP-6, as required. 5. TELEPHONE WALL SERVICE OUTLETS: 1 Provide 2"x 4"galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel non-gangable device box with(1) 3/4" EMT stubbed up in wall above ceiling with end bushing.Telephone jack, cover plate, and wiring by others. 6. DATA WALL SERVICE OUTLETS: Provide 2"x 4"galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel non-gangable device box with (1) 3/4"EMT stubbed up in wall above ceiling with end bushing. Data jacks,coverplate, and cabling by others. 2.02 ADDITIONAL(SPARE) MATERIALS A. Provide extra materials as follows: r 1. Ten (10)percent extra switches-each type. 2. Ten (10)percent extra receptacles-each type. 3. Ten (10)percent extra wall plates-each type. 4. Five(5)extra weather proof receptacle box and cover assemblies. 5. Ten (10)percent extra special wall devices-each type. 6. Ten (10) percent extra special floor devices-each type. B. Additional materials are to be provided to the Owner in the original manufacturer's packaging. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's"Standard of Installation", in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements, and as indicated on the drawings and in this specification. B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting,electrical boxes and wiring work as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess R building materials, dirt,and debris. Where switches are ganged together, insulated barriers are required in switch electrical boxes between each switch. D. Install switches at points shown on the plans to control circuits, outlets, appliances, devices, etc., as indicated. E. Gang switches where two or more are required. Provide custom, multi-gang, cover plates as required to gang all switches at a location into a single cover plate. F. Install all wall switches such that up is"ON"and down is"OFF". G. Install all wall receptacles such that the grounding pin slot is facing"UP". R H. Install all wiring devices and cover plates after final painting has been completed. Clean all paint overspray off of conductor insulation so that color coding can be seen. 1. Install a bonding jumper from the grounding terminal on each receptacle(except isolated ground type)to the metal device box. J. GFCI Type receptacles are to be installed such that any`other devices"upstream"or "downstream"are not protected by the GFCI receptacle. Each receptacle indicated on the drawings with a"GFCI" is to be an independent device. K. Install floor service outlets such that finish trim rings or plates are flush with final floor finish. L. Install fire proofing sheet in back of each device box installed in fire rated construction. Provide metal cover plate on each device box installed in fire rated construction. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Install electrical identification in accordance with SECTION 16040"Identification". 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all connections to verify manufacturer's torque tightening specifications. B. After energization of circuitry, check all receptacles with receptacle circuit tester to verify proper connection of ground wire and correct polarity. Test all GFCI type receptacles with a GFCI receptacle tester with a test current of 7.5ma. (+1-5%). r SECTION -RACEWAYS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical raceways specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. The EC shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and incidental to, the installation of Conduit as shown on the drawings, and/or specified herein. C. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following: 1. Rigid Galvanized Steel(RGS) 2. Electrical metallic tubing(EMT). 3. Flexible metal conduit(FMC). 4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit(LTFMC-Sealtite). 5. Rigid non-metallic condt(PVC). 6. Conduit fittings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING 1 1 A. General:All conduit shall be 3/4fl minimum, 1" minimum for all underground conduit and special systems and 72" minimum for individual control circuits. B. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) shall be used: 1.For all sizes larger than 2". 2.Where exposed to mechanical injury. 3.Where exposed and not supported by a wall or column 10-0"or less above the finished floor. 4.In or below poured concrete slabs or walls. 5.Where exposed to wet, damp, or unheated areas. 6.In hazardous areas. C. Electric Metallic Tubing(EMT)shall be used: I. In concealed, clean, dry locations. 2. In exposed locations where RGS is not required. D. Flexible Metal Conduit(FMC)shall be used: 1. For recessed lighting pigtails(maximum length 6-0"). 2. Where conditions preclude use of solid conduit, but shall be kept to a minimum (maximum length 3-0"). 3. In concealed, clean, dry locations. E. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit(Seaitite)shall be used: 1. For motor connections and for flexible connections in unheated, damp or wet locations. 2. Where subject to corrosive fumes, vapors or liquids. 3. As required for connections to resiliently mounted equipment to prevent transmission of vibrations to the structure(maximum length T-O"). 2.02 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT A. Polyvinyl chloride(PVC)non-metallic conduit shall be heavy wall, rigid, schedule 80, approved for 90 degrees C conductors. PVC may be used: I. In or below concrete slabs on grade or in earth when expansion fittings are installed every 100'and riser elbows and conduit risers are RGS with bonded PVC or bituminous paint coating. 2. For ground system conductors. 2.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. General: Die cast, pressure cast or set screw fittings shall not be used. B. The following fittings are intended as a guide to quality. Fittings of equal quality as manufactured by T&B,Appleton, Steel City, O.Z., Raco, Crouse-Hinds, or Pyle National may be used: Locknuts T&B 140-153 Series Bushings, insulated T&B 1200 Series Bushings, malleable, insulated, grounding type T&B 3800 Series Chase nipples, insulated T&B 1900 Series Threadless rigid connectors, insulated T&B 8000 Series EMT connectors, insulated, raintight T&B 5123-5623 Series r EMT couplings, raintight T&B 5120-5620 Series Ground connections-pipe clamp T&B#2-#6 conduit hub T&B 3900 Series Liquidtight flexible conduit fittings, insulated T&B 5300 Series Flexible metallic conduit fittings, insulated T&B 3100 Series PVC Conduit fittings Same as conduit manufacturer Expansion fittings,with bonding jumper Appleton"XJ"Series 1 Conduit seals Crouse-Hinds 1 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install underground conduits a minimum of 36' below finished grade. Minimum 1"diameter for all underground conduits. B. Unless authorized by the architect,all conduit is to be concealed except in the following areas: Boiler Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, Electrical Rooms, or as required for Specific pieces of equipment.All wiring in these areas shall be run in conduit. Flexible conduit or MC cable shall not be used. C. Route concealed conduits in a direct line, with long sweep bends and offsets. Route exposed conduits parallel to or perpendicular to building lines,be neat in appearance and supported at regular intervals so as to be rigid with pipe straps, hangers, or approved methods.Where conduit runs are exposed in occupied spaces,the routing of such conduits shall be subject to the Architects review. Submit proposed routing to the Architect prior to installation for his review. Methods of fastening conduit supports to building structural members shall be approved by the Structural Engineer. D. Support conduits with brackets, straps or trapeze hangers suitably anchored to building structure. Space hangers a maximum of 10'-0"on centers, 8-0°for pipe clamps, or as required by NEC. Use closer spacing if such is recommended by unit manufacturer. Carefully coordinate hangers in walls and ceiling with work of others. Provide special hangers as required to allow installation of work of other trades in same general areas as electrical work. Where conduit is run above a lay4n ceiling, do not support the conduit from the ceiling support system. Maintain a minimum of 6"clearance from flues, steam pipes and hot water lines. E. Conduits shall be continuous from enclosure to enclosure and terminated with double locknuts or connectors to ensure electrical continuity throughout the conduit system. The conduit system shall be continuously grounded but can not be used as the circuit ground in place of a grounding conductor. F. Minimum size conduit shall be 3f4'for all home run conduits and shalt be sized to carry one(1)additional future circuit. G. Cap all conduits during construction to prevent entrance of any foreign material. Swab or brush out conduits before pulling conductors. H. Grounding fitting shall be installed at all junction and pull boxes so as to provide a continuously grounded conduit system. I. All empty conduits shall be provided with pull wire for installation of cable. • J. Install locknut and bushing on all conduit terminations not supplied with a conduit. K. Install a bonding type locknut or grounding bushing on al conduit terminations at junction and pull boxes. Install a bare copper bonding conductor from each locknut and bushing to a bonding screw on the box. r L. Conduits installed below grade shall be sealed at all couplingjoints with Teflon pipe thread ' seal tape and covered with approved paint material. M. Seal around all conduits where they enter the building below grade with Thruwall and Floor Seals, O.Z. Manufacturing Co., or equal. ' N. Seal all conduits where they enter building with sealing compound, Johns-Manville "Duxseal", or equal. 0. All fire alarm, communications, control,or any low voltage cables passing through a wall, / floor or ceiling shall be within a Schedule 40 PVC conduit/sleeve. Provide separate sleeves for various classes of wiring. Do not install low voltage and line voltage wiring within same sleeve. P. Seal around all conduits/sleeves passing through floors,fire partitions, and smoke partitions using approved methods,fitting and compounds which maintain the smoke and/or fire rating of the partition or floor, in accordance with the details indicated on the ' drawings and with specifications. Q. Seal between all cables and sleeves which pass through floors,fire partitions, and smoke ' partitions using approved methods,fitting and compounds which maintain the smoke and/or fire rating of the partition or floor, in accordance with the details indicated on the drawings and with specifications. R. Preparation: Clean threads, ream ends, make tight joints(all conduit runs in slabs, in fill, in exterior surfaces,etc., shall be made and tested water-tight), equip stub ends with / bushings, cap or plug open ends of conduit during construction. S. Location: Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, conduit runs which are to be installed ' overhead shall be run above piping of other trades. 3.02 INSTALLATION IN CONCRETE AND MASONRY A. Conduit runs in concrete and masonry work shall be: 1. Approved as to location,type of bends, pitch, and rigidity of supports prior to 1 pouring of concrete or laying up of block. 2. Securely held in place during construction-provide template to hold groups of conduits terminating together or which pass through firewalls to floors together. B. Where slabs are to be waterproofed, install conduit in floor slab above waterproofing, r unless otherwise directed. C. Where conduits penetrate waterproofing walls,footings, etc., provide special sleeve and fittings as required to maintain waterproofing integrity of the unit. D. Where conduits penetrate floors of wet areas such as mechanical rooms, provide special r sleeve and waterproofing as indicated on the drawings to prevent water on the floor from passing through the hole around the conduit. ' E. Where conduits are run in concrete work, they shall be run parallel or perpendicular to structural members, and shall not be permitted to exceed the sizes listed below: Thickness of Concrete Maximum Conduit Size 6 inch 2 inch 4 inch 1 inch F. Conduit shall not be permitted to pass through(cutting required)structural members without expressed written permission of the Structural Engineer. 3.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. All fittings in wet locations(i.e., exposed to weather, buried in concrete or fill)shall be watertight. B. Install expansion fittings for all conduits crossing building expansion joints. ' C. Seal all conduits in hazardous areas per N.E.C. Seal all conduits between areas of widely different temperatures with seal on warmer side of wall. D. PVC conduits fittings, elbows and cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer as the conduit. Fittings shall be solvent welded in accordance with manufacturer's i` recommendations. �r E. Insulated bushings shall be installed on all conduit sizes 1-1/4"and larger and on all empty conduits utilized for special systems(data, telephone, CCTV), regardless of size. SECTION -WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wires and cables specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical wire and electrical cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of wire and cable in this section include the following: Copper conductors Type MC cable C. Applications for wire, cable and connectors required for project are as follows: Power distribution circuitry Lighting circuitry r Motor-branch circuitry 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire and cable products of types and ratings required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. r PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 600 VOLT COPPER CONDUCTORS A. General:All conductors shall conform to the latest requirements of NEC, UL, ASTM, and NEMA. B. Wire shall be annealed bare copper per ANSJIASTM B3, UL 83, and Federal Specification JC-30A with 600 volt insulation, be stranded(except for#10 AWG and smaller may be solid), and be minimum size#12 AWG(Except for control wiring and signal circuits). C. Insulation: Provide THHN/THWN insulation for all conductors, except XHHW insulation may be used for conductors#4 and larger. D. Conductors#10 and smaller shall be factory color-coded by integral pigmentation with a separate color for each phase and neutral.#8 and larger shall have either stripes, bands, hash marks or color pressure-sensitive plastic tape according to the following chart: �j SYSTEM VOLTAGE CONDUCTOR 120/208V.3 PH, 4W Phase A Black . Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Ground Green E. Ampacity of conductors shall be rated for 75 degrees C regardless of temperature of conductor insulation when combining circuits in one conduit. Derate conductors and increase size per NEC when installing multiple circuits in a raceway, M utilizing 750C ampacity table. F. Cables provide UL-type factory-fabricated cables of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials and j acketing/sheathing as for services indicated. 2.02 600 VOLT COPPER CABLES Type MC: Metal-clad cable with separate insulated green ground conductor and aluminum bond wire attached to interlocked armored jacket; used in dry locations;concealed in wags and above ceilings only. NOTE: The use of type NM or NMC("Romex")or type AC(Armor Clad"BX")will not be acceptable. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors in compliance with manufacturer's A` written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECAs`Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Power Branch Circuits are identified as follows: 1. Home runs are indicated by arrow(s)with circuit designated and shall be in conduit. 2. Conduit sizes other than 3/4"minimum and wire sizes other than#12 are to be sized per NEC unless indicated otherwise on drawings. 3. All devices following a circuit arrow shall be connected to the circuit designated unless noted otherwise. 4. All exposed branch circuits shall be run in conduit. 5. Route a maximum of three circuits in a single homerun conduit. 6. Each branch circuit is to have a dedicated code sized ground conductor. 7. Each 12OV branch circuit is to have a full size dedicated neutral conductor. C. Lighting Circuits and Controls are identified as follows: 1. Home runs are indicated by arrow(s)with circuit designated and shall be in conduit. • 2. Conduit sizes other than 3/4"minimum and wire sizes other than#12 are to be W 1 sized per NEC unless indicated otherwise on drawings. 3. All fixtures following a circuit arrow shall be connected to the circuit designated unless noted otherwise. 4. All exposed lighting branch circuits shall be run in conduit. 5. Route a maximum of three lighting circuits in a single homerun conduit. 6. In spaces where conduit runs are not shown, connect all lighting fixtures to switch or switches in space or area designated. See legend for identification. 7. Connect lighting circuits to phases indicated. 8. 3 lighting branch circuit home runs within the same conduit can share a single code sized ground conductor. 9. 3 non-dimmed lighting branch circuit home runs within the same conduit can share a single code sized neutral conductor. 10. Provide a dedicated code sized neutral conductor with each dimmed incandescent phase conductor. D. Phase connections to all panelboards shall be"A", "B" "C" from left to right when facing panels. E. Increase conductor size as required due to availability. Minimum feeder conductor sizes are shown on Drawings. If increased, be responsible for associated feeder conduit size and increased ground conductor size per NEC. F. Do Not Use:Wire and cable with bruised, cut, or abraded insulation;wire and cable that does not pass a continuity test; any wire and cable delivered to the job site with ends of conductors not sealed to prevent entrance of moisture. G. Ground and continuously polarize systems properly throughout following the color coding specified. H. Provide conductors of the same size from the protective device to the last load. Make conductor length identical for parallel feeders. J. Install wiring in conduits buried in plaster or in poured concrete after the encased medium is set and dry and then only after conduits have been swabbed out. K. Attach pulling lines to conductor cables by means of either Woven basket grips or pulling r eyes attached directly to the conductors. The maximum pulling tension shall be limited to 1,000 pounds using woven basket grips.The maximum pulling tension shall be limited to .008 pounds per circular mil area of conductor cross-section when using pulling eyes attached to the conductors.All conductor pulls made with an electric winch or pulling machine shall be made with a pulling tension gauge to assure that the specified tensions are not exceeded. Rope hitches shall not be used.All cables to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. L. Support conductor in vertical raceways. One cable support shall be provided at the top or as close to the top as practical, plus a support for each additional interval of spacing per table 300-19a of the NEC. M. Provide slack wire for all future connections with ends of wire taped and blank box covers installed. N. Do not bend cables,either permanently or temporarily during installation to radii less than that recommended by the manufacturer. . 0. Provide a separate isolated ground conductor from the panelboard to each receptacle indicated on the drawings as an isolated ground receptacle. P. All grounding conductors within branch circuits and feeders shall be of the insulated type. S Q. All Cables and Conductors in conduit provided by the Contractor shall be supported by r the Contractor from the structure of the building independently of all other support systems provided by other Vcontractors(i.e.: ceiling grid systems and their support wires, ductwork, piping, etc.). 3.02 TAPS, TERMINATIONS, AND CONNECTIONS A. Taps and splices for#10 wire and smaller shall be made with pressure type self-insulated spring connectors. For wire#8 and larger,taps and splices shall be insulated with rubber and/or ` plastic electrical tape compatible with the conductor insulation. Split bolt or"servits"shall not be allowed. Keep splices to a minimum. B. Feeders connections shall be made with ideal Type ND,or approved equal connector for use on copper to copper;aluminum to aluminum;or, copper to aluminum conductors. Size to ` match mating conductors. Insulate similar to Hylink type YSA C. Feeder Taps shall be made with pressure type connectors, mechanical type with . companion covers. ideal Type GT with cover type GIC, or approved equal. D. Heat Shrink insulators shall be By T&B,600 volt rated, heat shrink at 250-275 degrees F. E. Any aluminum conductors larger than No.6 AWG shall have a compression type termination before being mechanically fastened to a device such as a circuit breaker, lug, transformer spade, etc. 3.03 MC CABLE INSTALLATION A. All MC Cable is to be concealed. Maximum lengths shall be 6-0"in ceilings or as required from fixture to fixture or device to device. Metal-clad cable with separate insulated green ground conductor and aluminum bond wire attached to interlocked armored jacket; used in dry locations; concealed in walls and above ceilings only. B. Route MC Cable in a direct line,with long sweep bends and offsets. Route MC cable parallel to or perpendicular to building lines. C. Support MC Cable with brackets, straps or trapeze hangers suitably anchored to building structure. Where MC Cable is run above a lay-in ceiling,do not support the cable from the ceiling S support system. Maintain a minimum of 6"clearance from flues, steam pipes and hot water lines. D. MC Cable shall be continuous from enclosure to enclosure and terminated with appropriate connectors to ensure electrical continuity throughout the raceway system. E. All home runs to panels for MC Cable branch circuits shall be in conduit Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4?and all home run conduit shall be sized to carry one(1)additional future circuit. `HOMERUN"is defined as any circuit collecting branches in walls, light fixtures, etc. and running to panelboard circuit breaker. F. Install junction boxes with screw covers where required to facilitate installation of MC Cable and to keep cable lengths to a minimum. Size in accordance with N.E.C., mount in an accessible location and label cover with circuit numbers and destination. G. MC Cable shall not be used underground or penetrate through roofs,floors,concrete walls, etc. H. MC Cable installation shall be allowed for branch receptacle and lighting circuits concealed within GWB wail construction. Single multi-wire(multi-circuit)cables can not be used. 1. MC Cable shall not be allowed for motor circuits,feeders or special equipment These circuits shall be run in conduit and seaitite. 3.04 UNDERGROUND CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION A. Conductors shall have the ends sealed to prevent water from entering the conductor i system while pulling.A suitable lubricating compound shall be used to pull conductors through 1 1 conduit. The compound shall not be injurious to the conductor jackets and shall not harden or become adhesive. No lubricant shall be applied to the first and last five(5)feet of the conductor. A feeding tube shall be used to prevent the conductor from scraping on the pull box frame or duct opening. B. Splice conductors only in manholes, accessible junction boxes and accessible outlet boxes. Splices shall be permitted only where indicated on drawings. Splicing materials shall be compatible with the conductors, insulations and protective jackets on the conductor. Splices shall be suitably designed and the proper size for the conductors being spliced. Splices must insulate . and protect the conductors not less than the insulation and protective jackets which protect the conductors. In locations where moisture may be present,the splices shall be watertight. In manholes,the splices shall be submersible. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization,test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry, and also for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected. B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups,energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. SECTION-PULL BOXES ANi-JU1-4CTION BOXES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The EC shall furnish all labor, materials,equipment, and services necessary for, and incidental to, the installation of Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes as shown on the drawings,and/or as specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEMA 250-Enclosures for electrical equipment(1000 volts max.) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes:ANSIINEMA OS 1. Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes,with screw-on covers;of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation;with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. B. Sheet Metal Boxes larger than twelve(12)inches in any dimension shall have hinged covers. C. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Lockouts: Provide corrosion-resistant punched- steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors,of types and sizes,to suit respective installation. D. Cast Metal Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Locations installations: NEMA 250;type 4 and type 6, flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box, UL listed as rain tight. • Galvanized cast iron box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. E. Stainless Steel Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Locations Installations: UL 508, NEMA type 4X, flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box, UL listed as rain tight. Formed 304 Stainless Steel box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. F. Cast Metal Boxes for Hazardous Location Installations: NEMA Type 4, internally threaded, surface-mounted junction box, UL listed as suitable for wet locations and Class 1, Division 1 locations.Zinc plated malleable or ductile iron body and cover with 0-Ring gasket and tapered threaded hubs. 1 G. Underground Pull Boxes: Provide heavy duty, non conductive polymer-concrete and fiber reinforcement polyester pull boxes,48"wide,48"long,48"deep with stainless steel hardware, integral bottom, corrugated walls, bolted adjustable two piece cover with skid resistant surface. Provide knockouts and pulleys to match concrete duct bands. Pullbox as manufactured by CDR Systems Corporation. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION • A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. C. Ail pull and junction box covers shall be accessible. D. Install pull or junction boxes with screw covers where required to facilitate pulling or tapping of conductors. Provide junction boxes or pull boxes at locations indicated or as approved by the Architect in straight runs at intervals of 125 ft for conduit sixes one inch and smaller and i 100 ft for conduit sizes larger than one inch. Also provide junction or pull boxes wherever three or �r more 90 degree bends occur in runs unless additional boxes are required by NEC. Size pull and junction boxes in accordance with N.E.C., mount in an accessible location and label cover with circuit numbers and destination. SECTION-SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of supports, anchors, sleeves, seals and access doors is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or specified in other Division 16 sections.All wire and cable shall be provided with sleeves through interior and exterior walls. B. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves and seals sp ecified pecified in this section include the following: 1. Clevis hangers 2. Riser clamps . 3. C-clamps 4. I-beam clamps 5, One-hole conduit straps 6. Two-hole conduit straps 7. Round steel rods 8. Lead expansion anchors 9. Toggle bolts 10. Wall and floor seals • 11. Roof penetration portals 12. Roof pillow block supports 13. Fire rated low voltage cable wall seals C. Supports, anchors, sleeves and seals furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are 1 M 1 specified as part of that equipment assembly in other Division 16 sections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supporting devices of types, sizes,and ratings required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTNG DEVICES AND SLEEVES A. General: Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's standard materials,design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option.All equipment shall be UL listed and fire rated for penetration through rated assemblies. B. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: 1.Clevis Hangers: For supporting 2"rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel;with 1/2"dia. hole for round steel rod;approximately 54 pounds per 100 units. 2.Riser Clamps: For supporting 5"rigid metal conduit; black steel;with 2 bolts and nuts, and 4"ears;approximately 510 pounds per 100 units. 3.C-Clamps: Black malleable iron: 1/2" rod size;approximately 70 pounds per 100 units. 4.1-Beam Clamps: Black steel, 1-1/4"x 3/16"stock; 3/8"cross bolt; flange width 2"; approximately 52 pounds per 100 units. 5.One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 314"rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; approximately 7 pounds per 100 units. 6.Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 314"rigid metal conduit,galvanized steel; 3/4" strap width;and 2-1/8"between center of screw holes. 7.Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2"rod size;galvanized steel;approximately4pounds per 100 units. 8.Round Steel Rod: Black steel; 1/2"dia.;approximately 67 pounds per 100 feet. 9.Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2"rigid metal conduit, black steel;approximately 200 pounds per 100 units. C. Anchors: Provide anchors of types,sizes and materials indicated, with the following construction features: 1. Lead Expansion Anchors: 1/2"approximately 38 pounds per 100 units. 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16"x 4";approximately 5 lbs. per 100 units. D. Sleeves,chases,and openings through floors,walls,ceilings and structural members shall be arranged in conjunction with the Architect and related trades to be installed in an approved manner.Ali wiring through wails or floors shall be provided with sleeves. 1. Provide factory-assembled watertight watt and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe,or tubing passing through concrete • floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. Provide UL rated assemblies for penetrations in rated walls, floors,and ceilings. 2. Seal all openings through fire-rated walls and floors after installation of conduits, . cable trays, wireways, etc., in a manner to preserve fire rating of walls and floors with UL listed material. 3. Conduits passing through exterior concrete walls or footings below grade shall have a thruwall conduit entrance seal O.Z.type FSK, or equal and the assembly shall be sealed watertight with sealing compound, Johns-Manville"Duxsear or equal. 4. The EC shall furnish and install a pipe portal system at all conduit locations which i I penetrate the roofing system. Each complete unit shall include a base with a molded sealing ring on a collared opening, and an EPDM compression molded rubber cap. The ' cap and base shall be locked with a"Weather Tite Pressure Seal'.The portal shall include stainless steel clamp sealing units.All connections to the roof shall be made in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's recommendations. The pipe portal shall ' include a prefabricated roof curb, a laminated, acrylic coated ABS cover with pre-punched ' mounting holes and a double molded sealing ring on the collared opening. Portals Plus Inc. RC4A,or equal. 5. The EC shall furnish and install roof-to-pillow block type pipe stands for all roof mounted conduits. Pillow block shall Lexan block with metal roller seated in Teflon. Strap conduit loosely to pillow block to prevent conduit from slipping off unit. Space pillow blocks per NEC conduit support spacing requirements. Miro Industries 24R, or equal. 6. Provide factory-assembled 3"square sleeves with integral firestopping suitable for sealing around low voltage cables passing through walls. Sleeves are to be able to be . grouped together to form duplex or triplex sleeves. Provide UL rated assemblies for penetrations in rated walls,floors, and ceilings. Provide Specified Technologies Inc. "EZ-Path"fire rated pathway, or equal approved by Engineer. 2.02 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with • snaplock joint,welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal: 3"and smaller,20-gage;4"to 6", 16-gage;over 6", 14-gage. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, in . exterior walls, or fire rated assemblies. PART 3-EXECUTION • 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES, SLEEVES, AND SEALS A. Install hangers,anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to . insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA and NEC and ANSIINEMA for installation of supporting devices. . B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work,as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C. Install hangers,supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure.Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings indicated. D. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. E. Install sleeves for all wire and cables, including low voltage wiring, run through interior and exterior walls and provide with proper seals to achieve rating of wall penetrated. • SECTION-SERVICE ENTRANCE PARTI -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The EC shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and incidental to, the installation of the Service Entrance as shown on the drawings, and/or specified herein. B. Arrangements with Utility Company for permanent electric service including payment of Utility Company charges for service. C. Underground service entrance from utility company pad mounted transformer to building service disconnect switch. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ` A. System voltage: 120/208 volts, 3 phase,4 wire,60 Hertz. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Utility Company: Niagara Mohawk Power Corporation 1. Representative:Tom Kalinski Telephone: 518-583-5728 B. Install service entrance in accordance with Utility Company's rules and regulations. 1.04 EXISTII'-G CONDITIONS A. Field verify all existing conditions,and report any discrepancies. 1 1.05 APPROVALS A. Obtain written, signed and dated utility company approval for the following: 1. Primary feeder conduit installation, prior to installation of cable. 2. Transformer pad curb, and grounding installation. 3. Main switchboard shop drawings. 1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 TRANSFORMER PAD A. As detailed on the drawings, and complying with all requirements of the serving utility. 2.02 SERVICE CONDUITS A. Complying with Specification SECTION -"Raceways". • B. Underground Primary Lines: Rigid Steel Conduit • C. Secondary Lines: Schedule 80,extra heavy wall rigid non-metallic conduit. 2.03 SERVICE CONDUCTORS A. Primary Lines: By utility company. • B. Secondary Lines: Complying with Specification SECTION -"Wires&Cables". PART 3-EXECUTION S 3.01 GENERAL A. Make arrangements with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the project. B. Prior to commencing work on the service, contact the utility company and the governing municipal authorities to ascertain their latest standards and requirements. Obtain service regulations and requirements and any other detailed information pertaining to the service for the project. Specifically obtain and comply with Niagara Mohawk Power Corporation Electric System Bulletin No. 754/759, October 2003 edition. The installation of all service equipment, components and wiring shall comply with all applicable requirements of the utility company and the National Electric Code. I 3.02 DIVISION OF WORK i A. Refer to drawing for exact division of work. All work to be by Division 16 unless specifically indicated otherwise. "Work" includes furnishing and installing unless indicated otherwise. 3.03 WORK BY DIVISION 16 A. Primary riser conduit from 10' up utility company pole to service transformer, and grounding provisions. B. Transformer pad, curb,and grounding. C. Secondary service conduits and conductors, including terminations at each end. D. Service disconnect switch. ' E. Metering instrument provisions and conduits to meter cabinet(s). Installation of utility company furnished meter cabinet(s). ' 3.04 WORK BY SERVING UTILITY A. All pole line work and primary feeder conductors and terminations. B. Pad-mount service transformer. C. Utility revenue metering instruments, meters, and related wiring. 3.05 REMOVAL OF EXISTING ELECTRIC SERVICES A. Coordinate switchovers of electrical services with the Owner and Construction Manager. Obtain Owner's written agreement to schedule for service switchovers, prior to commencing this 1 work. Perform actual switchovers so as to keep down time to a minimum. Switchovers to be performed during off-normal business hours as approved by the Owner. r B. Remove all existing service equipment, conduits,conductors, and all related appurtenances, after they are no longer needed.Arrange for the serving utility to remove their existing transformers, metering equipment and overhead lines, etc. • C. Remove all debris left from demolition work, and restore affected grounds and building surfaces to match surrounding areas. SECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The EC shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and incidental to, the installation of Circuit Breaker Panels as shown on the drawings, and/or specified herein. • 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All circuit breaker panels and branch breakers must be UL listed. B. Circuit breaker panels must meet the NEC wire bending space requirements. C. Main circuit breaker panelboard (MDP)shall be service entrance rated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Unless described otherwise, provide flush(surface where indicated)mounted circuit breaker type panels. Panel fronts are to have a door(circuit breakers)in door(circuit breakers&wiring gutters)in trim with concealed hinges and flush type tumbler lock.All panels shall be keyed alike. Doors in excess of 48"high shall be equipped with a three- point catch and vault handle with integral tumbler lock. Panel shall be dead front, safety type and be multi-section as noted or as necessary to comply with NEC. 1 B. Multi-section panels shall have a single cover with a separate door for each section. ` C. Panels shall be equipped as shown on panel schedule with: 1. Main Switch: Where called for or required by NEC-Capacity same as busbars, ' except as noted. (M.L. = main lugs only; M.A. = main same amps as busbars; figure=ampacity of main device). 2. Main busbars: Number and capacity noted,with suitable lugs for conductors feeding same. On mum-section panels, mains in each section shall be size as noted. a. All Panels-Main,distribution,sub-distribution, light and power shall have full capacity copper busbars through out, of size called for in panel schedule. b. Provide sub-feed lugs on panels as indicated on panel schedules. C. Feed through busbars are prohibited. 3. Ground: Solid copper bar with lug for each branch circuit, main,and bond to panel 1 frame. 1 4. Neutral: Solid copper bar with lug for each branch circuit. 5. Branch Circuits: Circuit breakers shall be the thermal magnetic type(with thermal element in each pole)with the frame size, ampere rating and number of poles indicated on the drawings. Multiple-pole breakers shall operate on a common-trip principle. Breakers shall be rated minimum 22,000 ampere I.C. (unless otherwise noted).Also note special ground fault requirements specified or depicted on the drawings.Circuit breakers are to be bolt-on molded case,thermal-magnetic trip,with UL Listed RMS symmetrical interruption ratings as per drawings.All circuit breakers feeding heating, air-conditioning, or refrigeration equipment must be"HACR"rated circuit breakers.All circuit breakers feeding bedroom branch circuits in residential construction must be"AFCI"type circuit . breakers. See electrical panel schedule notes on drawings. D. Make and Construction:General Electric, Cutter Hammer, Square D, I.T.E. Siemens, or acceptable equal. 1. Cabinets-Code gauge steel with all surfaces prime coated and painted with two coats of standard gray paint for surface mounted panels. 2. Provide NEMA 3R rated panels in all exterior locations and NEMA 4X rated panels in all wet locations such as garage bays, loading docks, kitchens,etc. • 3. A paracentric lock with spring catch is to be furnished for door. Provide two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 4. A circuit directory card and card holder on the inside of each door. 5. Branch circuit breakers shall be numbered to correspond with numbering shown on drawings. 6. All parts of equipment must be by same manufacturer. 7. All panels, including the main distribution panel, shall be by the same manufacturer. E. See drawings for required Circuit Breaker Panels and sizing information. 2.02 WARNING SIGNS A. Provide a painted embossed aluminum"WARNING-Arc Flash and Shock Hazard- Appropriate PPE Required"sign which comply with ANSI Z535.4-1998 on the inside face of the panel cover above the panel directory. These signs shall also include the specific parameters of the hazard and the PPE level for the working personnel.The sign shall be similar to the following, with all spaces completed for each specific piece of equipment: WARNING Arc Flash and Shock Hazard Appropriate PPE Required "_"inch Flash Hazard Boundary cal/cm2 Flash Hazard af"inches I PPE Level, "VAC" Shock Hazard when cover is removed ""inch Limited Approach ' inch Restricted Approach- ""inch Prohibited Approach- Equipment Name:" PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's"Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices ' to ensure that products fulfill requirements. 1 B. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are r permanently and mechanically secure. Install panelboards straight and true. Center interior in trim opening. Properly support, secure and adjust panelboards and trims. Unless otherwise indicated, install panelboards with top circuit breaker handle six feet, six inches above finished floor. r C. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation . work. Provide electrical connections within enclosures. D. Fill out panelboard's circuit directory card upon completion of installation work. See Section 16195E,"Electrical Identification". 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION A. Panelboards shall be identified on the front cover with its name and available voltage. Identification shall be in the form of laminated plastic nameplates, black face with the i letters engraved into the white background, minimum 1/4"high. Plates shall be drilled on each end for sheet metal screw attachment. No"DYMO"or similar tape type labels will be allowed. The following is an example of the nameplate layout: PANEL PP1 480/277 VOLT, 3 PHASE,4-WIRE SECTION -FUSES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The EC shall fumish all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and incidental to, the installation of the Fuses, as shown on the drawings, and/or as specified herein required for equipment's operation, and/or required by the NEC. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fuses shall be UL listed. B. ANSi Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI C97.1 pertaining 1 to low-voltage cartridge fuses. 1 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of overcurrent protective devices. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All circuits above 600 amperes,except where otherwise shown on the drawings, shall be protected by time-delay, current limiting fuses to interrupt fault currents of up to 200,000 ` amperes symmetrical.These fuses shall hold five hundred percent(5 00%)of rated ' current for a minimum of four(4)seconds,and must open at twenty(20)times rated current in 0.01 seconds or less. Fuses shall be Bussmann Low-Peak Class L, fuses, or as ' scheduled on the drawings. 1 B. All circuits,600 amperes or less, except where otherwise shown on the drawings, shall be ' protected by dual-element current limiting fuses to interrupt fault currents of up to 200,000 amperes symmetrical. In addition,these fuses shall hold five hundred percent(5 00%)of r rated current for a minimum often(10)seconds, and provide thermal protection against poor contact conditions. Fuses shall be Bussman Low-Peak fuses,"Class R"or as scheduled on the drawings. C. Fuses for individual motor circuits,except where otherwise shown on the drawings, shall be approximately 125%of the motor full load current but shall not exceed 175%of the full load current. Fuses shall be Bussman Low-Peak or Fusetron Fuses. OCIass RK"dual- element, time delay fuses. D. Upon completion of the project, the EC shall furnish the following spare fuses and a spare fuse cabinet(s)installed adjacent to all switchboards. Bussman type SFC. 1. Ten(10)percent of each type and ampere rating. 2. A minimum of three(3)fuses of each type and ampere rating. • SECTION-SWITCHES: DISTRIBUTION AND DISCONNECT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The EC shall furnish all labor, materials,equipment, and services necessary for, and incidental to, the installation of Switches: Distribution and Disconnect as shown on the drawings, and/or specified herein. B. Switches shall be fused or nonfused as required, and/or scheduled on the drawings; NOTE special fusing requirements given below and fuses specified in Section 16475. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE i A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of circuit, motor disconnect switches, and remote control switches of types and capacities required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to construction and installation of electrical circuit, motor disconnect devices, and remote control switches. C. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches". Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches which have been UL- listed and labeled. D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds. Pub. No. KS 1,"Enclosed Switches"and 250,"Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. All nonfused disconnect switches shall be rated for 600 volt service unless specified otherwise,fused switches can be rated for only the voltage served. ` B. Switches shall be of one, two, or three pole with solid neutral as required and/or scheduled on the drawings, unless switched neutral is specifically required and/or indicated on the drawings. r C. Each switch shall have an ampacity as listed on the drawings and/or as required for the service intended. D. Distribution and disconnect switches in the range of thirty to six hundred amperes 1 shall be General Electric Type TH,or equal, Heavy Duty Interrupter Switches in NEMA-1 or NEMA-3R enclosure as herein after described. 1. Line and Load side lugs shall be of the solderless type. 2. Operating handle shall be integral with the enclosure,and shall be equipped with: . a. Door interlock. b. Provision for padlocking in open position. C. Capable of being mounted in a vertical or horizontal position. 3. Switch shall be equipped with line shield guards to prevent contact with line parts. 4. Switch contacts shall be composed of silver alloy, be of the quick make, quick break type. Switch blades shall be visible and shall be dc-energized when switch is in the open position. 5. Switch shall be capable of being mounted either vertically or horizontally as required by the specific installation. 6. In the fused configuration, switches shall have an interrupting capacity of at least 100,000 amps symmetrical at 600 volts when used with Class RK-5 time delay current limiting fuses, and 200,000 amperes symmetrical at 600 volts when used with Class RK4 current limiting fuses. E. See drawings for required switches and sizing information. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION i . A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches where indicated, complying with . manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure . that products fulfill requirements. B. Secure all switches to building construction in a neat, level and workmanlike . manner at points noted and/or required. Installation shall comply with NEC. C. Coordinate circuit and motor disconnect switch installation work with electrical . raceway and cable work and equipment plan, as necessary for proper interface. D. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, and motors and' controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated PART 1 -GENERAL . 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The EC shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and incidental to, the installation of Emergency Lights and Exit Lights as shown on the drawings, and/or specified herein. . B. The system shall consist of: built-in fluorescent battery packs, wall-mounted self- contained emergency lighting units,wall mounted emergency central battery systems and ceiling-mounted remote fixtures and self-contained exit signs. • 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Emergency lighting equipment Exit Signs to have UL label. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ® A. Submit manufacturer's product data under provisions of Division I and Division 16. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fluorescent Battery Packs-Lithonia No. PSi 100, or equal. 1. Shall be a self-contained unit, designed to provide automatic emergency lighting for a minimum of 90 minutes upon failure or interruption of normal electrical power. 2. Housing shall be constructed of polycarbonate. 3. Emergency power source shall be a 10.8-volt, rechargeable, sealed nickel cadmium battery. 4. The charger shall be of solid-state design and include law voltage battery disconnect, current-limiting, thermal and short-circuit protection. 5. Unit shall be rated for 1201277 volt,60 Hz power supply. . 6. Controls shall include a"test'switch and light-emitting diode to indicate unit "ready"condition. B. Emergency Lighting Battery Unit(ELU)-Lithonia No. ELM2-120/277-SD or equal: 1. Shall be a self-contained unit, designed to provide automatic emergency lighting for a minimum of 90 minutes with an output rating of 125 watts upon failure or interruption of normal electrical power. 2. Housing shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant material. 3. Emergency power source shall be a 12-volt, rechargeable, maintenance-free, lead-calcium battery. 4. The charger shalt be of solid-state design and include low voltage battery disconnect, current-limiting, thermal and short-circuit protection. 5. Unit shall be rated for 120/277 volt,60 Hz power supply. 6. Controls shall include a"test switch and light-emitting diode to indicate unit .ready"condition. C. Exit signs-L.E.D. (Light Emitting Diodes)Exit sign(EX)with red acrylic optical diffuser, white polycarbonate frame and face plate, 120/277 volt, sealed, maintenance-free nickel cadmium i battery with 90 minute capacity, number of faces and direction of arrows as indicated on i drawings, mounted as indicated on drawings. Lithonia No. LQM-5- 1 20/277-ELN I =refer to drawings for number of illuminated sides D. Wire sizes to remote fixtures and exit signs for emergency circuits to be sized per manufacturer's recommendations to account for voltage drop. ' 2.02 ADDITIONAL(SPARE)MATERIALS A. Provide extra materials as follows: 1. Fifteen (15)percent extra lamps-each type. 2. Ten(10) percent extra lenses-each type. 3. One extra exit sign-each type. B. Additional materials are to be provided to the Owner in the original manufacturer's packaging. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with Article 700 of the NEC latest edition. B. Coordinate installation locations shown on drawings with architectural drawings and construction manager. SECTION-ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Extent of addressable fire alarm and detection systems work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of addressable fire alarm and detection systems in this section include the following: . 1. Combination, Non-Coded,Addressable 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of addressable fire alarm and detection systems,of types, sizes,and electrical characteristics required, whose products i have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer. Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with addressable fire alarm and detection system installation work similar to that provided for project.The Contractor must be a New York State licensed Fire Alarm installer. i C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of addressable fire alarm and detection system components and accessories. D. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide addressable fire alarm and detection system i components which are UL-listed and labeled. 1.03 SUBMITTAL S A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on addressable fire alarm and detection systems including, but not limited to, roughing-in diagrams and instructions for installation, operations and maintenance, suitable for inclusion in maintenance manuals. Also include project specific riser diagram, device cut sheets, device wiring diagrams, and NAC circuit load and voltage drop calculations. I B. Include data in operation and maintenance manuals per specifications. 1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS A. General: Non-coded, addressable, microprocessor based type system with manual and automatic alarm initiation, analog addressable smoke detectors. ' B. Functional Description: Provide a complete addressable fire alarm and detection system with the following functions and operating features: ' 1. Priority of Signals:Automatic response functions shall be accomplished by the first address initiated.Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first address r shall not be altered by subsequent alarms. An alarm signal shall be the highest priority. Supervisory or trouble signals shall have second-and third-level priority. Signals of a higher level priority shall take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower priority condition occurred first.Annunciate all alarm signals regardless of priority or order received. 2. Non-interfering: Provide addressable, powered, wired, and supervised system so a signal on one address does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other address.All devices shall be manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.Systems that require the use of batteries or battery backup for the programming function are not acceptable. 3. Signal Initiation:The manual or automatic operation of an alarm initiating or supervisory operating device shall cause the FACP to transmit an appropriate signal including: a. General alarm. b. Smoke detector alarm. . C. Door release. d. System trouble. e. Fan shutdown. 4. Silencing at FRCP: Switches shall provide capability for acknowledgment of alarm; supervisory, trouble, and other specified signals at the FRCP;and capability to silence the local audible signal and light an LED(light emitting diode). . Subsequent alarms shall cause the audible signal to sound again until silenced in turn by switch operation. Restoration to normal of alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions shall extinguish the associated LED and cause the audible signal to i sound again until the restoration is acknowledged by switch operation. 5. Power Loss Indication: Sound trouble signal at the FACP upon loss of primary power at the FACP and the annunciator. Illuminate the emergency power light at both locations when the system is operating on an alternate power supply. 6. Annunciation:Annunciate manual or automatic operation of any alarm or supervisory initiating device both on the FACP and on the remote annunciator indicating the location and type device. 7. General Alarm:A system general alarm includes: a. Indicating the general alarm condition at the FACP and the system annunciator. b. Identifying the device that is the source of the alarm (or its zone) at the FACP and the system annunciator. r C. initiating audible and visible alarm signals throughout the building. d. Initiating automatic recall operation of elevators. e. Closing fire and smoke doors normally held open by magnetic door holders. f. Stopping supply and return fans. g. Closing smoke dampers on system. h. Initiating transmission of alarm signal to remote central monitor station. 8. Smoke Detector in individual Hotel Room a. Upon activation and completion of alarm verifications of a hotel room smoke detector. 1) The system powered hotel room smoke detector sounder base annunciates; in addition,a trouble condition is indicated at the fire alarm control panel and remote annunciators. 2) For ADA rooms,the system powered hotel room smoke detector with sounder base and strobe annunciates.A trouble condition is indicated at the fire alarm control panel and remote annunciators. ` 3) Upon alarm activation of subsequent(2-1)separate hotel room device or general alarm device a general alarm shall be annunciated throughout the building 9. Manual station alarm operation initiates a general alarm. ' 10. Smoke detectors in the stairwells(smoke hatch operation). a. Upon activation of the detector and completion of alarm verification all responses in Item 2 shall occur. r b. A control module shall activate opening the smoke hatch. 11. The activation of a sprinkler valve supervisory(tamper)switch shall activate the system ` supervisory service audible system and illuminate the display at time building remote annunciator and the building fire alarm panel.The system shall recognize the difference between a valve tamper activation and opens and/or grounds on the inflation circuit wiring. It shall be possible to ' silence the audible alarm while retaining the visual indication until the problem is corrected.. 12 Monitoring of ground fault conditions shall indicate a separate trouble condition and a system trouble condition at the control panel and remote annunciator. 13. Trouble conditions shall be indicated at the building control panel and remote annunciator by an audible trouble signal and trouble indicating light without causing a false alarm to be sounded. Upon restoration of the system to normal condition,the audible trouble signal sounds again to indicate the abnormal position of the switch(ringback feature). 14. Alarm,trouble and supervisory signals shall be able to be reset at the fire alarm panel(FACP)and fire alarm remote annunciator panel(FARA) 15. Permissible Signal Time Elapse:The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of any fire alarm or fire detection system alarm inflating device and its indication at the FACP is ten seconds. 16. Circuit Supervision: Indicate circuit faults with both a zone and a trouble signal at the FACP. Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and(LED)indicating light The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP is 200 seconds. C. Extra Materials: 1. General: Furnish extra materials matching products installed, as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage,and identified with [abets clearly describing contents. 2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed, but • not less than one. 3. Smoke Detectors, and Heat Detectors: Fumish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units of each type installed but not less than one of each type. 4. Detector Bases: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type installed but not less than one of each type. 5. Combination homistrobe: Fumish quantity equal to 10%of the number of units provided. 6. Strobes: Furnish quantity equal to 10%of the number of units provided. D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following manufacturers: 1. Cerberus Pyrotronics. • r r 2. Notifier; Div. of Pittway Corp. 3. Simplex Time Recorder Co. 4. EST E. Materials and Equipment 1. Manual Pull Stations a. General: Double-action type, fabricated of metal or polycarbonate, and finished in red with molded raised letter operating instructions of contrasting color. Stations requiring the breaking of glass are not acceptable. b. Reset: Key-or wrench-operated reset station switch, double pole, double throw, and rated for the voltage and current at which they operate. Provide stations with screw terminals for connections. C. Addressability: Provide pull stations with a communication transmitter and receiver having a unique identification and status reporting capability to the 2. Smoke Detectors FACP. a. General: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signalling Systems." Provide the following features: b. Factory Nameplate: With serial number and type identification. C. Operating Voltage: 24-V d.c., nominal. d. Self-Restoring: Provide detectors that do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. e. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated encapsulated electronic components mounted in a module that connects to a fixed base with a twist-locking plug connection. The plug connection shall require no springs for secure mounting and contact maintenance. Provide terminals in the fixed base for building wiring. f. Visual Indicator. Connected to indicate detector has operated. g. Addressability: Provide detectors with a communication transmitter and receiver having a unique identification and status reporting capability to the FRCP. 3. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features and characteristics: a. Detector Sensitivity. Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent per foot smoke obscuration when tested in accordance with UL 268. b. Sensor. Infrared detector light source with matching silicon cell receiver. 4. Addressable Thermal Detector. Rate compensated I fixed temperature type with plug-in base and alarm indication lamp. Provide detectors with a communication transmitter and receiver complete having a unique identification and status-reporting capability to the FRCP. 5. Addressable Duct Detectors: Provide Detectors which are of the intelligent photoelectric type in a duct housing with sampling tubes, remote indicator with keyed remote test and reset, and provide continuous analog monitoring of the units sensitivity and alarm verification from the FACP. Detectors shall be UL 268A listed,24 VDC, rated for air velocities from 300 to 4000 feet per minute, having two Form-C auxiliary contacts, and have powered outputs for remote LED indicators. F. Alarm Indicating Devices General: Equip alarm indicating devices for mounting as indicated. Provide terminal blocks for system connections. 2. Addressable interface Units: Unit designed to monitor system component not equipped for multiplex communication with FACP and transmit identification and status to that terminal. Provide units with a communication transmitter and receiver complete having a unique identification and status-reporting capability to the FACP. 3. Addressable Visual Alarm Signals: 24-V d.c. strobe lights utilizing high-intensity,white or clear, optic lens, and xenon flash tube. Provide the word"FIRE"engraved in minimum 1 inch high red letters displayed on the unit Provide with lamps having minimum peak intensity of 15, or 75 candela, and a constant 1 Hz flash rate regardless of input voltage. 15 candela units are to be used in corridors and rooms no greater than 20'x 20'. 75 candela units are to be used in rooms no greater than 40'x 40'. Rooms which are greater than 40'x 40'are to have multiple strobe units. Comply with strobe intensity and location regulations per CABO/ANSI A117.1-1992. 1 a. Simplex No.4905-9940 White. 4. Addressable Combination Signals: Provide factory-combined audible and visible alarm units which meet the requirements of the individual hom and visual unit specifications into a single mounting unit where indicated a. Simplex No. 4903-945315CD White b. Simplex No.4903-94551 1OCD White G. Magnetic Door Holders General: Magnetic door holders will be provided by the G.C. E.C. to wire. H. Fire Alarm Control Panel(FACP) Generat: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units for Fire Protective Signalling Systems." 2. Cabinet Lockable steel enclosure.Arrange panel so all operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure.If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control panel, provide • exactly matching modular unit enclosures. Provide cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. Identify each enclosure and each component by an engraved red laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the enclosure nameplate shall not be less than 1 inch high. Identify individual components and modules within the cabinets by engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplates. 3. Systems: Provide for separate and independent alarm and supervisory systems in the FACP. The alarm initiating zone boards in the FACP shall consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module removal is not acceptable. 4. Control Modules:Types and capacities to perform all functions of the fire alarm system. Provide local, visible,and audible signals to notify of any alarm, supervisory, and trouble condition. Provide each type of audible alarm with a distinctly different sound. 5. Zones: Make provision in the FACP for all alarm and supervisory zones indicated. Provide an addressable module for each of the existing zones in the existing building fire alarm system and connect into this new addressable fire alarm system. 6. Resetting: Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory,or trouble signal while the alarm or trouble condition on the system still exists. 7. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls:Arrange to provide the basic interface between human operator at FACP and addressable system components, including annunciation and supervision. Provide a display with a minimum of 32 characters, arranged to display alarm,supervisory,and component status messages. 8. Visual signal module: Provide visual signal synchronization module(s)in the FACP to synchronize all strobes. Provide a third synchronization wire from this module(s)to each visual signal strobe. a. Simplex No. 4905-99 14, or equal. 9. Instructions: Provide a typeset, printed,or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a location observable from the FACP. Describe steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all condiitions: normal, alarm, and trouble. Obtain approval for instructions before mounting. Remote Annunciator: 1. General:Provide remote annunciator with 32-character alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display(LCD)and five (5)Light Emitting Diodes(LED's)identical to display in Fire Alarm Control Panel.Annunciator to mimic display in FACP.All alarm,trouble,and status information shall be accessible through the remote annunciator keypad with proper password. J. Emergency Power Supply 1. General: Components include battery, charger,and an automatic transfer switch. 2. Battery: Sealed lead-acid or nickel cadmium type. Provide sufficient capacity to operate the complete alarm system in normal or supervisory(nonalarm)mode for a period of 24 hours. Following this period of operation on battery power, the batteries shall have sufficient capacity to operate all components of the system, including all alarm indicating devices in alarm or supervisory mode for a period of 15 minutes. 3. Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfer the load to the battery without loss of signals or status indications in the event of the failure of primary power. 4. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining the batteries at full charge. In the event batteries are fully discharged, the charger shall recharge them fully within four hours. Charger output shall be supervised as part of system power supply supervision. K. Auto-Dialer: 1. Provide a fire control communicator which is two zone,digital, UL listed for NFPA 71 and 72C applications, dual telephone lines, primary and alternate telephone lines, communicates using BFSK or pulsed single-round fast format, automatic test reports every 24 hours,two sockets for optional additional relays, phone trouble LED, phone trouble buzzer. a. Radionics Model: D2071 C,or equal b. NOTE:Verify exact needs&requirements with owner before ordering L. Wiring Methods: 1. Conduit and Conductors: Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. Unless otherwise specified within the Installation Manual of the specific equipment being used, all field ' wiring shall be minimum#16(solid)or#14(stranded)copper conductors, installed in separate conduit, maximum 40%full, and shall be approved for use as Fire Alarm cable.All notification appliance circuits(NAC)shall be loaded no greater than 70%of full load.The maximum voltage drop allowable for NAC circuit calculation is 10%.Audible and Visible signals shall be wired on separate circuits. Conduit of proper size shall be installed from the Control Panel: Equipment to field devices. ' 2. All field devices shall be mounted upon U.L. Listed Electrical junction boxes. r 3. All splices in field wiring shall be made in U.L. Listed Electrical junction boxes. 4. All Electrical junction boxes shall be labeled as"Fire Alarm System"with decal or other approved markings. The Fire Alarmll-ife Safety Installation shall comply fully with all local, State and National Codes,and the Local Authority having Jurisdiction(AHJ). 5. Conduit shall enter into the Fire Alarm control panel backbox only at those areas of the backbox which have factory conduit knockouts. 6. All field wiring shall be completely supervised, In the event of a primary power failure, disconnect standby battery, removal of any internal modules,or any open circuits in the field 1 wiring; an audible and visual trouble signal will be activated until the system and its associate field wiring are restored to normal condition. 7. Open cable shall be allowed above ceilings, in attics and in other areas allowing surface wiring if so approved by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.All cable shall be protected where entering or leaving a junction box or device box with a portable cord straight grip connector such as Bridgeport#770-4, or equal. 8. Cable shall be the type listed for Fire Alarmll-ife Safety use and shall be installed per NEC Article 760. 9. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit,junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29. 10. All exposed cable below 84 inches from the surface of the finished floor, or to other locations where the cable may become exposed andlor damaged, must be within a steel conduit. 11. Conduits must also be provided in elevator shafts and hoistways. Cables within ducts or plenums must conform with the specifications of NEC Article 3 00-22. r 12. Provide plenum rated cable where required by NEC. M. Riser and wiring diagrams prepared by engineer are not intended as final installation drawings but only as a guide for bidding. Install system based on final wiring drawings prepared by the manufacturer of the system. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install addressable fire alarm and detection systems as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instruction,and complying with applicable portions of NEC, and NECA's "Standard of Installation". ? B. Manual Pull Stations: Unless otherwise indicated mount semi-flush in recessed back boxes with operating handles 48"above finished floor. ` C. Smoke Detectors: Install detectors indicated to be ceiling mounted not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Install detectors located on the wall at least 4 inches but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling. For exposed solid joist construction, mount detectors on the bottoms of the joists. On smooth ceilings, install detectors not over 30 ft. apart in any direction. Install ' detectors no closer than 5 ft. from air registers. D.Audible Alarm Indicating Devices: Install not more than 96"above the finished floor nor less than 6" below the ceiling. Unless otherwise indicated, install homs on flush mounted back boxes with the device operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location r into a single unit. E.Visual Alarm Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm hom. Install not more than 96"above the finished floor and at least 6"below the ceiling. F.Fire Alarm Control Panel(FACP): Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 6 ft. above the finished floor. G. Wire Guards: Provide wire guards on smoke detectors, heat detectors, and hom/strobe units in storage rooms and mechanical rooms. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION A.Install electrical identification in accordance with Division- 16 Basic Materials and Methods section "Electrical Identification". 3.03 INSTALLATION OF BASIC WIRING SYSTEM MATERIALS A.Install wiring, raceways,and electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with Division-16 Basic Materials and Methods sections"Raceways", "Wires and Cables", and"Electrical Boxes and Fittings". 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspect relays and signals for malfunctioning, and where necessary, adjust units for proper operation to fulfill project requirements. B.Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of fire alarm and detection system equipment. C.Provide three service organization inspections for each system at four-month intervals during the year following final acceptance. Correct defects found in the system at the time of these inspections. D.The contractor must retain the services of the fire alarm system manufacturer for the following minimum requirements: 1. To perform and assist the electrical contractor in the installation of the fire alarm system. 2. Perform testing of all devices(pull stations, smoke and heat detectors and A/V units, etc.) for alarm, supervision and trouble conditions. 3. Provide two(2)-4 hour training sessions(separate days)dedicated to training the owner starting current of the motor; and to ensure compliance with all prevailing electrical codes. F. The EC shall size, circuit breakers and fuses for motors as directed by MC's coordinating representative. The MC shall bear all costs for electric changes caused by equipment substitutions. PART 2-PRODUCTS(NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3-EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) SECTION -TELEPHONE, NETWORK DATA&NETWORK VIDEO PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS A. The`CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT"and"DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS"shall be a part of this section. 1. Any work not complying with the specifications contained herein will be rejected. 2. Rejected work shall be brought into compliance at no additional cost to the Owner. B. See contract drawings for additional specifications. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provision of the following: 1. Faceplates 2. Modules 3. Data Communications Racks 4. Data Patch Panels 1 5. Telephone Termination Blocks ' 6. Backboards and Mounting Boards 7. Coaxial Cables for Cable TV ' 8. Unshielded Twisted Pair(UTP)Cables for Data and Telephone Network 9 Connectors 1.03 REFERENCES A. EIAITIA 568B-Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard (ANSI I EIAITIA-568) (including EIA/TL&Standard for Category Six, 568-B-2-1) B. EIAITIA 569-Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces(ANSIIEIA/TIA-569-latest version). C. EJA/TIA 570-Residential and Light Commercial Telecommunications 1 Wiring Standard(ANSL`EIAITIA-570-latest version). D. EIAITIA 609-Grounding and Bonding(latest version). ' E. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code(latest version). ' 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Structured Cabling Solution:An Ortronics Category 5e cabling solution is specified for this project. The wiring will be certified using a Link Autotest that complies with the Draft 7 or higher EIAITIA 568B standard. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. All work associated with this project shall comply with, and the specifications contained herein shall be subordinate to, government laws and regulation at all levels, which may apply. The Owner shall be notified immediately if a conflict is discovered between these specifications and an applicable law or regulation, and the work affected by the conflict shall be temporarily suspended pending resolution. B. All work associated with UTP data and telephone wiring shalt comply with the most current installation and testing practices,standards, and specifications set forth in EIA/TIA 568B(currently Draft 9a, 568-B.2-Addendum 2) EiA/TiA 570, EiA/TIA 609, and all other . applicable EIAITIA standards. C. The Contractor is strongly encouraged to terminate and test a 90-meter sample of the . specified data cable to determine its electrical length. If the electrical length exceeds 90 meters,the cable should be incrementally shortened until the electrical length equals 90 meters. This sample can serve as a guide for the longest cable that should be able to pass the Category 5e Link Autotest. During the project planning process, if the Contractor determines that the shortest available cable path for any data cable will exceed the . electrical length of 90 meters, the Engineer shall be notified immediately. D. All work associated with coaxial cable wiring shall comply with the most current CAN industry standards. ` 1.06 TESTING AND LABELING EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. A Microtest OMNiScanner2 and OMNIRemote2, both running OMNIScanner Flash Software Version 4.02, are required to test the data cables. OMNtScanner ScanLink and PC Utilities Version 5.21 or later should be installed on the personal computer used with the OMNIScanner2. The test equipment must be capable of performing a Category Se Link 1 Autotest B. A Microtest PentaAcanner+with 2-Way Inj ector+both running software Rev. 5.0 or higher is required to test telephone and video cables.Additionally,telephone cable tests will require a Krone 568A Test Adapter Cord for Microtest(pin 66472 780-00),and an RJ45-to-RJ1 1 adapter that maps T568A to USOC;video cable tests will require two(2) "F"-ti-RJ45 adapters(using RG6 cables, each less than 3 inches in length)that map the coaxial center conductor to RJ4S pin 3 and the coaxial braid to RJ45 pin 6. New, custom "Autotest"must be configured into the PentaScanner+in order to print the saved telephone and video cable test results. Requirements for these custom configurations are ' described in sub-section 4.01. C. An industrial labeling system equivalent to the Panduit LS-5 for creating wire markers. D. An electric labeling system equivalent to the Brother P-TOUCH for creating faceplate labels,patch port labels,and termination block labels. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Seven(7)copies shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.After reviewing,the Engineer will keep one Mcopy and return the remaining six copies to the Architect for distribution to the Owner and Contractor. B. Before any work may begin,the Contractor shall submit the following: ' 1. A letter certifying that the test equipment and software to be used,the tests to be performed,and ' documentation to be submitted,shall meet or exceed the specifications contain herein. 2. Copies of factory calibration certificates for all Microtest test sets to be used to perform the ' specified tests.Test sets with calibration dates older that one(1)year,or whose calibration has been compromised,shall not be used. 3. A letter that identifies the Contractor employees who will perform the specified tests.This letter shall certify that the employees understand the tests and are qualified to operate and configure the test sets. 4. Detailed specifications for any material,testing equipment,or labeling equipment substitutions that the Contractor may request.Approval is not automatic. ' C. Upon completion of work the Contractor shall submit the following: S1. As-built drawings. r 2. Printouts,generated by the Microtest test sets,for every cable installed. Printouts shall include the Contractor's name;test name(e.g.CAT5e LINK Autotest);Circuit ID(which MUST match the cable label for the cable under test);Test Result(it must"PASS");scanner and injector serial numbers; software version;test date;cable type;building name;floor number;Telecommunications Room number;patch panel port number(must be same as Circuit ID);the test data itself. Each printout shall be signed and dated by the Contractor employee who performed the test.Signature and date stamped are permitted. S 1.08 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant all materials and workmanship to be free from defects for a period of one(1) year from date of acceptance. B. Provide a manufacturer's warranty for a period of no less than fifteen(15)years on entire data cabling system. PART 2-PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturer for patch panels,standard faceplates, non-standard data-only faceplates, faceplate modules, and cable management panels: Leviton, Panduit or XMark/CDT. B.Acceptable manufacturer for self-terminating"F"connectors: LRC Electronics Incorporated or Leviton. C.Acceptable manufacturer for Data Communications Racks,Cable Runways, and Accessories: Chatsworth Products Incorporated, Leviton or Panduit. 1 D.Acceptable Manufacturer for Coaxial Cables(plenum and non-plenum): Belden Wire&Cable Company or Mohawl/CDT. E Acceptable Manufacturer for coaxial cable Crimp Connectors: Gilbert Engineering Company. F.Acceptable manufacturer for Unshielded Twisted Pair(UTP)Cables(plenum and non-plenum): Berk- Tek Incorporated, Belden Wire&Cable Company or Mohawk/CDT. M G. Acceptable manufacturer for cable testing equipment Microtest Incorporated, Phoenix, AZ, 85016, 800-526-9675, www.microstes.com r H.Substitutions: Substitutions must meet or exceed the"acceptable" manufacturer's specifications, in all respects, for the materials, cable testing equipment, and labeling equipment specified herein.The burden of proving this lies with the Contractor.Approval is not automatic, nor is it guaranteed. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Cable-UTP Data/Voice 1. Berk-Tek 4-pair Category 6 UTP cable non-plenum. a. Color: blue for data;yellow for voice B.Cable-Coaxial Video 1. Belden RG6 coaxial cable, p/n 11 89A for non-plenum. a. One(1)for each standard faceplate if cable length is less than 120'. 2. Gilbert RG6 crimp connector, p/n GF-6-AHS/342 for non-plenum. ' 3. Belden RG1 1 coaxial cable, p/n 9064 for non-plenum. a. One(1)for each standard faceplate if cable length is greater than 120' but less than 200'. ' 4. Gilbert RG11 crimp connector, p/n GF-11-AHS/460 for non-plenum. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Cables Cables-General a. UTP data cables shall be terminated according to the EIA/TIA 568B standard(currently Draft 7). • b. All cables shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike-actually a craftsmanlike-manner. C. Each cable shall have a 1'service loop on its faceplate and a 3'service loop on it . Telecommunications Room or tap end. d. Cables shall not be lashed in any location that will be made inaccessible by future stages of construction. e. Splicing of cables is not permitted. f. When painting or dust-producing construction activities are active, the Contractor shall protect the exposed portion of these materials and remove the protection when it is no longer required. g. 4-pair UTP telephone cables for voice shall be terminated at the block assemblies at the telephone D-mark location. 2. Cables-UTP Data/Voice a. UTP data cables shall be terminated onto patch panels in room number or room number/faceplate number sequential order starting with first position of the top patch panel installed in the left-most rack(assuming multiple panels and racks). b. UTP data cables shall also be terminated onto the data jacks of each standard faceplate. 3. Cables-Video(CTV) a. Video cables shall be terminated onto patch panel in room number or room number/faceplate number sequential order starting with first position of the top patch panel installed in the ` left-most rack(assuming multiple panels and racks). b. Video cables shall, however, be connected to the"F"connector of each standard faceplate by the Contractor. B. Connectors Coaxial cable connectors shall have a correctly sized hexagonal crimp, shall be electrically and mechanically sound, and shall have no exposed braid or foil. C.Labels Cable a. Cables shall be labeled with industrial-grade, self-laminating wire markers printed from an industrial labeling system equivalent to the Panduit LSS. b. Wiremarkers shall be uniformly installed on both ends of each cable. On the faceplate end, labels shall be installed at the mid-way point on the 1'service Imp. On the Telecommunications Room end, labels shall be installed between the service loop and the patch panel or termination block. C. Wire markers shall be positioned, and the cables themselves shall be routed and/or ` secured, in such a way that causes the wire markers to be visible to the Owner with little ' or no effort. d. Wire markers shall be long enough to make 1 VZ revolutions around the cable ensuring that the marker's printed surface is covered by the tail-end of the marker's clear surface. 2. Faceplate ' a. Faceplates shall be labeled with 3/8"black characters on clear tape printed from an electronic labeling system equivalent to the Brother P-TOUCH. b. Room/outlet labels shall be placed behind the clear cover of the top faceplate identification area on standard faceplates and non-standard data-only faceplates. C. Data jack labels("L"for left and"R"for right)shall be placed behind the clear cover of the bottom faceplate identification area on standard faceplates and non-standard data-only faceplates. d. Room/outlet labels shall be affixed to non-standard telephone-only faceplates, centered below the jack. 3. Patch Panel r a. Patch panels shall be labeled with black characters on clear tape printed from an electronic labeling system equivalent to Brother P-TOUCH. b. Label content shall be properly sized to fit within the designated label space above each ` port. To achieve this, the longest port label shall dictate the font size used for the entire patch panel. C. One continuous label for every 24 ports shall be affixed to the patch panel. 4. Labeling Conventions a. Labels can have up to 3 parts:a room number, a faceplate number and a jack position. ® The room number must be obtained from the Related Drawings.When rooms have more than one faceplate, numeric faceplate locations must be assigned and deployed in a logical and systematic fashion such as left-to-right or clockwise. Data jacks must be assigned left and right designations. PART 4 TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION 4.01 TEST EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION A. Prior to testing the data cables, self-calibrate the OMNIScanner2, then select Category Se 7 Link Test as the default Autotest. B. Prior to testing the telephone cables, self-alibrate the PentaScanner+, select"USOC AUTO"as the default Autotest;select"USOC AUTO"as the default Cable; select"TWP" as the default jack. C. Prior to testing video cables, self-calibrate the PentaScanner+: select"RG6 AUTO"as the i default Autotest; select"RG6 AUTO"as the default Cable; select"TWP"as the default Jack. Note: The PentaScanner+,when shipped from the factory, does not include the"RG6 AUTO"Autotest; the"RG1 1 AUTO"Autotest;the RG6 AUTO Cable or the"RG1 I AUTO"Cable. Before they can be selected, they must be created and saved as described below: . 4.02 DOCUMENTATION A. Print the test results for the data cables and organize them in sequential order. Submit to r Engineer for review. B. Print the test results for the telephone cables and organize them in sequential order. Submit to Engineer for review. C. Print the test results for the video cables and organize them in sequential order. Submit to . Engineer for review.. D. Create as-built drawings based upon the Related Drawings referenced in sub-section 1.01 B. Submit to Engineer for review. PART 5-WORKMANSHIP 5.01 WORKMANSHIP A. All cables and wires are to be form and tied at racks. B. Proper markings and identification must be maintained. C Sloppy workmanship will be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. VIO I Tj ' BMRRGENCY LIGHTING 1 1 1 1 i Con-Edge Exit Signs provide ultimate flexibility in a i state of the art LED illuminated edge lit sign.Con-Edge provides the elegance of an edge lit sign with the long i life and energy saving attributes of light emitting idiodes as a light source.Every aspect of the Con-Edge exit has been created to provide the designer with the ibroadest possible selection of� possi possibilities for his way finding systems. i � a 1 � ' I .I, Y i Features Product Wall or top mounting. ' _• Universal input t2o-lz77-VAC. Specification ' The exit signs shall be Concealite Con-Edge Series and • Engraved letterin& will conform to all standards listed in the NFPA Life • "Snap-in"placard design. Safety Code and be installed in accordance with Article 700 of the National Electrical Code.The sign's backbox • LED illumination. shall hold the light source,electronics,and batteries rand shall fit in a standard stud wall or ceiling.The sign • NiCad batteries. shall utilize LED's as a light source,If directional arrows • Cast aluminum trim plate. are required,they shall meet the t999 UL Standard. When required,optional battery powered"Emergency.. • Custom colors and finishes available. Exits"shall use NiCad batteries and shall utilize solid state electronics.The placard shalt be a"Snap-in" design for ease of installation.The sign shall be listed with a recognized testing laboratory.. e Constructioirt Con-Edrfe: The back box is designed to fit in a standard studmodel VaubgJan RadoCStitttll Letters Dress Plate wall or ceiling and is made of galvanized steel CEWCR AC Single Face Clear Red Brushed Aluminum with standard knockouts.The trim plate is cast Wall Mount aluminum and the placard is quarter inch thick CEGCR AC Single Face Clear Red Brushed Aluminum acrylic.The letters are silk-screened and each has Ceiling Mount an engraved perimeter. CEDCWR AC Double Face White Red Brushed Aluminum 1 installation ceiling Mount ' Con-Edge can be installed in a standard stud wall CEDCMR Double Face Mirror Red Brushed Aluminum or ceiling.The back box is supplied with hardware Ceiling Mount ' for wall mounting and there is an optional bracket CEWWR AC Single Face White Red Brushed Aluminum to facilitate mounting in a,hung ceiling As with all Wail Mourn Concealite products,custom-mounting brackets for CECWR AC Single Face White Red Brushed Aluminum ` any application can be supplied as an option. Ceiling Mount CEWCG AC Single Face Clear Green Brushed Aluminum ' Trim Plates F'intshes wall Mount Standard:Brushed aluminum,black and white CEWWG AC Single Face White Green Brushed Aluminum Optional Bronze,Chrome,Brass,or any custom Ceiling Mount t color or finish CECWG AC Single Face White Green Brushed Aluminum Illumination Ceiling Mount ' CECCG AC Single Face Clear Green Brushed Aluminum ' Signs are illuminated by ultra high output LEDs Ceiling Mount across the top of the sign positioned to provide CEDCWG Double Face White Green Brushed Aluminum maximum light through the acrylic placard.Con- Ceiling Mount Edge is available in red and green letters. CEDCMG Double Face Mirror Green Brushed Aluminum Self-powered Ceiling Mount e `,� Operation Eoptonal) (3ptians: ' During normal operation,the LED module operates Dress Plate Finishes After Q from utility power.When a power failure occurs, W White PP Power Pack a solid state switch connects the LED module to the battery which will provide go minutes of B Black DC Dual Circuit operation.When utility power is restored,the BZ Bronze FP Fire Panel Interface ' battery is returned to a charging mode. BS Brass F Flasher r AC Input CR Chrome AF Audible Flasher Module All Con-Edge signs have a►2o-lz?7-volt universal UN Unfinished SW Special Wording transformer,a polarized harness assembly is used CC Custom Color to connect AC power to the printed circuit board PD Pendent Mount ' Warranty SM Surface Mount Back Box ' All Con-Edge signs are warrantied for seven years and the battery carries a seven year pro-rated warranty. RA Right Arrow DDA Double Face Arrow LA Left Arrow DLA Double Face Arrow Left ' IRA Left/Right Arrow DRA Double Face Arrow Right VONVUIITE { ' I UNNR6ENCY LICNTINA 143q(37.5 an) —�--� ' 702 7th Avenue Southwest T 111 Z Pipestone.MN 5664 5• Phone: F—(507)825-4995 tza1 `i ` j 1 ) ' hup.,#wwwxo#cealim.com �a-13114'(33.7 an) --- e-mail.concealite cibao&om ' Vr999 Concealite Emergency Lighting E002-0299 �(" (t.�/r✓ 1.1�3'Gt.- G7f' �t�TlCr I� t Models 8710, 8712, 8713 Detectors Features Intelli ent Detectors for use with �1GI�L 6 0 and 7000 Control Panels ' •Three models available Photo(8710),Photo-Thermal (8713)and Mol'Thermal,fixed and rate of rise(8712) ' •High-Speed,Fault-Tolerant Communication •Mufti-color status LED(green,amber,red) z . •Feld cleanable photo chamber - 8710 •Electronic addressing with field programmer model 8720 •Mounts in standard 8853 Series Base •Low Profile Design •Optional fully programmable relay base, 8712135OF Thermal , audible base and duct housing '- *Two Wire Operation • `!UL Listed,CSFM,NYMEA Approved 8713 Photo Thermal Introduction M The 8710 and 8713 intelligent photoelectric smoke Smoke detectors utilize an infrared light emitting detectors provide reliable smoke detection to meet diode(IRLED)and a light sensing photodiode. today's critical life safety and property protection Under normal conditions,light transmitted by the M needs.The FireSmart series of detectors provide LED is directed away from the photodiode and an extremely high degree of resistance to RFI,EMI scattered through the smoke chamber in a con- and humidity.The FireSmart series detector utilizes trolled pattern.The smoke chamber is designed to a microprocessor with"on-board"EEPROM sup- manage light dissipation and extraneous reflec- porting the detectors sophisticated programming, tions from dust particles or other non-smoke 1 error checking and self-diagnostic capabilities. airborne contaminants in such a way as to maintain stable,consistent detector operation. When smoke 1 The 8710 is an intelligent smoke detector,the enters the chamber,light emitted from the IRLED is 8713 i�amoke detector with thermal as�it,and scattered by the smoke particles and is received by the 8712 is a heat detector.The thermal sensors the photodiode. rrespond at 1350F.These devices are designed for M use with the MPC-6000 and 7000 control panels When an alarm condition occurs,the detector and use the 8853 detector base. "latches"in alarm and informed the control panel of its status.The detector is reset upon command r Description from the control panel.The control panel also sets The 8710,8712 and 8713 are two-wire,plug-in detec- the detector's sensitivity. tors that are compatible with the MPC-6000 and 7000 Every time the control panel polls the detector,the ' control panels. Each 8710 and 8713 have a dust multi-color LED will flash green to indicate that it resistant,field cleanable photo chamber and micro- has passed the internal self test and has communi- processor based electronics.The 8712 and 8713 cated its status to the control panel. If the detector utilize a state-of-the-anthermistor for heat sensing. does not pass the self test,is dirty beyond the All detectors have low profile,high-temperature limits of its environmental compensation,or is in plastic covers for maximum protection of compo- "trouble"in any way,the LED flashes amber and ' nents and use surface mount electronic components informs the panel of its status,allowing for easy for increased reliability. Every smoke detector is identification of which detector is in trouble. When shipped with a red protective dust cover. in alarm,the detector LED flashes red. r 9604 r i Detectors are assigned their address using the ceilings may also affect safe spacing limitations of 8720 Field Programmer/tester,which electronically detectors. Should any questions arise regarding . stores address information in the detectors non- detector placement,observe NFPA 72 guidelines. volatile memory.The 8720 can also be used for Locating in close proximity to"noisy"electronic light device testing and diagnostics. ballasts or other sources of high level EMI or RFI The FireSmart series detectors can be on the same should be avoided. circuit as other 8700 series initiating devices such Good fire protection system engineering and as manual stations,TRI Monitoring/Relay Modules, common sense dictate how and when fire detection etc. Detectors are mounted in the standard 8853 or devices are installed and used. Contact your local . 8716 Relay Base,8715 Audible Base,or 8840/8717 Faraday authorized sales outlet whenever you need Duct Housing. Use the standard 8727C or 8727W assistance applying these devices. Be sure to follow (red) Remote Lamps when remote annunciation NFPA guidelines,the UL approved installation is required. instructions provided with the product and local c Smoke detectors are field cleanable per the instruc- odes,as with any otherfire protection equipment. tions included on the installation sheet provided with Dimensions 1 se the product. X1 series detectors are UL listed for aanzter� operation within the standard UL specified tempera- ture range of 32 to 100 degrees F(0 to 38 degrees Q. Application Data T Installation of X1 series detectors require detector overall iiii bases 8853,8715,8716,or 8840. "eight The 8710 and 8713 detectors can be applied within a maximum 30-foot center spacing(900 square foot area)as referenced in NFPA 72.This applications Technical Specifications guideline is based on ideal conditions;specifically, OperatingTemperature smooth ceiling surfaces,minimal air movement and +320F(0°C)to 100OF(38°C) per UL 269/268A no physical obstructions between potential fire sources and the detector. Do not mount detectors Humidity in close proximity to ventilation or heating and air 0-93%Relative Humidity Non-Condensing conditioning outlets. Exposed joints or beamed ' Current Draw ' Ordering Information 1 mA in alarm or stand-by mode ' .... Description 87 00 Photoelectric Detector 500-034800FA t8711:2 Photo-Thermal Detector(FireSmart) 500-033290FA 135°F FixedThermal Detector 500-033380FA Audible Base 500-033210FA ' 8853 Detector Base 500-094151FA 8840 Air Duct Housing 500-095656FA r 8717 Air Duct Housing with Relay 500-03328OFA ' 8716 Relay Base 500-033920FA -- 8727W Remote Lamp(red)for 4"octagon box 500-033310FA ` t 8727C Remote Lamp(red)for single gang box 500-033230FA I 8720 Field Programmer 500-033260FA 8846 Detector base lock(Pkg.of 50) 500-695350FA RIM is The information contained in this document is intended only as a summary and is subject to change without notice.The devices described in this document have specific instruction sheets which cover various technical,limitation and liability information.Copies Siemens Building Technologies,Inc. of these instruction sheets and the General Product Warning and Limitations Document, 8 Fernwood Road•Florham Park,NJ 07932 which also contains important information,are provided with the product and are available Tel: (973) 593-2600 Fax: (973) 593-6670 from the Manufacturer.information contained in these documents should be consulted before specifying or using the product.For further information or assistance concerning Web:www.faradayfirealarms.com particular problems contact the Manufacturer. 12/04 2M SBT/IG December 2004-Supersedes sheet dated 12/03 Remote EmergencyLightingFixtures PRO-2 Remote Series Standard Features The Provider Series is the new look in emergency lighting design. lr*l sleek low profile thermoplastic body and transparent polycarbonate lamp shield combine to make a contemporary style that's just right for today's aesthetic demands.Finished in off-white,the provider will , ► compliment a variety of interiors in stores,offices,theaters,restaurants _All and shopping malls.Provider is versatile too,its body,measuring only ' It r 11°X 5°can be mounted in any orientation on wall or ceiling. How To Order Model F) ._ ..........................12PR0-2 Z s 24 volt 18 total unit wattage...:........................................24PR0-2(ZN) DLM-2 Remote Series Standard Features Two flush mounted fresnel lenses add a contemporary,elegant style to the DLM-2.Constructed of thermoplastic,its compact design measures only 5 inches by 12 3/8 inches. The DLM-2 Series has a lightly textured, off-white finish and is compact in design which blends well with a variety j of architectural surfaces.No screws or other mounting hardware is visible.It can be mounted in any orientation on walls or ceilings. How To Order Model v 6 volt 10.8 total unit wattage................................................60LM-10 F R„ [HIL `= 6 volt 14.4 total unit wattage................................................6OLM-14 F ECL Remote Series Standard Features The Escort is a versatile exit sign,featuring an all-in-one design.The ECL exit sign includes two face plates,a backplate and a canopy for universal mounting.Its LED light source consumes less then 2 watts of energy.The exit housing is molded in tough high impact thermoplastic with a scratch resistant suede finish.It's off white or optional black color blends well with a variety of interiors and matches other Escort family emergency units and remote heads. How To Order Model Universal Mount,6,12,24,36 and 48 Volt DC Remote,120/277, Red LED exit sign ..................................................................ECL4RDC gh;hv_ ixtu=z &A:cessa:ies trEMERGI-LITE 1P �o�►cE �,rE • EMERAENtLY LIONTIN® • - . Con"Edge Fait Signs provide ultimate flexibility in a state of the art LED illuminated edge;lit sign.Con-Edge . provides the elegance of an edge!it sign with the long . life and energy saving attributes of light emitting diodes as a light source.Every,aspect of the Con-Edge exit has been created to provide the designer with 4he : broadest possible selection of possibilities for his way finding systems �._ . 4 �j r • Wall or,top nlolmting. PrOdtlCt' ' • Universal F3 ]tfj4c"Ti0in ' ' input:tm-/277�-YAC. >.. • Engraved lettering. The e�signs shall be Cealiie Con Edge Series and ' will conform to all standards listed in the NFPA life ' • "Snap-in"placard design. Safety Code and be Installed in accordance with Article 700 of the National Electrical Code.The sigti s backbox ' • LED illumination. shall hold the light source,electronics,and batteries ' and shall fit in a standard stud wall or ceiling.The sign• Nit:ad batteries. shall utilize LED's as a light source.If directional arrows ' • Cast aluminum trim plate. are required,they shall meet the iggq UL'Stan ard. When required,,optional battery powered-Emergency ' • Custom colors and finishes available. Exits"shall use NiCad batteries and shall utilize solid ' state electronics.The placard shall be a-Snap-in- design for ease of installation.The sign shall be listed ' with a recognized testing*laboratory. 1 /�� Construction Cc�r�-Edge. The back box is designed to fit in a standard studModel afficlau" AS d Letters prat plait wall or ceiling and is made of galvanized steel CEWCR AC Single Face Clear Red Brushed Aluminum with standard knockouts.The trim plate is cast Wall Mount ' aluminum and the placard is quarter Inch thick CECCR AC Single Face Clear Red Brushed Aluminum acrylic:The letters are silk-screened and each has Ceiing"Mount ' an engraved perimeter. CEDM AC Double Face White Red Brushed Aluminum ' Installation Ceiling Mown Con-Edge can be installed in a standard stud wall CEDCMR Double Face; Mirror Red Brushed Aluminum or ceiling.The back box is supplied wtth hardware Ceiling Mount ' for wall mounting and there is,an optional bracket CEWWR AC Single Face White Red Brushed Aluminum to f4cititate-tncnntting in a hung tenting As w(th all Wall Mount Canceaiite products„custom4nountinS brackets for CECWR AC Single Face White Red Brushed Aluminum ' any application can be supplied as an option. Ceiling Mount CEWCG AC Single Face ©ear Green Brushed Aluminum Trim Flame- Fi tnishes Wall Mount Standard:Brushed aluminum,black and white CEW WG AC Single Face White Green Brushed Aluminum Optional:Bronze,Chrome,Brass,or any custom Ceiling Mount color or finish CECWG AC Single Face White Green Brushed Aluminum Ceiling Mount l l l tuM i riat iclo" CECCG AC'Single Face Clear Green Brushed Aluminum Signs are illuminated by ultra high output LED's Ceiling Mount across the top of the sign positioned to provide CEDCWG Double Face White Green Brushed Aluminum maximum light through the acrylic placard.Con Ceiling Mount Edge is available in red and Veen letters. CEDCMG Double Face Mirror Green Brushed Aluminum S@ 1>F pc ovverced Ceiling Mount Operatic)on �optic�rnal) C►prtions- During normal operation,the LED module operates nc> :li 4241tt'�SlIRo>r,s from utility power.When a power failure occurs, W White. PP Power Pack a solid state switch connects the LED module to the battery which will provide go minutes of B Black DC Dual Circuit operation.When utility power is restored,the BZ Bronze FP Fire Panel Interface battery is returned to a charging mode. BS Brass F Flasher AC Inplut CR Chrome AF Audible Flasher Module All Con-Edge signs have a tzo-/z77 volt universal UN Unfinished SW Special Wording transformer,a polarized harness assembly is used CC Custom Color to connect AC power to the printed'circuit board. PD Pendent Mount Warranty SM Surface Mount Back Box All Con-Edge signs are warrantied for seven years and the battery carries a seven year RA Right Arrow DDA Double Face Arrow pro-rated warranty. LA Leh Arrow DtA Double Face Arrow Left- LRA Leftftht Arrow ORA Double Face Arrow Right 1431((37.5 pn) ttNiRgtpCY Lf6BTINq —}— MMEMMMIT 7oz 7th Avenue Southwest I ii1 Pipestone.MN 56t64 « (2asan) Phone:(sow)8z5'2go7 aoa m,) <EX I EXIT> 1 Fax:(507)825-4995 http://unaw coned te.cam �. —i3�/,Cs3.T an) ___� I-1311�(33.T an) --� e-mail:concealite@aoLcem ®)ggg Concealite Emergency Lighting Eoos-oigg `"--) fk t vi Ltli lTY2 t G4 C 'j i o i 9 3 � G A ff"V* c 4— - cvw✓ BE NJAMv MOORE S492M WIJJAMS 04!z4 i . GREAT BARRKGTON GRE3%F WC-0 ROYC ROFT ERONZE'.GRM!W SW2S46 0 SLA.DM E KTE RIOR EI.J<om EXTERIOR ❑ o O I C Y r o 4— s �B o o seashell brushed aluminum 1485 04/ul oS ,' 6E:NJAMf4 M�O�O_RyE� 8�0Iy4�J.AI�MI�N MOORE 3 W'u0 CRUS-ED AUA&4.I A- MW 0 TRIM TRM, DOORS. S v DOWS c 3 o I COLOR OPTION I COLOR OPTION 2 oR- FIRST N oR-i SECOND S XM SSKM i 1 SD ATELIER Apdl DATE A R C H I T E C T U R E PROPOSED EXPANSION FOR: PLANNING DESIGN REVIEW THE BUDGET INN COLOR OPTIONS � DR - 1 s +sosoo-e.nr. 931 N.Y.S.ROUTE 9 ' QUEPJiSBURY,NEW YOU 12804 SNEEr NAME AND SCATS SNEEr NUMBER PROJECT NUMBER-1003-66 Aw oo�� \I vim If.i■i. - - OWS AND DOORS CHART STANDARD COLORS I rim r A-140 A-1880 (BRONZE) (GREEN) B B A-106 A-120 (WHITE/WINDOW) (BROWN) A-85 HICKORY) I i A-105 (IVORY) A-107 A-82 (SANDLEWOOD) (GENTEK CASHMERE) January 2005 opr'tom � CvW Al ft"gw l.Jl r dv*t, op